Home

Kaleido-X User`s Manual

1. i Display Display Default Display Slot OUTPUT A Slot OUTPUT A f V4 Head Head 1 Head Head 1 A f s System SW FR7 1 System SVV FR4 Sonv FVVD 40LX1S System ee Y System v DE Kaleido x p SW FR7 1 10 0 Ez 400 OUTPURB KXO DUAL Display Display Heal 1 Room Slot Slot Head 2 Room Head Head gt OUTPUT B Kx DUAL ll OUTPUT c XKO DUAL AM OUTPUT Bf KXO DUAL BE Kaleido x ARO SW FR4 10 6 6 51 Y M OUTPUT A KXO DUAL BEH 1 Room b Head 2 Room1 Y I OUTPUT B KXO DUAL Head 1 Room2 Head 2 Room2 A Connected to 10 0 9 39 d 4 Roomsooms Date 12 19 08 11 42 AM Connection to 10 0 9 39 established successfully Alternatively right click the display point to Assign head navigate to the appropriate output card and then click the output head you wish to assign to this display 149 a Setting Up Rooms 150 System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions K Undo 4 Redo db Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C amp Paste Ctrl T Bring to front Ctri R T Send to back Ctri B6 Assign head b OUTPUT A KXO DUAL gt Head 1 OUTPUT B KXO DUAL gt Head 2 The name of the output head is indicated on the display In the case of a Kaleido X 4RU or Kaleido X 7RU the card slot is also indicated In the case of a cluster system the name of the originating multi viewer a
2. Bevel Christmas Island Time indians Border antialiasing Cocos Islands Time Indianica Border color Colombia Time AmericaBog GREW Wes Cook le Time Pacitfic Raroton eae ema Coordinated Universal Time E Date on Logo Miranda logo Minutes tours color MMB F5 co Bn Scale color C R 204 G 204 5 255 Seconds color LF 204 G 204 B 204 Transparency OF Y Mouse click If you select Autodetect then the clock will use the time zone from the assigned source based on the following rules e Ifthe clock is bound to an LTC or DVITC time code that includes time zone information then the time zone is decoded from the time code e Ifthe clock is bound to the system time or to an LTC or DVITC time code that does not include time zone information then inthe case of a Kaleido X or Kaleido X16 multi viewer model the time zone configured in XAdmin applies in the case of a KMV 3901 3911 time is always based on UTC 3 Modify the clock s Appearance properties as needed From the Clock type list select between a digital an analog or a combo type clock 7 12 hour display Background color MR c7 By Bevel raised Border antialiasing Border color BRO coea a Date format Date on Loga Minutes hours color cia But Scale color C F 204 G 204 5 255 Seconds color C R204 G 204 B 204 Transparency ies Resize the clock as needed set color attributes and se
3. A two pane window appears The left pane represents the source layout and the right pane represents the destination room where the new layout is to be used 181 az Creating Layouts 182 Copy layout to Copying layout InputA to Room First drag head number fram the source layout to the destination room 3 Drag one head from the source pane to the destination pane 4 Repeat until every part of the source layout you wish to copy has been dragged to the appropriate head in the destination pane and then click Copy layout The Save Layout window appears 5 In Save Layout type a name for the new layout and then click Save Alternatively you can replace an existing layout with the new layout Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors In addition to the widget libraries the Tools pane includes filtered lists from which you can make assignments by dragging logical sources and monitor wall destinations onto monitors Note You do not need to select the monitor first To assign a logical source to a monitor e Select a logical source from the filtered Channels Sources list in the Tools pane and then drag it onto the appropriate monitor To assign a monitor wall destination to a monitor Select a destination from the filtered Monitor wall destinations list in the Tools pane and then drag it onto the appropriate monitor Selecting a Background Image for a Layout For s
4. Mode Underscan Custom overscan Overscan L 5 0 T 5 0 R 5 0 5 KK kd Safe area markers Custom sate zone image Mone M arae 7 Co e TA c eact 4 Inthe Custom Overscan window specify new percentage values for Left Right Top and Bottom overscan margins then click OK Restore detautts Lett 367 50 Right c 5 0 Top 360 5 0 Bottom 6 5 0 Note Generally avoid exceeding 15 in any direction You can click Restore defaults to enter the default overscan values left right top and bottom 5 Safe title area and aspect ratio markers follow the video signal e g if the safe title is within 5 of top left right and bottom then when the video is in default overscan mode the safe title will not appear When the layout is loaded on the Kaleido X the updated overscan underscan properties become available 193 az Creating Layouts 194 Configuring Automatic Aspect Ratios The aspect ratio of video displayed on the monitor wall can be automatically adjusted With multiple video players monitors on a monitor wall in multiple formats aspect ratios this makes it easy to switch from one format to another in same player Automatic adjustment can be accomplished in two ways e Video monitor slaved to input A video monitor can be slaved to the input format such that the video monitor will change its aspect ratio according to the input signal type e g SD HD DVI Video raster follows AFD WSS
5. cece cece eee eee es 339 TSL serial cachwehdwetstevaw sew sGalencer 311 MN areena i 53 207 211 assigning to RCP users n 260 assigning to rooms cece eee eens 255 Traps SNMP caver Susaseaveaseaveaseuvessadss 131 Troubleshooting ceceeee ee eee eee 383 system snapshot sceeceeceees 345 TSL serial devices cece cee ceceeceveees 311 U UMD Editing TEKE cdi nd srd oud evesadettwat ine 47 Static tE eiiean a 214 LOX ETON EAEN T 214 UnderscaN o sees da dre naien aneia 192 WDOFACING eieaa ETE A 390 V V chip monitor 2 cece cece eee ee eee ee 219 Version information cece cece ewes 387 VERSIONS seurana T EE 346 Video monitors eee cece e eee eee 187 aspectratio 0 cece cence cece ence veer 187 COPDING c2n aahersesdeacendendrwdmnaiads 192 duplicating cece cece cece e eens 180 TUIS ree rrai en elytra tote 41 OVEISCAMl 280s ees iaeiae an 42 192 FESIZING sii ossudouhantmsaminaaaadsann 187 safe area oo cece cece cece ee eee 43 189 underscan cece cece eee eee eens 42 192 ZOOMING sseitdataisarcatndeancacasetadanaaee 192 Virtual card slot veined evkindiiiodt dd ddatde 65 wW Widgets darm statis csrssria resres esacsi 121 216 OK O EA cs 220 223 composite asnvea cretion esdoeweeguatewaxowes 225 NWDKAPICS osctriricantieciadi sid eN 234 replication ccc cece cece cence ee ees 180 source assignment 000 48 18
6. cece cece ence eee 121 threshold ccc cece cece eee eee 125 MIMUG E 121 Andromeda cceccecesceeceeceeeecs 311 Aspect ratio calibration cece cece cece cee cece ee 110 CHANGING E E SETE 41 ofa room display c cece eees 162 Aspect ratios RED EEA 194 AUTOMATIC sareirieieiksiteskeiie cache 194 W a E EAA EE 194 Assigning alarms to logical sources 005 141 audio outputs to RCP users 0 259 full screen layouts to RCP users 258 logical sources to monitors 0 48 room layouts to RCP users 0 257 timers to RCP users n 260 timers tOrOOMS cece cece ene 255 Audio MetdCdld oj 0dacdentoniasdasdawies deed 109 monitoring delay eeeaeee 102 reference level ceeceeees 106 107 Audio Bridge Terminal 345 368 Audio level meters BG cv eussavyaweieeceeeucareniaerwes 203 Audio monitoring triggered by actions 00 58 59 triggered from the RCP2 0 58 Audio monitors SCAG rE TE 203 Audio outputs assigning to RCP users eee eee 259 Audio scales n on 201 203 DaGKUN otasicuieccestantcuiandastessencs 75 Auto layout cece cece cence ene eeeees 180 Automatic aspect ratios 0 cece eee ee eee 194 ICV GIS a Satcaecar antes asia enatemtanee 139 An i e cgig hoe es eating sian E A 363 B aE E EEE TE E E E seo 220 B
7. Message Description KMV Blower South East Blower South East is running too low based on the replace whole module if thresholds set at hardware level or is broken in error Blower North West Blower North West is running too low based on the replace whole module if thresholds set at hardware level or is broken in error Blower South West Blower Sort West is running too low based on the X replace whole module if thresholds set at hardware level or is broken in error Upgrade dashboard messages Message Description 7RU 4RU X16 KMV Error during firmware upgrade Firmware upgrade cannot proceed until legacy KXO lt 3 00 are removed from frame B Error during firmware upgrade Card presence from frame B could not be verified This message will appear on an expansion frame with expansion enabled and with cards in frame B running software firmware older than version 3 00 To upgrade these cards transfer them to frame A This message will appear as a side effect of the presence of cards in frame B running a version older than version 3 00 The upgrade will not be permitted on any card in the frame until these cards are removed from frame B To upgrade these cards transfer them to frame A Error during firmware upgrade Duplicate IP has been detected We cannot continue checking the Firmware version Error during firmware upgrade The current firmware version could not be verified This message
8. J amp uto update labels Label 0 ideo NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 1 1 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 4 4 1 2 3 NewPhysicalRouter video Input 5 5 4 NewPhysicalRouter video Input 6 6 5 NewPhysicalRouter Yideo Input 7 7 6 7 6 9 NewPhysicalRouter Wideo Input 8 8 New PhysicalRouter Video Input 9 9 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 10 10 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 11 11 10 New PhysicalRouter Video Input 12 12 11 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 13 13 12 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 14 14 13 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 15 15 14 NevwPhysicalRouter Video Input 16 16 15 NevPhysicalRouter Video Input 2 2 16 16 NevwPhysicalRouter Video Input 3 3 IMPORTANT You can have the same physical sources and destinations mapped to multiple logical routers The software does not prevent this In the case of destinations care must be taken to avoid conflicts when using auto mapping At this point you have completed the source and destination mapping for a logical level e g 0 Video Additional levels can be created For example it is often necessary to switch the audio at the same time as the video If you have a video router and an audio router and you select Video 2 on the former you probably want the associated audio to switch as well To accomplish this define a
9. For each empty slot that should be populated with a card right click the slot in the System list and then click Insert card type on the shortcut menu Alternatively drag the card from the equipment library onto the empty card slot 86 Restoring Factory Defaults Tools System Channels Sources Destinations Rooma Layouts RCP users Actions Equipment Description Calibr ations Interconnects Router contiquratians Router connections System e BE Kaleido x 7RU F M GPUSENLOCK KX4 GPLGEN PD OPTION A KxO 24Router OPTION B gt INPUT A KXI 16 gt INPUT B K 16 TD INPUT K l 16 E IPLIT Co AI INPUT E insert KAI 16 M INPUT F OUTPUT A KxO DUAL OUTPUT E KxXO DUAL D OUTPUT KxXO DUAL M OUTPUT C KxXO DUAL The slot name is now appended with the card type DE Kaleido X TRU gt I GPVGENLOCK KXA GPI GEN gt DD OPTION A Kx0 24Router eB OPTION B M INPUT A K 16 fT INPUT B KX1 16 M INPUT K 1 16 m Seta lt Populated slot M INPUT E K 16 M IMPUT F KXI 16 M OUTPLIT A KXO BUAL M OUTPUT E KXO DUAL M OUTPLIT KXO DUAL M OUTPLIT D KXO DUAL 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar All card assignments are saved Restoring Factory Defaults A number of predefined rooms and layouts are available on the multi viewer when you first install the system Simila
10. Optional Drivers for Controlling Tally Interface Devices from the Multi Viewer Optional drivers are available to extend your Kaleido X system with the ability to control tally interface devices such as the ones listed in the tables below Contact your sales representative for details Production Switchers Company Thomson Grass Valley Device System Kalypso Zodiak KayakDD Kayak SD HD DD35 XtenDD HD SD series Ross Snell amp Wilcox Sony Synergy series Kahuna DVS 9000 MVS 8000 MFS 2000 UMD Controllers Company TSL Thomson Grass Valley Device System UMD Controller serial TCP IP or UDP IP Andromeda UMD Controller Image Video TSI 1000 Tally System Interface requires option from Image Video Automation Systems Company Device System Encoda Harris Sundance Digital D Series Playout Automation Fastbreak NXT Automation requires option from Sundance Digital 274 Serial Connections Built in Communications Protocols The multi viewer itself can be controlled by external devices e g Kaleido RCP2 router control panels or applications e g router control software application Remote Control Gateway via built in communications protocols Such devices or applications can be used to command monitor wall operations e g Source assignment or routing operations A router control device or application can control not only a Kaleido X 7RU or Kaleido X16 multi viewer s i
11. erp Disconnected Disconnected 4 Click the button that appeared at the end of the box to open the External Alarm Providers Configuration window S External Alarm Providers Configuration EJ Providers list Host address 10 0 14159 B ada Adal Remove H Cancel 5 Add or remove alarm providers as needed and then click OK to confirm and apply the changes or click Cancel to close the window without saving your changes to the external alarm providers list To add an alarm provider to the list 1 Select the appropriate device from the Host address list Alternatively you can type its IP address in the box 129 6 Configuring Alarms x SE External Alarm Providers Configuration Providers list Host address 10 0 5115 50 9 112 ble3_exp 50 59 1153 1069 10 0 0 9 10 2 Click Add The alarm provider is added to the list To remove an alarm provider e Inthe Providers list box select the provider you wish to remove and then click Remove The alarm provider is removed from the list Enabling Alarm Logging As part of the alarm calibration process you can specify that an alarm when triggered be logged to an iControl application server that has a GSM log plug in configured for this multi viewer Note By default native alarms are not logged but virtual alarms and global alarms are always logged In addition when a virtual alarm status changes the
12. gl Timecodes Bevel none Hide at loss of video M z Current aspect ratio 16 9 Custom aspect ratio 16 9 Automatic Aspect Ratio OFF Follow AFDAVSS 7 Mode Custom overscan Overscan L 5 0 T 5 0 R 5 0 B 5 0 M4 Safe area markers Custom safe zone image None Marker color E R 170 G 170 B 170 Safe title offsets x 0 0 y 0 0 Safe zone aspect ratio 3 Mode Select the applicable mode underscan or o Y _Layout Multihead layout Room_A MultiHeadLayout0 OFFLINE The underscan overscan settings for a video monitor appear in the list of properties for its layout The Underscan Overscan settings appear in the Properties pane 2 Choose Underscan to display the entire video signal or Overscan to display a cropped video signal from the drop down menu beside Mode 192 Configuring Video Monitors Tips Layouts LayoutMuttihead layout Roon AMutineadLlayoutt z Automatic Aspect Ratio Follow SFOS Detak GREYS S Valle kl Underscan Overscan Custom overscan OFF _Underscan HA Underscan Overscan L 5 0 T 5 0 R 5 0 B 5 0 3 To specify custom crop settings click in the white area to the right of Custom overscan then click the button that appears Tips Layouts LayoutMuttihead layout Roon AMutineadLlayoutt E Automatic Aspect Ratio Follow AFDANSS Detauib SEDANS ss valle kl Underscan Overscan
13. 1 T w a 2a 2 2 Pia ie LUUT CUME A ay aye D gt Eia EA D 1B gt o A aA LA 5 tarer EOE U gt gt DJ be We we we ae gt gt y S J W y DAY A EA EA mt t oat 7 gt y gt t Vous 7 Dy x Yes Y A 2 wo wt Yet DJ DJ gt UL Ree Switching Power Supply Client PC power over Ethernet XEdit amp XAdmin SDTI Video Input Connections Dedicated Ethernet Switch 100Base T Audio Bridge Terminal Kaleido X 7RU x 2 Refer to the Kaleido X 7RU Expansion chapter in the Kaleido X 7RU Hardware Description amp Installation Manual 27 Getting Started RS 422 Connection Diagram 28 Note For information on the KMV 3911 multi viewer s RS 422 interface refer to the KMV 3911 Guide to Installation and Operation available on the DVD that shipped with your system In the case of a Kaleido X multi viewer each output card supports one RS 422 port over an RJ 45 connector The Kaleido X16 supports two RS 422 serial inputs over RJ 45 connectors These inputs allow the multi viewer to connect to external serial devices such as a router production switcher or router controller Note The RS 422 ports each have an RJ 45 connector in order to preserve space on a busy panel The RS 422 interface specifies a DE 9 connector so if you are using this interface you will require a DE 9 to RJ 45 adapter
14. 100MB half duplex F Output B bo lb e Next IF Date and Time Current date and time Friday April 30 2010 07 03 50 PM GMT 04 00 Locale Time zone NTP synchronization Enabled Disabled New date April 30 2010 Sa New time 7 Ho fpo PM iy Click Save to save your settings and continue _Save The default system name corresponds to your order number Type a different name for your system if you wish Note Only lower ASCIl characters are allowed in the system name Braces and tilde are not allowed lfthis system requires a 50Hz frame rate select the corresponding check box Adjust the date and time settings as required Clocks in your layouts will then display date and time in the applicable format for the selected locale 5 Type the appropriate IP address information in each of the boxes and then click Save The new settings are saved locally si The configuration has been sawed Do not forget to apply the changes at the end of the session OK 6 Click OK The Apply settings button becomes available 360 Detailed Directions System configuration Status and options Technical support Apply settings Click Apply settings The Kaleido X system must be restarted for changes to the network configuration to take effect A message appears prompting you to reboot the system immediately Click OK Note Settings cannot be applied to a multi vi
15. 4 gt 4 4 OUTPUT B KXO DUAL s n 079201 18372016 Firmware 0 208E Safemode 0x56 For example in the case of a Kaleido X multi viewer the heading rows show the card type serial number firmware and safemode versions a card status indicator and input signal status indicators The card Status indicator shows whether the card is running normally green or in safe mode red The signal status indicators reveals the presence of a valid input signal at the corresponding connector 3 Move the pointer to an input signal status indicator to view the associated signal format Status indicator Card type Serial number Lr peri GO Leip ly INPUT A KXI 16HSV s n 079401 19797007 CEJ Firmware Ox8F Safemode 0x6F AA Version information Inputs WWVVVOUIVIUY lt __ ___ nput signal status w INPUT B KXI 16HSV s n 079401 19797009 ideo 14 ipani 50Hz 25H2 PSF Ol e Firmware OxSF Safemode Ox6F Input signal format Inputs 999 VIO VIVDIVZIIGS wi OUTPUT A KXO DUAL s n 079201 18372006 o E Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 wW OUTPUT B master KXO DUAL s n 079201 18900026 O Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 KXO DUAL Display 90 Deg Rotation Option Disable Key olbc6c3e EDID DVI Out 1 EDID Presence 7 EDID DVI Out 1 Frequency 59 95017128620368 Env TWIT Overt d Unervontal Active 10 7Nn 4 Click the arrow button at the end of a module s heading row to vi
16. 8 9 10 k I N N I Ne l N I No A AUDIO FUNCTIONS oe g Be C gt ES T m iin Jj i f2 CN E NIAAA channe ies rife cup Lise J Ko Le JI J SCREEN J __ INHIBIT F A S wm J lt 64 Oo OB 8 E J J zis NF NSS RLF CEA J J PANEL ENTER ql C 7 i 3 9 a 0 LOAD ji SAVE f unatcy ENABLE POR J Yy AE a NE J J STATUS 7 R Kaleido RCP2 Before you can use the RCP2 to operate your Kaleido X you must set up the Ethernet connection between the two devices By default the Kaleido RCP2 is shipped with DHCP enabled so it will automatically be assigned an IP address by a DHCP server If no DHCP server is present on the network the Kaleido RCP2 will default to the static IP address 10 0 3 191 Notes e The Kaleido RCP2 is powered through the RJ 45 Ethernet connector There is no power ON OFF button so the device is ON whenever a powered Ethernet cable is connected e Ifyou purchased more than one Kaleido RCP2 units keep in mind that they all ship with the same default static IP address Make sure to assign them different static IP addresses before connecting them to the network if DHCP is not used e The time out period before the RCP2 defaults to its static address is 1 minute To speed up the initialization disable the DHCP option To assign a static IP address to the RCP2 1 Press and hold the ENT
17. Disconnect Database Use Admin Configure Audio Bridge Terminal The Select Backup window appears XEdit C _DBXEdr Ly Export Ry Import Create backup Retrieve backup Merge backup O Do not prompt for the database path Restore kK 2 In Select Backup navigate to the appropriate backup file a ZIP archive in the case of a full database backup select it and then click Open A message appears prompting you to confirm your intention Are you sure you want to retrieve a backup The current database content will be overyeritten Kis recommended to create a backup of the current database before retrieving another ane 3 Click Yes The former content of the local workspace is entirely replaced with data from the backup Retrieving Resolutions or Audio Scales from a Backup To retrieve resolutions or audio scales from a backup 1 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Retrieve backup XEdit C _DBXEdrt File Edt Configure wiew Tools Help Connect Disconnect Tools Database apt Use Admin Configure Audio Bridge Terminal A Export ET Import Create backup Retrieve backup Merge backup O Do not prompt for the database path The Select Backup window appears a al i Restore 2 In Select Backup navigate to the appropriate backup file an XEdit collection file witha xcol extension select it and then
18. HD Reference In OUTPUTS GPIIN 9 16 8448 06_r1 48V DC Power Out Redundant AC 100 240V AC GPI In 9 16 to Control Panel Power Supply 2 Power Supply 1 GPI Out 33 64 option 2 M E only Grounding Lug 1 Manuals and Release Notes for the Thomson Grass Valley production switchers are available here http www grassvalley com docs all_switchers html manuals 331 Tally Interface Devices 332 The Kayak switcher s 8 control ports have DE 9 female connectors with the following pinouts Pin Signal 1and9 Chassis Ground 2 RX 3 TX 7 RX 8 TX 4and 6 Signal Ground Note See RS 422 Connection Diagram on page 28 for pinouts on the multi viewer Install the Sidepanel software available on the Kayak Software CD on a PC or laptop if you have not already done so Refer to your switcher s Release Notes for installation instructions Launch the Sidepanel software and navigate to the Install gt E Box menu Click the Router tab Under Automation Control 1 select the appropriate serial port i e the one to which the multi viewer is connected and the protocol type only acos_vxxx should be available This completes the configuration required on the switcher The ACOS protocol is now enabled on the serial port used for the connection between the switcher and the multi viewer The multi viewer system will be able to send commands to the switcher and the switcher will respo
19. KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI GI KXA GPI GI KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KXA GPI G KOUA GPI G KXLA GPI G ae ee EN EN L2V Status 1 8V Status 2 5V Status 3 3V Status 48V Power Supply A Fuse Status 48V Power Supply B Fuse Status Board High Temperature Board Temperature C EN z KXA GPI GEN KXA GPI GEN KXA GPI GEN KXA GPI GEN EN z KXA GPI GEN KXA GPI GEN KXA GPI GEN KXA GPI GEN CPLD Version Card Model Card Patch Number Card Revision Card Type Chassis Door Open Status Chassis Identifier FPGA Version Firmware Package Number Firmware Type EN Firmware Version EN Frame Rate EN EN EN Normal Mode Power Supply A Status Power Supply B Status Rear Fan 1 Status Rear Fan 2 Status Rear Fan 3 Status PSU statuses a r lt fan statuses The other statuses especially the ones listed in the table below should all be normal although if you left the door open when checking a GPI Genlock card s LEDs you may see a warning under Chassis Door Open Status KXA GPI GEN 1 2V Status KXA GPI GEN 1 8V Status KXA GPI GEN 2 5V Status 1 The KXA GPI GEN card with support for GPI is standard on the Kaleido X 7RU and optional for the Kaleido X 4RU GPI support is built in on the Kaleido X16 and Kaleido Modular multi viewers Getti
20. Audio monitoring output Physical audio output selected for this RCP user Note If no audio monitoring output is specified for this user the output signal that has been selected in the room s preferences will apply It will appear in gray in the Audio monitoring output box See Setting Room Preferences on page 252 Setting the Keyboard Language To set the input language for an external keyboard connected to the RCP2 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the user for whom you wish to set the keyboard from under the appropriate room in the rooms hierarchical list In the Properties pane click the Keyboard box and then select the keyboard to be used by this user in this room from the list of available keyboard configurations 259 Ei Managing Kaleido RCP2 Users Tips Properties RCF users Roo User2 User name Wser2 Password btt t ttt Description Preset 1 Layouts Preset 2 Layout4 Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout2 Preset 5 Layout Preset 6 Input Preset 7 Input Preset 6 Mone Preset 9 Mone Preset 10 Mone Full screen settings rifs1 F1FS1 Audio monitoring output OUTPUT A Head 1 8udio Out United States International KA United Kingdom Extended United States Dvorak United States Internatianal United States Dvorak for lett hand United States Dvorak for right hand Keyboard Keyboard configuration used by the RCP Note This setting applies to the selected us
21. Enter device identifier 3 SWVPOSCtrl 3 Click the Interconnects tab draw a line between the multi viewer and the new router controller and then click the line _System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections tiy Ry f Aei external router NewPhysicalRouter KALEIDO Kaleido X 7RU Serial to TCPAP SWWPO8CtrI Click the line to configure the connection properties 4 Inthe Properties tab click the RS 422 Com Port box and then choose a multi viewer output from the list 296 Configuring a Router Controller Tips SVVPOSCHl Kaleido RU JE 5 Inthe Interconnects tab click the router controller icon Under the Properties tab a list of settings appears with default values for the serial communication parameters the bit rate bps the number of data bits parity stop bits and flow control ME SAPASI z T Baud rate Cm Data bits Lle _ Parity wone Ml Stop bita 1 ia However in this case there is no Router box for specifying which logical router is to be controlled This is because the SW P 08 protocol allows the controller to pass the identifier for the logical router with a command i e it tells the multi viewer to make a crosspoint change for logical router X The ID that it passes is the logical router matrix ID refer to Step 3
22. PSU B AC PSU B power cord is unplugged PSU A Vendor ID not relevant Unknown PSU B Vendor ID not relevant Unknown PSU A Temperature not supported PSU B Temperature not supported Duplicate IP Address self explanatory X X Detected Ethernet Link Down self explanatory X X Fan 1 replace whole module if in error Fan 1 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Fan 2 replace whole module if in error Fan 3 replace whole module if in error Fan 2 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Fan 3 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Fan 4 replace whole module if in error Fan 4 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Fan 5 replace whole module if in error Fan 5 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Status dashboard messages Message Fan 6 replace whole module if in error Fan 7 replace whole module if in error Description Fan 6 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Fan 7 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken 7RU Key Concepts 4RU X16 KMV Fan 8 replace whole module if in error Fan 8 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or
23. 196 Bevel Hide at loss of video kd Aspect ratio Current aspect ratio Custom aspect ratio Automatic Aspect Ratio Follow AFEA S Detaut SD AFOWWSS value Detaut H AFD value 3 Choose a value from the drop down menu beside Default HD AFD value This is the setting that will be used when there is no AFD in the HD signal Choose Keep Last to have the video window maintain the last decoded AFD value if the signal is paused Bevel none i Hide at loss of video v kd Aspect ratio Current aspect ratio 43 Custom aspect ratio 4 5 Automatic Aspect Ratio Follower Input Format Follow SFOS S Defaut S0 SFOS value 4 Click the Save button Configuring a Video Monitor s Alarm Reporting Behavior To prevent users from missing temporary alarms on the monitor wall monitors that are capable of displaying an alarm status e g video monitors UMDs alarm monitors can be configured with a latching mechanism An alarm latch will keep the error state visible until someone acknowledges the associated alarm Video monitors can provide alarm status information through their borders color and blinking behavior and show the latched state as small indicators in each corner of the video window To set the alarm reporting features for a video monitor 1 In XEdit open a layout and click the video monitor whose alarm reporting behavior you wish to configure 2 Inthe Properties pane scroll down to the Alarms Tallies section
24. 323 Tally Interface Devices switcher The RS 422 ports highlighted are numbered 1 8 from right to left Refer to the Kahuna Install Manual for more details on the RS 422 control ports RS 422 ports 1 8 The Kahuna has DE 9 connectors with the following pinouts 9 pin Signal 2 RX 3 TX 7 RX 8 TX 4 GND Note See RS 422 Connection Diagram on page 28 for pinouts on the multi viewer 1 The Kahuna Install Manual is available here https kahuna snellgroup com kahunaclub kahunacare documents php 324 Kahuna Production Switcher 3 On the Kahuna switcher s GUI panel press the ENG CONFIG button The Engineering Config menu appears on the touch screen 4 Touch the Protocols button on the screen to bring up the Engineering Config Serial Port Protocols menu 5 Inthe list of RS 422 ports select the one to which you connected the crossover cable 6 Set the communications parameters for the selected port as follows using the rotary controls on the right of the GUI panel Protocol Serial Tally Baud Rate 115 200 Parity NONE Data Bits 8 Stop bits 1 Port Type Master 7 On the Kahuna switcher s GUI panel press the PERIPH button The Peripherals menu appears 8 Touch the Tally Control button on the screen to bring up the Peripherals Tally Protocol menu 9 Select the RS 422 port that is connected to the multi viewer and set its serial protocol opt
25. 334 Kayak Production Switcher Notes e Kayak devices provide up to 512 text sources and up to 256 x 5 system tally sources e The current version of the XtenDD HD SD switchers software does not provide tally sources DD35 and the Kayak series switchers only provide RED On Air tally sources This is a limitation in the current version 6 9 3 of the ACOS protocol e Refer to the table below for a list of valid sources depending on your switcher model and their meaning in the context of the ACOS protocol Input DD35 XtenDD HD XtenDD SD KayakDD Kayak SD HD Number 0x00 BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK 0x01 0x60 Input1 62 Input 1 90 Input 1 90 Input 1 32 Input 0x01 0x3E 0x01 0x5A 0x01 0x5A 0x01 0x20 1 96 0x01 0x60 0x80 VideoStore 0x81 Montage processor 1 0x82 Montage processor 2 0x85 DVX1 0x86 DVX2 0x87 DVX3 0x88 DVX4 0x8B RamRec3 RamRec3 RamRec3 RamRec3 0x8C RamRec4 RamRec4 RamRec4 RamRec4 0x8D RamRec5 Ox8E RamRec6 0x90 ColorBGD1 ColorBGD1 ColorBGD1 ColorBGD1 ColorBGD1 0x91 ColorBGD2 ColorBGD2 i ColorBGD2 ColorBGD2 0x92 ColorBGD3 ColorBGD3 ColorBGD3 335 Tally Interface Devices Input DD35 KayakDD Kayak SD HD Number 0x99 a ae ColorBGDTest wo Pa oh PA wa NEVA ma MA OxA2 ME2 Main ME2 Main ME2 Main M2 A OxA3 ME3 Main ME3 Main ME3 Main M3 A OxA4 MEhA 0xA8 PP_UTIL_D OxAB ME1_UTIL_E OxAC ME2_UTIL_D OxAD ME2_UTIL_E O
26. Adding Logical Routers on page 285 6 Click the Router Configurations tab to view or set the logical matrix ID System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Configurations Router Connections Routers Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping v Physical Routers r ED Kaleido x TRU Internal Router General information D NewPhysicalRouter Video Video 16x16 Routers tf Audio Audio 32x32 Logical router name SmallLogicalRouter D Logical Routers gt DB 0 Internal router 96x48 i i p gt E 1 KX Router 96x80 popes rouan mans D 2 2 SmallLogicalRouter 16x4 pe L 0 Video Number of sources 16 iL 1 Audio Number of destinations 4 Levels 0 video pAn Add level l Remove level 297 Routers amp Kaleido X Notes e The logical router matrix ID must be manually entered on the Snell Pro Bel controller this is usually done via a Web interface but is sometimes done over a serial connection Some controllers allow you to program individual buttons or groups of buttons e The Snell Pro Bel controller can also use the logical router level IDs e g 0 Video 1 Audio when it sends commands allowing you to target just video crosspoints just audio crosspoints or both IMPORTANT You must always
27. F Kaleido x TRU internal Router PP deel OPTION B video 120x48 bef OPTION A Video 1 20x48 Logical level ID DO gt NewPhysicalRiouter v Logical Routers CO 1 KX Router 96x80 Physical levels j OPTION A Add Ft 0 video OPTION B ae v 2 SmallLogicalFiouter 16x4 Remare 0 Video oe ae ted 1 Audio Y 0 Internal router 96x43 Click the 0 Internal router 96 x 48 folder under Logical Routers in the Routers list The third level tab bar appears under Router Configurations with the Configuration tab selected Source and destination mapping is not done automatically Click the Source mapping tab click in the logical level column e g 0 Video and then choose an input from the menu Routers Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Configurations Router Connections Configuration Source mapping mapping Destination mapping Size 36 se _ Automap Clear mapping Clear mapping Import labels labels Auto update labels 0 Video Routers v r Physical Routers v Kaleido X 7RU Internal Router bb ope k OPTION B ideo 120x48 SR a inf OPTION A video 120x483 v NewPhysicalRouter BF peL Video Video 16x16 Bb td Audio Audio 32x32 v D Logical Routers Y 1 KX Router 96x80 Channel Source Anput F Channel 13 Channel 13 4 Channel Source Anput F Channel 14 Channel 14
28. KALEIDO Kaleido X User s Manual KALEIDO Part Number M770 2800 111 1June 2011 Copyright 2007 2011 Miranda Technologies Inc All rights reserved ATTENTION please read the following terms and conditions carefully By using Kaleido X documentation you agree to the following terms and conditions Miranda Technologies Inc hereby grants permission and license to owners of Kaleido X to use their product manuals for their own internal business use Manuals for Miranda Technologies Inc products may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose unless specifically authorized in writing by Miranda Technologies Inc A Miranda Technologies Inc manual may have been revised to reflect changes made to the product during its manufacturing life Thus different versions of a manual may exist for any given product Care should be taken to ensure that one obtains the proper manual version for a specific product serial number Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Miranda Technologies Inc Title Kaleido X User s Manual Part Number M770 2800 111 Revision 1 June 2011 4 37 pm Tableiof Contents 1 New Features 1 OVE o EEOAE EE E A A E E AEE tata bau EE E E A E A aE 1 New Feature in Kaleido X Version 5 30 cc cee cece ccc ccc e ccc e ec encencee
29. Layout OUTPUT A Head 1 Room O O0 9 39 Room4 10 0 9 49 X Version 400 build sao See Displaying the Dashboard on page 36 and Hiding the Dashboard on page 37 A monitor also called a widget is a graphical element that is part of a layout XEdit supports several types of primary elements clocks timers video monitors audio monitors UMDs time code monitors alarm monitors etc that can be grouped into composite monitors Logical source Video monitor Composite monitor A logical source called a channel in earlier versions of the documentation refers to a group of physical audio video or metadata sources and text attributes A logical source can be used as a whole and assigned to a virtual monitor See Assigning Sources to Monitors on page 48 A video monitor is a layout element used to define an area for displaying a video signal Within a video monitor the video window is the active area where the video signal is displayed A composite monitor also referred to as a composite a monitor or a tile is a group of primary elements that can be seen as a single object within a layout Composite monitors typically include a video window one or more audio level meters and a UMD with two tallies Safe area The safe area is a configurable region inside a video window The safe area markers delimit this region e g a 4 3 region inside a 16 9 window See Toggling Safe Area Markers on
30. Levels LJ Video Video 16x16 Audio Audio 32x32 Remove level It is fairly typical to have an audio and a video router connected to the same serial port When a crosspoint switch is sent out over the serial port it addresses both routers so that the audio follows the video switch Step 3 Adding Logical Routers Logical routers add another layer of refinement over the control of a router In a typical situation a very large router e g 1024 x 1024 might be used to control a TV station The station manager does not want 285 Routers amp Kaleido X just anyone to be able to change any source to any destination because some of these destinations go straight to air If someone accidentally changes a crosspoint on the monitor wall and the feed goes live the error could have serious consequences To avoid such problems it is desirable to give operators access only to those crosspoints they need by creating logical routers 1 In the Routers list click the Logical Routers folder and then click Add Router under the Router Configurations tab Routers Routers v Physical Routers v Kaleido 7RU Internal Router peL OPTION A Video 120x48 7 bend OPTION B Video 120x48 v D HewPhysicalRouter El 1 Video Video 16x16 v ORENA v O 0 Internal router 96x48 if 0 Video v 1 KX Router 96x80 teed 0 Video System Channels Sources Destinations
31. Note The KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer does not support DVI keying Kaleido X and Kaleido X16 multi viewers have a DVI input connector for every output head Using these connectors it is possible to feed keying material to the multi viewer Depending on your purposes the content provided through the DVI input can be set either as a background or as a foreground for the layout shown on the monitor wall see Calibrating the DVI Keying Mode on page 101 This section explains how to set up a layout s background to be keyed out and replaced with content from the DVI input Note Since the DVI input cannot be resized the resolution on the PC that feeds this input is best set to match the selected display s head resolution The DVI background is always positioned from the top left corner of the display and is drawn pixel for pixel If the resolutions do not match some part of the DVI input might be missing or noise might be displayed To use the DVI input as the background in a layout 1 Click the background of the layout 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Background color box and then click the button that appears inside the box to open the Pick a Color window Managing Layouts System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Properties Tips Layouts Layout Mutihnead ayot Room t1 FFEA TEESI LAL QUT head kd Appearance l Background color EE F20 c20 B20 Mone Center BE Background image
32. OFFLINE Note In a cluster system where rooms and layouts have been created based on configurations from earlier standalone systems the dashboard may show the wrong room name from one of the earlier standalone configurations To prevent this from happening open the old room configuration and look for red Head elements in the filtered System list that appears at the bottom of the Tools pane Clear the unwanted head assignments either by removing the corresponding displays from the room layout or by completely deleting the old room configuration if you do not need it anymore Adding Full Screen Zones Notes e Adding full screen zones to a room is optional e Do not span a full screen zone across more than one display use spanned video monitors instead See Spanning on page 178 for more information To add a full screen zone to a room 1 Click the Full screen zone button on the toolbar and then click the room area to create the full screen zone 2 Position and resize the zone as appropriate 3 Inthe Properties tab click the Friendly name box and then type a name for the zone 151 a Setting Up Rooms 152 Rooms System Channels Sources Destinations Layouts RCP users Actions WY Fooms Roome F1 JE I Friendly name FSZ Dimension x 600 600 Position x 100 150 Configuring Displays The monitor wall driven by your Kaleido X system may in
33. Router Configurations Configurations Router Connections Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping Routers Routers v D Physical Routers i Y Kaleido X 7RU Internal Router peL OPTION A Video 120x48 2 beL OPTION B Video 120x48 v O HewPhysicalRouter Fo Baa i Video Video 16x16 v D Logical Routers v 0 Internal router 96x48 poo hu 0 video v FOI kx Router 96x80 fbn 0 Video O BEMIS New logical router updated 286 General information Logical router name Logical router matrix ID Number of sources Number of destinations SmallLogicalRouter Configuring an External Router The subfolder that represents the new logical router is renamed automatically reflecting your changes IMPORTANT Once you have configured the logical router it is important not to change its name Doing so will disable any settings that refer to the existing router name including e logical source assignments for source or destination label e external router connection configurations e monitors and background actions associated with the logical router e automatic crosspoint changes on video monitors router source property Note If you change the name back to the original everything should work as before 3 Click Add level 4 Inthe Logical Level Configuration window type a Logical level name e g Video Th
34. et Composite svidgets1 New widget library 3 On the File menu click New Alternatively click Open to open an existing layout 4 Click the appropriate button on the toolbar then click the layout to add a monitor of the selected type Alternatively drag a monitor from one of the existing libraries onto the layout or choose an existing monitor within the layout 5 Customize the monitor if necessary and then drag it onto the new widget library while holding the Ctrl key Note It is not possible to customize a monitor once it is inside a library 234 Managing Widget Libraries 6 Right click anywhere inside the widget library and then click Save widget library on the shortcut menu The Save Widget Library window appears 5x Save widget library gt 2 my Pictures O My PSP Files 3 My Received Files Snag Catalog E Aw Clock clib Files of Type Composite library cli H J Comen 7 Type a name for the new custom widget library and then click Save Closing a Widget Library To close a widget library e Once the custom library is saved you can right click in the library area and then click Close widget library on the shortcut menu Alternatively on the File menu click Close widget library Opening a Widget Library To open a custom library e Right click inside one of the predefined widget libraries in the Tools pane and then click Open widget library on the shortcut menu e On the File
35. scan format for a 1080 line signal Peace REM at the SDI monitoring output Diagonal size Interlaced Height ATIC width 37 inch Rotation normal Position x 555 Y 177 Alloy dashboard display Eil 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Changing a Display s Aspect Ratio Notes e Itis important to properly set the aspect ratio of a display since this will affect the proportions of every component you will use to create layouts for this room For instance if the aspect ratio of a display does not match the aspect ratio of the actual display in the physical room then a video window inside a layout will show distorted images e Ifyou change the display aspect ratio later in the process layouts created before the change will be broken To change the aspect ratio of a display in a room 1 Click the display whose properties you wish to configure 2 Click the Aspect ratio box in the Properties pane The aspect ratio presets appear Configuring Displays Properties Tips Rooma Rooma rrr E View fiters W Assignment Sutu Head OUTPUT 4 amp 4 Head 1 W Size amp Position Resolution YESA 1600x1200 60Hz Aspect ratio Diagonal Size Height waich Rotation Position 15 Y Aspect ratio presets 3 Select the appropriate aspect ratio from the list Alternatively type the desired ratio directly in the box 4 On the File
36. 339 Tally Interface Devices 340 Using the Kaleido Remote This chapter explains where to obtain information on how the Kaleido X system can execute commands received via a Gateway allowing third party developers and individual users remote access to some Kaleido functions Overview The Kaleido X system can execute commands received through a Gateway allowing third party developers and individual users remote access to some Kaleido functions For more information refer to the Kaleido Remote Control Protocol Gateway User s Guide Ref M770 0900 XXX available on the DVD that shipped with your system Note The term Kaleido is used to describe features common to the Kaleido family Features exclusive to any one of these products are described using the full product name e g Kaleido X 341 Overview The Serial to TCP Dispatcher is a piece of software designed to run on a separate PC or embedded into a product such as the Kaleido X and act as a bridge between a serial device and the TCP IP network Note For more information refer to the Serial to TCP Dispatcher Protocol guide Ref M819 0300 XXX available on the DVD that shipped with your system 343 Using the Serial to TCP IP Dispatcher 344 Administrati dS This chapter explains how to configure the Kaleido X network communications and how to enable hardware and software options It also describes where to find system status and ve
37. 358 Detailed Directions ROUTER CONTROL Kaleido X version 4 00 build 3801 XEdit version 4 00 Build 3801 Download the Java Runtime Environment installer required to use XEdit 3 Click the XAdmin button The XAdmin Status and Options page appears System configuration Kaleido X 4RU Frame r Status and options GPI GENLOCK KXA GPI GEN s n 079899 17912014 C ESG Firmware 0x35 Safemode 0x36 Technical support a Q OPTION A Empty Oz OPTION B Empty EE INPUT A KXI 16HSV3 s n 088901 41670001 Dl Firmware 0x24 Safemode 0xF Inputs DA DO TO DO DO O a O e e O O e e e INPUT B KXI 16H5V s n 079401 19988038 EJE Firmware 0xB8 Safemode 0x6F Inputs 9GVVVIVIOVIOVIIVISIS vw OUTPUT A master KXO DUAL s n 079228 38790003 Ol Firmware 0x208E Safemode 0x5B w OUTPUT B KXO DUAL s n 079201 18372016 C EA i Firmware 0x208E Safemode 0x56 XAdmin Status and Options page 4 Click System configuration in the navigation area on the left of the page The System Configuration page appears showing the current system name IP address network mask gateway and output cards IP addresses as well as the date and time settings 359 16 Administration and Servicing System configuration General Status and options System name 1234 1 all Technical support 50Hz system frame rate Ethernet Frame IP address bo b Network mask Ps o jo
38. 96 x 48 folder under Logical Routers in the Routers list The number of sources and destinations are also predefined and cannot be modified manually These numbers are determined by how many input KXI cards and internal router cards are defined in the system 16 sources per input card 24 destinations per internal router card for a maximum of 96 x 48 or 192 X 96 on a Kaleido X expansion system Routers Description Calibratians Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections _ Routers Y Physical Routers Kaleido X 7RU Internal Router fo deed OPTION B video 120x48 Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping General information teed OPTION A video 120x48 5 Mew PhysicalRiouter Logical router name Internal router mL Video Video 16x16 Feel Audio Audi 32x32 Logical Routers Logical router matrix ID I Hep Y 1 KX Router 96x80 i 0 Video Number of sources O 2 SmallLogicalRouter 16x4 pe 0 Video _ be 1 Audio Number of destinations h TIO Internal router 96248 sed 0 Video Levels 0 video Add level Femoye level 300 Configuring Internal Router Cards A logical video level 0 Video is also defined and automatically mapped to the two predefined physical levels OPTION B and OPTION A Routers Description Calibratians Interconnects Roster Configurations Router Connections Pomers
39. A video monitor can be configured so that WSS AFD VI or AFD 2016 metadata is used to crop and or add black bars to the video signal giving the video raster the correct aspect ratio This metadata can be reported as friendly text inside a UMD Its presence can also be made available in alarms as well as via SNMP traps Term Definition Video raster Video signal that is displayed inside the video monitor on a monitor wall AFD VI Active Format Description encoded in the Video Index AFD 2016 Active Format Description encoded in the ancillary data according to the SMPTE 2016 standard WSS Wide Screen Signaling The Automatic Aspect Ratio feature can also be configured for each video input see Calibrating Automatic Aspect Ratio Decoding on page 110 To slave a video monitor to the input signal aspect ratio 1 In the Layouts tab select the video monitor for which you wish to apply automatic format detection OFF by default Properties Tips Layouts Layout tiutihead layoutRoom Anputb 2 Bevel Hide at loss of video kd Aspect ratio Current aspect ratio 4 3 Custom aspect ratio Automatic Aspect Ratio Folow amp AFDANS C Default S0 SFOS value Mone Detaut HD AFD value Hone 2 Select the appropriate value from the Automatic Aspect Ratio list Configuring Video Monitors Properties Tips Layouts Layout Muttihead layout foom Anputb z Bevel Hide at loss of video kd Aspect ratio
40. Channel Source Anput FiChannel 15 Channel 15 1 2 3 4 5 INPUT A 1 Input 1 6 7 8 q Channel Source Anput FiChannel 16 Channel 16 A C 0 Video v 2 SmallLogicalRouter 16x4 INPUT 4 2 Input 2 pL 0 Video essed Lf 1 Audio INPUT A 3 Input 3 v 0 Internal router 96x48 INPUT A 4 Input 4 0 Video To import labels from a CSV file i e a comma delimited file such as might be exported from an Excel spreadsheet click Import labels navigate to the CSV file that contains the labels you wish to import select it and then click Open 301 Routers amp Kaleido X Note The file must be formatted as three columns with no header row Column 1 should contain numbers from 1 to N the number of sources column 2 should contain the source labels and column 3 should contain the destination labels Columns are delimited by commas without spaces Sample label file i VIR 2 VTR 3 CAM 4 CAM 5 SAT 6 SAT 1 OUT 2 O0UT i uT 2 OUT 1 PGM 2 PVW A w N e Auto map works as described in Step 3 Adding Logical Routers on page 289 Description Calibrations eee crac Router Configurations Router Connections 1 Configuration Source pea cal Destination mapping clear mapping Imgort labels Juta update labels 0 video OPTION A Output 1 1 1 2 fori Output 212 I g a OPTI
41. Configuring Video Monitors ul Alarms Tallies Border color Pending color Border color Disabled color Border color Mormalfok color Border color Minors arning color Border color Major color MR G77 MPR Ge Me Grey GB F 170 G70 5 0 GS F220 G 120 6 0 Border color CriticalError color BRB RAO Go080 Border thickness Pending thickness 2 Border thickness Disabled thickness z Border thickness Normaliak thickness 2 Border thickness Minorarning thickness 2 Border thickness Major thickness 2 Border thickness CriticaliError thickness 2 Blink mode Display alarm latch No bink lt Blink mode selection Oo lt i Display alarm latch check box 3 Set the appropriate border color scheme and associated thickness attributes 4 Click the Blink mode box and then select the appropriate blinking behavior for your purposes kd Actions Scripts Mouse click id Calibration Display alarm latch Override detail enhancer Detail enhancer flo blink lt Follow latch Critical Critical and major Critical major and minor U r 5 The Kaleido X supports the following blinking modes Blink mode Description Off The status indicator will never blink Follow Latch The status indicator s blinking will follow the latch status The indicator will blink until someone unlatches the alarm Critical The status indicator will blink when the current status is critical Critica
42. Frame Adnput 4 Channel 02 Frame AAnput 4 Channel 03 Frame Adnput 4 Channel 04 Frame Adnput 4 Channel 05 Border color Border color Border color Border color Border color Border color Pending color Disabled color Normal OK co Minor VYarnin Major color CriticalError EE A G 7 6 7 EE F G7B7 EE A G 7 B 7 E R 170 6 170 5 0 GB F220 6 120 5 0 E F170 6 0 66 0 Frame Afnput 4 Channel 06 Border thickness Pending t 2 Frame Alnput 4 Channel 07 Border thickness Disabled 2 7 Frame Adnput 4 Channel 08 Frame Adnput 4 Channel 09 Custom safe zone image Select an image to use for the custom safe area Frame AAnput 4 Channel 10 Layout Multihead layout Room1 r1FFSA 9 Toadjust the transparency level of the image click the Unsafe zone transparency box then move the slid er or type the desired transparency value directly in the box At 0 the portions of the image that correspond to the unsafe area are opaque at 100 the entire image is transparent Note When a custom safe zone image is selected the following attributes are not available Marker color Safe title offsets Safe zone aspect ratio and Unsafe zone color 191 az Creating Layouts Video Cropping Zooming The display of a video signal can be cropped to remove unwanted portions In XEdit users can choose betw
43. If no preferences have been specified for an RCP user then the corresponding room preferences apply They appear in gray in the Properties pane Modify the system level attributes for this user user name description password as needed See Changing an RCP User s Name and Password on page 261 Note These system level attributes are specific to a user independent of the room to which the user is assigned On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Setting RCP User Preferences Notes e The Admin user name cannot be modified An asterisk will appear beside the RCP user in the main window if any of the user properties are modified The asterisk will disappear when the changes are saved The message Cannot find reference indicates that a full screen layout full screen zone or layout associated with a Room or RCP user has been deleted Assigning Room Layouts to an RCP User s Presets To assign a room layout to an RCP user s preset button 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the user for whom you wish to configure the RCP2 s preset buttons from under the appropriate room in the hierarchical list 2 For each RCP preset button click the corresponding box in the Properties pane and then select the appropriate layout from the list Tips Properties RCP users Foor User2 User name User2 Pasevvord HRREAEER Desc
44. Miranda supplies two adapter models correctly wired for this application a straight adapter part no 1737 3000 102 and a crossover adapter part no 1792 3700 100 The pinout for the RS 422 signals on the Kaleido X16 s RJ 45 connectors and the wiring diagrams for the appropriate adapters are shown here oS AZAEL LL dd RX gt 3 ME gt t e n BAAS SLL eed a EEG De MSS LL LL LL LLL ALLL n c 8 Bic Pinout of each RS 422 port s RJ 45 DE 9 male DE 9 female RJ 45 connector on the Pinout of straight adapter Pinout of RS 422 connector multi viewer Miranda part no 1737 3000 102 on SMPTE slave device Standard wiring between multi viewer and devices wired to SMPTE slave specification e g most routers Ross Synergy switchers Nevion ETH CON SS O OPPS ELOE EE NRX R ZR E 4 n c VE aN DAEZ aa Tx 6 rnc 8 ie Pinout of each RS 422 port s RJ 45 DE 9 male DE 9 female RJ 45 connector on the Pinout of crossover adapter Pinout of RS 422 connector multi viewer Miranda part no 1792 3700 100 on SMPTE master device Standard wiring between multi viewer and devices wired to SMPTE master specification e g Philips Jupiter router control system Miranda Presmaster PCS Loading a Layout Note The two RS 422 ports on the multi viewer side have no ground pin Using the appropriate DE 9S to RJ 45 adapter an external device should be able to communicate with a multi viewer despite
45. Sony System Control Unit MKS 8010B To use a serial tally from an SCU model MKS 8010A or MKS 80108 a 15 pin to 9 pin adapter is required with pinouts as follows MKS 8010A or MKS 8010B 15 pin SCU Signal Serial tally device 9 pin 2 RX 2 3 TX 3 10 RX 7 11 TX 8 4 GND 4 No adapter is required for SCU model MKS 8010 which has a DE 9 connector with the following pinouts MKS 8010 9 pin SCU Signal 2 RX 3 TX 7 RX 8 TX 4 GND In addition on Sony menu page 7367 you must enable R and G serial tallies on the SCU port 320 Sony Production Switcher Note See RS 422 Connection Diagram on page 28 for pinouts on the multi viewer Setting Up a Multi Viewer to Interface with a Sony Production Switcher To set up the multi viewer to interface with the Sony production switcher 1 Launch XEdit 2 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar The main pane displays the System hierarchical list and the Tools pane displays the equipment library when the root of the System list is selected 3 Drag the Sony production switcher device from the equipment library onto the root of the System hierarchical list Alternatively right click the list root and then click Insert Sony serial tally on the shortcut menu A window appears prompting you for a device identifier Device identifier input window 4 Type the name of
46. Temperature Control C 35 0 Temperatures KXO DUAL Temperature FX C 400 KXO DUAL Temperature Mezzanine C KXO DUAL Temperature Power circuit C KXO DUAL Temperature SX CC ewe Oa ce Verifying a Kaleido RCP2 To verify that the RCP2 is functioning normally 1 Log on to the RCP2 see Logging on to the Kaleido RCP2 on page 368 2 Test various operations using the RCP2 keyboard and the mouse e g load layout presets Verifying an Audio Bridge Terminal To verify that the ABT is functioning normally e Inspect the ACTIVITY and front panel LEDs on the unit to make sure there are no error conditions The ACTIVITY indicator is located on the right hand side of the rear panel This LED reports the status of the Ethernet connection as follows Color Board Status Off No link detected Green Normal good link 21 Getting Started 22 Orange Activity Red Hardware fault Flashing red Upgrading firmware Two LEDs are visible on the front panel one for each power supply When lit they both indicate the same status Color Green Board Status Normal Flashing green Normal rebooting Orange Warning Flashing Orange Warning rebooting Red Hardware fault Flashing red Upgrading firmware When the ABT is powered up all three LEDs will be orange until the boot sequence is terminated This is a visual indicator that the LEDs are functioning properly Loading a L
47. Video level video 5 Click the Save button on the toolbar Configuring V Chip Monitors A V chip monitor provides a visual indication of the V chip rating from the CC 608 metadata in an SD video signal or from the CC 608 legacy caption data when such data is present within an HD video signal Note Extraction of CC 608 captions and CC 608 legacy captions is available with the Extraction of CC Subtitling and XDS metadata option KXS CSX To add a V chip monitor to a layout 1 Click the V chip monitor button 38 on the toolbar click the layout and then move or resize the monitor as needed You may choose to layer this monitor on top of the video window within a composite See Working with Composite Monitors on page 225 for instructions on how to add elements to a composite 2 Inthe Properties pane set the transparency attribute to the appropriate value for your purposes by clicking the V chip transparency box and then using the slider or typing the desired value directly into the box 219 az Creating Layouts kd Appearance chip rating preview Default Aima 3 Ifyou wish to preview the logo associated with a specific V chip rating select it from the V chip rating preview list For example kW Appearance _ Canadian French 13 ans chip transparency Canadian English Ps kd Actions Scripts Canadian English 14 Mouse click Canadian English 18 Canadian English Invalid Canadian French E
48. Y On layout exiting On layout loading x ReESolunon A Sheth rata Diagonal size Rear VG Robe Position Background color A Color of the background tor this head Layout Mutthead layout Room iFFSsa 3 In Pick a Color click the RGB tab and then set the Red to 254 Green to 0 and Blue to 254 4 Pick a Color J Swatches HSB RGB Preview m E Sample Text Sample Text a a 0 Sample Text Sample Text Note Since bright pink colors matching the RGB values listed below are considered pass through colors and since background keying is always enabled if a layout s background color or any monitor s color attribute is set to any of these RGB values the DVI input will be displayed in the corresponding areas on the monitor wall If there is no signal at the associated DVI input or the multi viewer does not support DVI input as would be the case with a KMV 3901 3911 residual data may be visible in such areas e Pass through colors RGB 254 0 254 254 0 255 254 1 254 254 1 255 255 0 254 255 0 255 255 1 254 255 1 255 Do not use these colors for any monitor s color attributes A layout s background should only be set to such a color if a DVI input will be contributing the actual background for this layout on the monitor wall 185 az Creating Layouts 4 Click OK 5 Ifthe area you wish to configure for background keying covers more than one head repeat the procedure fo
49. cce ccc cce cee cneeneeneen een eeeenetneteetnees 131 Key Concepts Alarm Debouncing Alarm debouncing allows the filtering of false alarms To filter false alarms several parameters can be calibrated including the duration of the potential alarm event how often this event occurs during a specific period called the detection window and the length of this detection window An alarm occurrence not the alarm itself is detected when a probe is in a continuous error state for the number of seconds specified in the Duration debouncing parameter The actual alarm is triggered when the number of occurrences reaches the value set as the Occurrences parameter within the period specified as the detection window The alarm status will revert to normal as soon as the probe returns a normal 119 6 Configuring Alarms state Alarm occurrences that are older than the number of minutes specified as the Detection window parameter are discarded The default debouncing parameters are as follows Duration 5 seconds Occurrences 3 Detection window 1 minute Alarm Status The current status of an alarm determines the color of the LED like icon to the left of its name Each possible alarm status is represented by a color Alarm statuses are dynamically updated XEdit supports the following alarm status values Normal or OK Warning or Minor Major No error detected Supported for Gateway alarms only Supported for Gateway alarms only E
50. e Send to KX Router output Aspect ratio I Overscan L 5 T 3 R 3 B 5 ml Safe area Ea CE 608 Monitor Wall Assign source to monitor menu The Assign Source window appears 49 Operation of the Monitor Wall Current assignment Input A Input E My Channel Router Source afo The label of each category index button in Assign Source is based on recurring strings found in the logical source names available for your system The Src box shows the current assignment 3 Click through the categories until the Pst box shows the logical source you wish to assign to the selected monitor For example if you wish to assign the logical source named Input B Channel 16 to the monitor click Input B 1 and then 6 Assign Source Channel 04 Channel mua Assign Source Channel 04 Channel 1 Assign Source Channel 04 mue ENEN _MyChannel Iz s e Aa I Router Source afo m 4 Click Take The selected logical source is now assigned to the monitor 5 Click the X button to close the Assign Source window Changing Crosspoints Changing an External Router Crosspoint Note As of version 5 20 of the Kaleido X Software when a multi viewer manages an upstream router you should now manage the router s physical sources as logical sources within the multi viewer system see page 135 Router sources can thus be assigned to monitor wall elements transparently just as sources connected directl
51. i ato B j Hegn O ato is Configuring a Monitor s Position Using the Region Editor To set a monitor s position on the layout 1 For each position first select the appropriate unit 231 az Creating Layouts 232 Region Editor Position Left 0 000 Top 12167 eine Batia 2 Type values in the Left Top Right and Bottom boxes relative to the upper left corner of the display 3 Click OK to close the editor 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Configuring a Monitor s Dimensions Using the Region Editor To configure a monitor s dimensions 1 For each dimension first select the appropriate unit Dimension Width 22 352 Height 33 654 2 Type values in the Width and Height boxes 3 Click OK to close the editor 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Format Painting Copying Properties from one Monitor to Another Every monitor in a layout has properties related to its appearance that can be configured by the user in the Properties pane The Copy properties tool lt copies most of these properties from one monitor to another of the same type e g audio monitor to audio monitor clock to clock etc Note The Copy properties tool does not copy the assignments from one monitor to another and it does not copy the s
52. in both width and height Vertical audio monitors are scaled vertically but their width does not change Horizontal audio monitors time codes timers and UMDs are scaled horizontally but their height does not change Clocks are not resized The following table summarizes these rules Monitor type Height Width Video Scalable Scalable Vertical audio monitor Scalable Fixed Horizontal audio monitor UMD Fixed Scalable time code timer Clock Fixed Fixed 230 Using the Region Editor Using the Region Editor Opening the Region Editor Note The region editor is part of the expert view To show the expert view click the View filters button on the Properties panes toolbar and then select the Expert view check box Using the region editor is not recommended To accomplish most configurations the standard tools available in the layout editor are sufficient To open the region editor 1 Click the monitor whose properties you wish to see 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Bounds box under Size amp Position Click the button that appeared inside the box to open the Region Editor window E A jee a Lon RetFoints RetPaint topLeft B Ref Align topLett Bi Other RefPoint bottomRight B j Other RetAlign bottomRight B xOffset 1 434 inches is YOttset ooo E iones is Other XOffset 1 491 fl inches H Other Otfset 1 175 i inches s Dimension
53. in c 8 Pinout of each RS 422 port s RJ 45 DE 9 male DE 9 female RJ 45 connector on the Pinout of crossover adapter Pinout of RS 422 connector multi viewer Miranda part no 1792 3700 100 on SMPTE master device Standard wiring between multi viewer and devices wired to SMPTE master specification e g Philips Jupiter router control system Miranda Presmaster PCS Alternatively use the Miranda 1737 3000 102 straight adapter but with a crossover cable between the multi viewer and the adapter Q amp A Q Is the internal router used to change inputs to the multi viewer in order to direct signals to the monitor wall A No an internal router card is not needed to display video on the monitor wall The outputs of the internal router do not feed into the multi viewer s inputs they come from the multi viewer s inputs via the midplane 277 Routers amp Kaleido X 278 Q What is the main purpose of having an internal router A The internal router allows you to share the inputs connected to a Kaleido X or Kaleido X16 multi viewer with other equipment e g QA monitors vectorscopes reducing or eliminating the need to have an expensive standalone external router The internal router allows you to have one piece of equipment the multi viewer that serves two integrated purposes displaying video inputs on the monitor wall and sharing them with other equipment For example instead of having a router in front of the multi v
54. monitor s buttons and shortcut menu An RCP user can be assigned a specific timer This allows using the numeric keypad on an external keyboard connected to the RCP2 to control the timer Controlling a Timer by Using the Timer Monitor s Buttons and the Shortcut Menu Ne nn lt p Bin ee eee r Preset LILI RESET gt m gt Reset Start Stop Timer mode End behavior Notes e Timer monitors display time in HH MM SS format Even if the monitor is synchronized with an LTC source frame count is not displayed e Using a timer monitor s Reset Timer mode or End behavior buttons will stop the timer if it was running To configure an interactive timer monitor on the monitor wall 1 Right click the timer you wish to configure 53 Operation of the Monitor Wall F F C ae 4 ee ee e ee Preset FA HE D RESET m cS eee Assign source to Time code T l Mode Stop Monitor wall gt Overrun cs Loop 2 On the shortcut menu point to Mode navigate to the appropriate timer mode and then click the desired end behavior T F i ae e ae ae e Ca RESET m o SA o Assign source to Time code Mode i Stop i Monitor Wall Eru Overrun Loop ai Up o P Down Preset TH TE D Alternatively you can set the mode and behavior directly by clicking the timer monitor s Timer mode and End behavior buttons Click the Timer mode b
55. or the 8 key to move down the list When the appropriate room name is highlighted press ENTER to accept the new selection and then press ESC to exit the Configuration menu Press the LOGIN key The following message will appear on the LCD display LOGIN Position Admin Select your user name by pressing the 2 key to move up in the list or the 8 key to move down the list When you user name is highlighted press ENTER 35 Operation of the Monitor Wall 36 8 When prompted type the password for this user name then press ENTER Note By default the user name Admin has no password The message Access granted will appear on the LCD display if the login is successful If a mouse is connected to the RCP2 then you should be able to see and move the mouse pointer on the monitor wall Alternatively use the RCP2 s mouse function keys Notes e fat any time the message Target system is offline or No login list available appears on the LCD display press the ESC ENTER and DEL keys simultaneously and go back to step 1 e Ifthe room you were logged on to is part of a cluster system try accessing it from a different multi viewer e g select KX2 ROOM1 instead of KX1 ROOM1 from the room list The pointer may flicker when two RCP users access displays fed by the same output card e Two users accessing the same display will be limited to sharing a single pointer For mor
56. 0 cece ccc e cence nec eeeen cee eeeeeeeseeceneteeteeseneeeetes 106 Router Output Caliprations sissreys stead Gees anes ate ae Pores wea wudinines ETE E EE TE a 115 GPH GONG Che COI AUIO MS cors rea a EEEE A ahd NiCad Se out nado eaten EON OS 117 6 Configuring Alarms 119 KY CONC CD Sica eE rset eee toh soa memte AA alate aca maaan a gg land eayente 119 Alarm DCD OUNMCING 2 ies eee niegan keet E EEEE insane deh EEEE EE EEEE EEEREN 119 Alam SUA UUIS era oe aya aa A A AAE Aner tat oee es eee aia hae ea oats 120 Alani T E E EEEE EE EEE TTT EE TEE EET OTET TT 120 GODALA S seir EEEE EE E AAE EAEN E E OREA 121 Virtua hAlan aT O E T TAa 121 SUDAT aaa E A AT AE ETEA EENE AEE na we PR A 121 Aar MOMOL cicascousece Senge r a E A E aS 121 Teletext Subtitles and Closed CaptionS ccc cee cece n cee e cece en eeneeeeeenseeeeeteutescenerees 122 Dolby EAC S Metaddtas vacs20 4ordoaensacitiueesteid EAE O 123 Detancd Directions varenas rra er an E ET E ETEA OTN EAT 125 Configuring Video Audio Alarm Threshold cccc cece cc eee eee ee cence eee este ee eaee tenn eeaaees 125 Configuring Alann DEDOUNGING xcvec s aaa tdaaccarcan ad hunch nE ETEA E EE AA EEEE ad 128 Sharing Alarm Status Information Between Multi Viewers and iControl nanunua 128 Punishing Alarms 10 SNMP DEVICES s cicannsr marsatnrta eTA T TET E CAITE ATEENA TEADET 131 7 Creating Logical Sources 135 EV CONMCEDIS E E E E A EEE TEE E EE ET 135 DEtAIER DINCCHONS aas
57. 1 Layout Preset 2 Layout Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout4 Preset 5 Layouts Preset 6 Input Preset 7 Inpute Preset 6 Mone Preset 9 Mone Preset 10 Mone Audio monitoring output Mone Use large mouse pointer C timer Mone Room level settings 2 Modify the room preferences as needed Note An asterisk will appear beside the room in the main pane if any of its properties are modified The asterisk will disappear when the changes are saved 3 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Assigning Room Layouts to the RCP2 s Preset buttons To assign room layouts to the RCP2 s preset buttons 1 Inthe main window click the RCP users tab and then select the room for which you wish to configure layout presets from the hierarchical list 2 For each RCP preset button click the corresponding box in the Properties pane and then select the appropriate layout from the list 253 Ei Managing Kaleido RCP2 Users 254 System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Tips Properties MCP users Foomi Preset 1 Layout _ Lavout re Preset 3 i Preset 4 Preset 5 Preset 6 Preset 7 Preset amp Freset 9 Preset 10 Audio monitoring output To Use large mouse pointer C timer Mone Preset 2 RCF layout preset 2 for current room Assigning an Audio Output to the RCP2 s AUDIO MONITORING Button To assign an audio output to the RCP2 s AUDIO MONI
58. 16 Click the Router Configurations tab and then navigate to the Kaleido X 7RU Internal Router folder under Physical Routers in the Routers list The router protocol connection type host name and levels are predefined and cannot be modified System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Configurations Router Connections General information Routers 3 Routers v O Physical Routers _ ro LD OPTION B Video 120x48 Router name Kaleido X 7RU Internal Router Led OPTION A Video 120x48 z v NewPhysicalRouter Router protocol KXO Router z peL Video Video 16x16 gt Lasse r Audio Audio 32x32 Connection type TCPAP D Logical Routers Y 1 KX Router 96x80 _ i 0 Video Communication parameters B 2 SmallLogicalRouter 16x4 27 0 Video Router hostname P address kxframe bet 1 Audio v 0 Internal router 96x48 TCPAP port tof 0 Video Use protocol defauts Levels rag Eye Notes e The following ports are always active and can be used for controlling a Kaleido X over TCP IP via the associated protocols port 14000 SW P 08 port 2000 SW P 02 port 4381 VikinX Modular port 5194 NVISION Ethernet protocol Compact router e When con
59. 24 BNC outputs on a KXO 24Router card for a Kaleido X 7RU or the two RT OUT ports on a Kaleido X16 The Kaleido X 4RU and KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer models do not have router outputs Router Control Configurations Multi viewers can be configured for router control in five ways Router Controller External Router External Router 1 External Router 2 External Router 3 External Router 4 Router Control Panel 1 Kaleido X 7RU and Kaleido X16 multi viewers allow direct control over their own internal router module 2 All multi viewers allow direct control over an external router via a serial or TCP IP connection 3 All multi viewers allow control over a series of external routers in a cascade configuration the Kaleido X Software sends a router command to one of the routers via a serial or TCP IP connection which then broadcasts it to the other routers in the cascade using an internal communications mechanism e g MIDI The router command contains an ID that causes it to be accepted by one router in the cascade and ignored by the rest Router Control Configurations 4 All multi viewers can be controlled by an external push button control panel via a serial or TCP IP connection Usually such a panel is used to control either a simple external router case 2 above connected to the multi viewer or the internal router module case 1 above All multi viewers can be controlled by an intelli
60. 60Hz Aspect ratio 16 9 Diagonal Size 1069 mm Height 24 mm wich Rotation Position 90 degree clockwise g0 degree counterclockwise Display rotation presets 3 Select the Rotation setting that matches the way the actual display is mounted in the physical room 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Changing a Display s Position To change position of a display in a room 1 Click the display whose properties you wish to configure 2 Click the Position box in the Properties pane then click the button that appears inside the box The Specify Position window appears 165 8 Setting Up Rooms 166 oe Specify position x gt Properties mm 25 Ymm 18 3 Type the appropriate values in the X mm and Y mm boxes 4 Click OK The values appear in the Position box Position x 25 y 16 Display position values 5 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Disabling the Dashboard A room can be configured to prevent the dashboard from appearing on specific displays For instance in a production control room or if the Kaleido X is used in the studio backdrop you may not want the dashboard to pop up regardless of any alarm condition Note Make sure the dashboard remains enabled on a least one display ina room where alarm conditions can be monitored since it is your only way to be notified in cas
61. 9 00 a m 5 00 p m GMT 1 Telephone 33 1 55 86 87 88 EMERGENCY After Hours Global Fax 33 155 86 00 29 Toll Free 1 800 224 7882 US and Canada E mail eurotech miranda com Telephone 1 514 333 1772 Corporate Head Office Miranda Technologies Inc 3499 Douglas B Floreani St Laurent Quebec Canada H4S 2C6 Telephone 514 333 1772 Fax 514 333 9828 Web www miranda com
62. A 175 countdown timers cece eee ee eee 211 digital content advisory descriptor 218 AUDIC ccanodtosibadtaceteevatedseds 181 DVI background input 06 184 fullscreen on ona 176 AGING sia Shcdiiekicidebaeieessaind 22 38 pan VICW ss cicananwaeyeaterebiedaeie den 186 DICSCIS eTEN E 40 reres Ning cisaian o E 40 room layout cece eee eee ees 175 source assignment eee eeeees 182 UMETE suda aE 211 V chip monitor 6 cee cece eee eee 219 XDS metadata cece eee eee ee 218 Levels in logical source cece eee ee ee ees 139 IN FOULER lt srscteoiiatens eadtontuewas 267 298 299 Libraries IS PIAS sci qucrdscadepusaente darateiteGartsitad Dacaens 166 WIDGCIS E ene cee 234 Loading layouts cece eee e cece eens 38 Logical source OVES iasa aa 139 Logical sources 005 65 135 136 141 394 assigning to monitors 48 182 Login monitor wall c cece eee eee 35 MOU GNESS E E E E E T E 107 M Markers safe area o n 43 MAIN ID t atisnasciinecaueaekelaead seats 267 298 Metadata RES E AAE ASE 123 closed captions cece cee eee eens 122 CIS DIA earem auc ES 218 DODY E oirre iee 123 holding time cececeececeeees 113 SUDIC aerie a NAA 122 LCICLEXE 25 4 cciehigketdeewreewieurs chads 122 Monitor wall dashboard 3 26 oad dude tah vadlad cetacdeens 36 disabling dashboard
63. Bits 8 Parity NONE Assigning Tallies Input Names and Output Names to Logical Sources To configure your logical sources e Inthe Channels Sources tab configure logical sources using text sources and system tallies from the Kayak s serial interface System channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions System Video Audio Text Alarm i Channels Sources Ei Source O video audio text text alarm inowid video n1 short lakel Src O tally system 0 color wesyetem input AsChannel 02 Src 1 tally system 0 color B Kaleido x 4RU input AChannel 03 A403 Emb 1 Src 2 tally system 0 color KX Router 32x32 input AChannel 04 Src 3 tally system 0 color Y Production Switcher input 4 channel 05 AOS Embi hputd wideo n5 short label Src 4 tally system 0 color z 3 4 5 Bi T P input 1 Src 5 tally system 0 color P input 2 Src 6 tally system 0 color P input 3 Src 7 tally system 0 color Yeinput 4 Src 8 tally system 0 color pe Long name Sre 9 tally system 0 color Anout 4 channel 14 11 411 Embd jfeegi4 wideod n11 short label Src 10 tally system 0 colo inout 40channeld2 12 Al2Z Emb1 fspat4 weleed2 n12 short label Src 11 tally system 0 colo input AiChannel 13 13 A13 813 Embi jfaeat4 weeols n 13 short label Sre 12 tally system 0 colo atl A MET nag Emh 4 Peet ota dat en dA ashar laha See 12 talhe metam Cele mci Short name Inout 7
64. Columns are delimited by commas without spaces Sample label file i VIR 2 VTR 3 CAM 4 CAM 5 SAT 6 SAT 1 00T 2 O0UT 1 0UT 2 OUT 1 PGM 2 PVW i to he Alternatively select the Auto update labels check box to import labels directly from a router at runtime Note Labels are imported at runtime i e they only appear on the monitor wall not in XEdit This feature applies to the following router protocols only ETL Matrix e Evertz Quartz Type 1 e HRS 1801 e NVISION Ethernet protocol Enterprise router Snell Pro Bel General Remote Control Protocol SW P 08 e Thomson Grass Valley GVG 7000 Native Protocol e Utah Scientific RCP 3 Protocol The list of supported protocols appears at the bottom of the Source mapping and Destination mapping tabs As with destinations the sources of the logical level must be associated with sources on the physical router 12 Click the Source mapping tab The table works in the same way as for outputs except that the number of rows is determined by the number of sources specified when the logical level was created Auto mapping example Specify Input 4 in Row 2 then click Auto map The auto mapper starts by putting Input 1 in Row 1 detects the entry in Row 2 so picks up the sequence by putting Input 5 in Row 3 Input 6 in Row 4 etc 290 Configuring an External Router Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping i i Clear mapping Import labels
65. Current aspect ratio 45 Custom aspect ratio Automatic Aspect Ratio COFFS Follow AFDWSS Default SD SFOS value Follow Input Format Default HD AFD value Follows Inout Format and AFD Coded Frame Ifthe Automatic Aspect Ratio property is set to Follow Input Format then the video monitor will change its aspect ratio based on the input feed s format Ifthe Automatic Aspect Ratio property is set to Follow Input Format and AFD Coded Frame then the video monitor will change its aspect ratio according to the AFD Coded Frame If there is no AFD present the default value for the current format i e Default HD AFD Value if the input is HD or Default SD AFD WSS Value is the input is not HD is used If the Default is None then the input feed aspect ratio is used 3 Click the Save button To have a video raster to follow a video signal s AFD WSS metadata 1 Click to put a check mark in the box labeled Follow AFD WSS Bevel Hide at loss of video kdl Aspect ratio Current aspect ratio 4 3 Custom aspect ratio 4 3 Automatic Aspect Ratio Follow Input Format Default SO AFOWVSS value Hone Detaut AD AFD value Mone 2 Choose a value from the drop down menu beside Default SD AFD WSS value This is the setting that will be used when there is no AFD or WSS in the SD signal Choose Keep Last to have the video window maintain the last decoded AFD or WSS value if the signal is paused 195 az Creating Layouts
66. Displays 0 New empty display library 4 Right click anywhere in the display library area and then click Save Display Library on the shortcut menu The Save Display Library window appears B Save display library Saveni My Documents H OOE fal biy Music A My Pictures 3 My PSP Files 3 My Received Files FA My Sharing Folders Lod My Videos 9 Snag Catalog Files of Type Display library lib B Save Cancel 5 Type a name for the new custom display library and then click Save Custom display libraries are stored separately from the XEdit workspace They havea a1 i extension 167 a Setting Up Rooms Adding Displays to Custom Libraries To add a display to a custom display library 1 Click the Display button on the toolbar and then click the room background to add a display Alternatively drag a display from a display library onto the room or choose a display within an existing room 2 Customize the display as needed and then drag it onto the display library while holding the Ctrl key Tools System Channele Sources Destinations Rooms Le aD gx O M Display unspecified Generic unspecified Generic BA cisplays 1 Ctrl click to drag display to custom library Note It is not possible to further customize a display once it is inside a library Should you need to do so drag the display to the room area apply the required changes and
67. Dynamic range Full range 0 255 Kill chroma kd CC Subtitling Text enabled PF i Auto sense Text colors BA BS Service El4 F08 service subtitling page Teletext amp subtitling 4 Select the appropriate option from the Text colors list 198 Configuring Audio Monitors Full range 0 255 Dynamic range Kill chroma Text enabled Text mode Auto sense Auto EL GUG Servite El4 708 service Subtitling page Black amp white Auto To display text in colors as defined in the signal Black amp white To display white characters against a black background regardless of what is specified in the signal 5 Specify an EIA 708 service value if necessary and then click Apply Dynamic range Full range 0 255 Kill Chroma Y Text enabled Text mode Auto sense Text colors Auto E260 SETE SUSU page T Notes e The current version of the Kaleido X Software supports foreground colors for teletext WST OP 47 only Closed captions CC DTVCC will appear in white against a black background e Ifyou do not need teletext to be displayed in colors then you may find that selecting Black amp white will improve your system s performance e Inthe case of the Subtitling WST text services the Kaleido X supports decoding of one preset page called Page A per video signal on the monitor wall In the case of EIA 608 only CC1 subtitles can be
68. EEIE RI ERES ES EEEN 250 Managing Room ACCESS 1 0c cece cece cece cnet n nen ene n ene e net n eet nenetneneenes 251 Sel ng koom PICICIEN CCS ssrerrivitis ari rausasdensie EErEE EErEE RETTERE 252 Setting RCP User Preferences svn caonvea staan ne haeddeaaaiwae Moakseebeiaeseweeetess 256 Checklist XEdit Quick Start Task List Follow these steps in XEdit to set up your RCP Users profiles 1 2 3 Create an RCP user See Managing RCP Users on page 250 Grant room access to the RCP user See Managing Room Access on page 251 Select the configuration of the external keyboard for this user See Setting the Keyboard Language 249 Ei Managing Kaleido RCP2 Users Key Concepts RCP2 The Kaleido RCP2 is a multi function remote control panel designed for use with Miranda s Kaleido X Software Ethernet connectivity allows multiple RCP2 users to access multiple Kaleido X systems allowing convenient access to the real time operating features of the Kaleido X The XEdit application is used to manage certain aspects of the Kaleido RCP2 Detailed Directions 250 Managing RCP Users Adding RCP Users To add an RCP user to the system 1 Inthe main window click the RCP users tab 2 Inthe Tools pane right click anywhere in the RCP users area and then click New user on the shortcut menu Tools RCP users Admin User Po Wser2 System Channels Rooms Layouts LRCP usera Actions e
69. KXA GPI GEN Firmware Package Number 0x35 KXA GPI GEN Firmware Type O2 KXA GPI GEN Firmware Version Firmware version OA GPE GEN Frame Rate 60H in detailed status KXA GPI GEN Normal Mode oe ee KXA GPI GEN Rear Present e KXA GPI GEN Reference Format KXA GPI GEN Reference Format Error oe KXA GPI GEN Reference Present eo KXA GPI GEN Safe Mode Package Number OPTION A Empty JEJE OPTION B Empty JEJE INPUT A KXI 16HSV s n 079401 19988038 Firmware 0xB1 Safemode Ox6F Example 3 Status and Option page for a Kaleido X 4RU system Upgrading your Multi Viewer System For information on upgrading your multi viewer system to version 5 30 of the Kaleido X Software please refer to the Kaleido X Version 5 30 Release Notes 390 index Numerics OY dostistaiieatesteavinyses ca aorees 106 107 A a E EE E ses aus car scence goes 345 AC 3 metadata ccc cece eee cence ees 123 Actions assigned to MONItOrs cece ee eee 239 background actions eeeeees 241 U e ETT E EEA 56 trigger audio monitoring 58 59 AFD ee eaneasaa coins ees aeaees ge 194 Alarm monitors 0 ce ccc cee eee eeeeees 216 Alarms debouncing cece eee eens 119 128 lo scusovenesa scent smerenteseacds 121 VEIS oE EEE AEE 141 providers 60 cece cee cece eee e eee eens 128 SNIP ereere EEAS 131 SMAS er er 120 216 status indicator cece eee ee ee 121 SUD alarMs
70. Layouts 206 kd Assignments Audio format Audio level Channel address URT Channels Note If the actual audio source assigned to this audio monitor is not of the same format configured here then the audio data will not be shown 3 Choose an Audio level Md Assignments Audio format Audio level Channel address URT Dolby E audio A audio 4 Choose a value from the Channels list to indicate which channel to display kd Assignments Audio format Dolk E Audio level audio Channel address URT Channels Dolby program Sterea Friendly name 3 Surround Fear ance Le Lett surround Re Right surround LFE Low frequency effects OC Center Bel Back surround lett Ber Back surround right _ Stereo f the Audio format is set to PCM then the available choices are left right and stereo Ifthe Audio format is set to Auto Dolby E or Dolby VANC then the available choices are eft right stereo surround left surround right surround LFE center left back surround right back surround left extra and right extra 5 Choose a Dolby program kd Assignments Audio format Dolk E Audio level audiot Channel address URT Channels Steren Dolby program Friendy name 0 A Q n E Ww ee 6 Specify a Friendly name Configuring Timers 7 Click the Save button Configuring Timers Building a countdown timer invo
71. Notes HTTP Used by XEdit and XAdmin Used by XEdit for keep alive heartbeat Used by XEdit for export operations Online connection Used for calibration data from XEdit RCP2 Used to listen for Kaleido X discovery packets RCP2 protocol RCP2 protocol 5121 UDP On multicast 230 8 8 9 for RCP2 For RCP2 From Multi Viewer to Client Java RMI 1024 5000 49152 655352 TCP Notes Remote Method Invocation client server communication Dynamic Allocation of ports Required for communication between client and Application Server 1 For Windows XP and earlier 2 For Windows 7 354 From Multi Viewer to Multi Viewer Key Concepts The following ports used for inter frame communications are open by default on all Kaleido X systems Service Port Transport Notes SSH Secure Shell Login is required to login to a multi viewer for maintenance Java Jini Responsible for discovery and communications between devices services on a network HTTP Internal communication Internal communication Internal communication Internal communication Internal communication Used for debugging purposes Web service filenet rpc 19572 UDP On multicast 230 8 8 9 for RCP2 On multicast 230 8 8 8 for keep alive heartbeat 1571 UDP For keep alive heartbeat From iControl to Multi Viewer Service Port Transpor
72. Room1 MMuttiHeadLayoutO scheme Custom aspect ratio R Slave to input format B Follow AFDANSS H v Mode Underscan Custom overscan Overscan L 5 0 T 5 0 R 5 0 v Custom safe zone image None Marker color E R 170 6 170 B 170 Safe title offsets x 0 0 y 0 0 Safe zone aspect ratio 4 3 Show markers Unsafe zone color EE Fo co Bo Unsafe zone transparency 50 M4 Alarms Tallies Border color Pending color B F 7 G 7 6 7 Border color Disabled color BE F 7 G 7 B 7 Border color Normal OK co BE F 7 G 7 B 7 Border color Minor Varnin HED R 170 G 170 B 0 Border color Major color GE FR 220 G 120 B 0 wate Aaoi M O nD Po aolen AU aiun M OAT OOM 189 az Creating Layouts A button appears inside the box Tips Layouts LayoutMuttihead layoutRoonml AMutineadLayoutO F l ro i ar ALI f ja Automatic Aspect Fatio OFF Follow AFDWWYSS C ae Default SD AFOWVSS value Mone Detaut H AFD value Mone y Mode Underscan Custom overscan Overscan L 5 0 T 5 0 R 5 0 B 5 0 MiSafeareamarkers Select i _ elect image Custom Safe zone image Mone j lt Wlarker color B R 170 2 170 5 170 button Safe title offsets x 0 0 0 0 Sate zone aspect ratio 4 3 Show markers Unsafe zone color O AnA Unzate zone transparency 50 Border color Pending color MR GTB ae jei ee eee ee Pot tot tpn 5 Click the button to open the Select Image windo
73. Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions 1 KX Router 96x80 Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections 0 Internal router 96x48 X A new sub folder is added to the Logical Routers folder Since this new folder is automatically selected a third level tab bar appears under Router Configurations with the Configuration tab selected Routers Routers v D Physical Routers i v Kaleido X 7RU Internal Router i peL OPTION A Video 120x48 i eL OPTION B Video 120x48 v NewPhysicalRouter bo Bane Video Video 16x16 v Logical Routers v 0 Internal router 96x48 if 0 Video v 1 KX Router 96x80 poo he 4 0 Video E Si21 Router 2 16x16 New logical router Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Configurations Router Connections Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping lt Third level tab bar General information Logical router name Logical router matrix ID Number of sources Number of destinations Router 2 2 Type a name e g SmallLogicalRouter in the Logical router name box This is the name that will appear on monitor wall in the Assign router input menu Ignore the Logical router matrix ID box for now Type the number of sources and destinations e g 16 x 4 Description Calibrations Interconnects
74. Runtime Environment J2SE version 1 6 0 update 20 installed on your PC or laptop Click the link at the bottom of the page to download the installer for the J2SE version required to use XEdit See Installing the Java Runtime Environment on page 379 for details 2 Click the XEdit button The system will automatically detect the J2SE version on your computer and if necessary will prompt you to install version 1 6 0 update 20 refer to Installing the Java Runtime Environment on page 379 for details 3 Ifthe Opening MEdit jnlp window appears click OK Opening MEdit jnip You have chosen to open a MEdit jnlp which is a JNLF File from http 10 0 9 39 What should Firefox do with this file Java TM Web Start Launcher def Save to Disk H Do this automatically for files like this from now on Another window appears displaying the progress of the XEdit download 376 Detailed Directions Java Web Start Downloading application Name MEdit 5 0 Publisher Miranda Technologies Inc From http 10 5 5 110 Estimated time remaining 51 seconds 4 You may see a warning about XEdit s digital signature In this case select Always trust content from this publisher and then click Run Warning Security The application s digital signature cannot be verified Do you want to run the application Name MEdit 5 20 Publisher Miranda From http 10 5 5 130 The digital signa
75. Save button on the toolbar Changing a Display s Width To change the width of a display in a room 1 Click the display whose properties you wish to configure 2 Click the Width box in the Properties pane Tips i Rooms Foor Frr View Filters Wi Assignment Gutput Head OUTPUT A Head 1 kd Size amp Position Resolution WESA 1600x1200 Ge60Hz Aspect ratio 16 9 Diagonal Size 1069 mm Height Rotation normal Position x 16 y 13 Width property 3 Select the appropriate unit of measurement from the list that appears inside the Width box and type the width 164 Configuring Displays Changing a Display s Rotation Notes e The current version of the KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer does not support display rotation The Display Rotation option must be enabled on the corresponding output card in the case of a Kaleido X multi viewer or HDMI output port in the case of a Kaleido X16 for rotation to work properly on the monitor wall The option can be enabled and verified in XAdmin s Status and Options page see Enabling Options on page 371 To change the rotation setting for a display in a room 1 Click the display whose properties you wish to configure 2 Click the Rotation box in the Properties pane The Rotation presets appear Rooms Rooms rrr ne eB view Filbers Ml Assignment Hiipu meee OUTPUT A Head 1 Mi Size amp Position Resolution WESA 1600x1200
76. Settings window showing timing parameters Note In XAdmin s Status and Options page these parameters are listed under the corresponding output card information according to the blank sync start end modeline system and with the sync polarity expressed as a number between 0 and 3 Refer to Viewing a Multi Viewer s Status Information on page 386 for details Example Suppose you want to configure the display that is connected to the OUTPUT C master KXO DUAL card s head 1 The image below shows the relevant data you need to copy to the Edit Resolution Settings window 159 a Setting Up Rooms W OUTPUT B KXO DUAL s n 079201 21234019 JEJ Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 wi OUTPUT C master KXO DUAL s n 079201 37475005 Ol Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 KXO DUAL Display 90 Deg Rotation Option Disable Key c64b2899 _ EDID DVI Out 1 EDID Presence gt 59 95017128620368 EDID DVI Out 1 Horizontal Blank Start EDID DVI Out 2 EDID Presence gt 59 649155214028866 EDID DVI Out 2 Horizontal Active 1920 Frequency and timing information as listed in XAdmin 4 Typeaname for the new resolution in the Friendly name box and then click Save as to close the Edit Resolution Settings window Alternatively if you are modifying an existing custom resolution you can click the Save button Edit Resolution Settings MyResalution 1920x1200 60Hz Refresh rate 59 94 Hz Syne polarity HsPol W
77. Users are not automatically propagated to all multi viewers Before a user can log on toa room associated with a cluster system the corresponding RCP user configuration must be manually replicated on all member multi viewers across the cluster Replicating Custom Resolutions Across a Cluster System If a room associated with a cluster system includes display screens for which you configured custom resolutions see Changing Room Display Resolutions on page 160 then these resolutions must be added on every multi viewer within the cluster TIP Make a backup copy of the resolutions from the system with the custom settings and then apply this resolution backup to the other associated multi viewers To do so 1 Use the create backup feature see Backing Up Resolutions on page 75 2 While working offline import the database from one of the target multi viewers to your local workspace and then use the retrieve backup feature to obtain the custom resolutions Retrieving Resolutions or Audio Scales from a Backup on page 76 3 Export the updated database from your local workspace to the target multi viewer 4 Repeat until all multi viewers have been updated with the complete set of resolutions Repairing a Cluster System Note In the procedure below System A refers to the system whose name or IP address was changed while another cluster member referred to as System B was unavailable To repair the cluster configurat
78. Wideo Calibrations P 608 Alarms VST Teletext Alarma hg ouness Dialnorm i ll Loudness Expected of Dialnorm Loudness Dianom Expected DS Filtering H NTSC Standard P DTVCC Alarms P AFDANWSS Dolby E Selection 4 Click the Properties tab and then set the appropriate values for your installation id Calibration Expected dialnorm dB m 27 0 Apply to al Loudness Channel Selection Mich keha Mens cna Mens che env _ ens eng C kho km1 mz Lkma kh4 L kms kme 108 Loudness Standard Max lower deviation dB Max Upper deviation dB eam Cai A 54 Cta a2 4 ie Apply to all The following values are involved Parameter Expected dialnorm Description Type your organization s reference dialnorm value in the box or set it using the slider The default value is 27 dB on a scale of 60 db to 0 dB This value can then be compared against the measured loudness and against the encoded dialnorm found in the Dolby VANC data Loudness Channel Selection Select the check boxes corresponding to the audio channels that should contribute to the loudness measurement Loudness Standard Select the standard you wish to apply either the A weighted Leq LEQ A or the ITU R BS 1770 metering ballistics Multi Viewer Input Calibrations Parameter Description Max lower deviation The Max lower deviation parameter determines the tolerated excursion range below the reference
79. _ inputA video AOF Vid TC Anput Channels 8 ADS A08 Emb 1 impwtd wiveos ADB Vid TC Anput 4 Chanmelog 9 A09 A09 Embi fnpwt videod AOS Vid TC Anput AiChannel 10 10 M10 A10 Emb 1 iputA videot0 A10 Vid TE Anput AiChannel 11 11 ATT A11 Emb1 iputA video11 A11 vid TC Anput AJChannelt2 12 412 M12 Embi mputA videot2 A12 vid TC Anput A Chanmel13 13 13 M3 Embi mputA wdeot3 A13 Vid TC Anput AChanneltd 14 M14 A14 Emb1 iputA videott A14 Vid TC Anput AiChannel 15 15 M5 AIS Emb 4 Inputvideots A15 Vid TC Anput AJChannel 16 16 416 M6 Embi imputd videot6 A16 Vid TC Anput BvChannel 01 17 B0 BOT Embi inputBvideot BM Vid TC Anput BiChannel oz 18 B02 B02 Emb1 MnputBvideo B02 Vid TE Anput BiChannel ga 19 Bos BOS Emb1 feeutheyided3 BOS Wid TC inot Bachannelo4 20 B04 B04 Emb1 feeuthewideod B04 wid TE Note The sources table is preconfigured with a set of default assignments including at least one level under each level category A symbol indicates the physical source for each assignment for example A16 indicates input signal 16 on input card A In the case of an expansion system the symbol is prefixed with a frame identifier either FRA or FRB On the Kaleido X16 only the input numbers 01 to 16 appear On a KVM 3901 3911 the input number 1 to 8 appear 2 On the File menu click New Alternatively right click the Channels Sources column headin
80. a name that includes the multi viewer name and the date e g Kx A amp B 08 12 02 zip Working Offline When using XEdit offline you work inside a workspace located on your client PC You set the location for this workspace when you first opened XEdit It is recommended to consider this workspace as a sandbox into which you import the database you wish to work on during this session and from which you export the database at the end of the session TIP Once you are satisfied with the location of your local workspace on the Configure menu point to Database and then select the Do not prompt for the database path check box to avoid being prompted every time you open XEdit See Importing a Database on page 71 for instructions on how to import the database from a specific multi viewer into your workspace Once the import is completed you can work locally in your XEdit workspace When you have completed your changes export the database from the workspace back to the multi viewer Applying a Backup Database to the Multi Viewer To retrieve a backup database you must use XEdit in offline mode A backup database must first be restored to your local workspace before it can be exported back to the appropriate multi viewer To retrieve a backup database 1 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Retrieve backup A window appears prompting you to locate a backup database 2 Navigate to your central backup sto
81. a warning that PSU B has failed if there is no PSU in S ot B Do this when you have two PSUs installed in your frame e When you clear the PSU B Installed check box the system does not generate a warning that PSU B has failed if there is no PSU in S ot B Do this when you have only one PSU installed in your frame Installing XEdit The Kaleido X Layout Editor XEdit is used to create layouts and configure the Kaleido X When the computer with XEdit is connected to the Kaleido X through a TCP IP network you can use XEdit to modify layouts and settings directly on the Kaleido X or you can work locally on the computer and then export your changes to the Kaleido X See Creating Room Layouts on page 175 for more information XEdit is not provided as a standalone application You download the application to your client PC or laptop directly from the multi viewer Note You can also download XEdit from the Miranda Technical Support portal Contact support miranda com for details To install XEdit 1 From a workstation on the same subnet as the multi viewer open a Web browser window and type the IP address of the multi viewer in the address bar The Kaleido X home page appears 375 16 Administration and Servicing ROUTER CONTROL Kaleido x version 5 30 build 4501 AEdIt version 5 30 Build 4301 Download the Java Runtime Environment installer required to Use XEdit Note To use XEdit you must have Java
82. and expansion systems only The Kaleido X16 and KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer models have virtual card slots that represent a set of hardware features integrated within their main board In XEdit these virtual card slots are for the most part equivalent to their physical counterparts on the Kaleido X models See page 65 for details To configure a system 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar The main pane displays the System hierarchical list and the Tools pane displays the equipment library when the root of the System list is selected Tools Sy Stem Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Equipment Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections System aleido X FRU fe aleida 4RU4 aleido PRU x 2 Cwvith expansion aleido x1 6 0 aleido x16 5 aleido Modular Kwi 3901 3911 SL seriall SL network xternal Router ncoda alypso ndromeda erial to TCRAP Dispatcher outer Controller Pro Bel SVy P 03 erial port test outer Controller Network Compact outer Controller Pro Bel Sy P 02 ony Serial tally Kaleido X TRU 2 Expand the System root and the multi viewer Note In the case of an expansion system then you need to first expand the dual frame element under which both frames A and B are listed You can then configure each of the tw
83. and related features please refer to the iControl User Guide Sub Alarm A sub alarm is an alarm that contributes to the status of a higher level virtual alarm The effect of a sub alarm s contribution is determined by the way in which the higher level alarm is configured Alarm Monitor Alarm monitors help you see the status of global and virtual alarms but their use is not limited to this type of alarms When any alarm level is assigned to an alarm monitor the status of this alarm will be shown When using the global alarm at the text label level it will display the text value of the alarm which is a readable name See Configuring Alarm Monitors on page 216 for more information 121 6 Configuring Alarms 122 Teletext Subtitles and Closed Captions Teletext subtitling based on WST or OP 47 NTSC closed captioning EIA 608 and ATSC Digital Television Closed Captioning EIA 708 DTVCQ can be displayed on the monitor wall allowing visual monitoring of decoded text from an analog or SDI video source The lines of text extracted from the video source metadata are displayed within the corresponding video window Teletext may comprise up to 799 pages of displayable data numbered from page 100 to 899 Teletext subtitles are decoded as described by the ETSI ETS 300 706 standard At any time only one page can be decoded per video monitor and only one page can be decoded per video source for monitoring purposes In addit
84. and save the action Export the database to the Kaleido X reating an action that can be triggered via the a Gateway command Perform steps 1 to 3 from To create a background action on page 241 From the Action List under the Tool pane click and drag one of the available action items and drop it in the On Change Gateway column at the bottom of the Actions pane Detailed Directions ae N Change Gateway hovw Fullscree Fullscreen z 3 Under Properties gt General type a Friendly name for the Action 245 10 Creating Actions File Edit Configure View Tools Help System rw gateSetGPloff fe ee O assignChannel nets g C gateLoadLayoutt Line 20 i MonitorAudio Line 21 i L gateXPoint1 Line 22 i h gateLoadLayout2 phe ne D gateShowFullScreen Tro k gateHideFullScreen Line 2 gateSetGPion ure ee Line 4 GPI In ac Dn On Criti On Change Gateway I aa aah dah aah da ah Aiai Show Show Fullscreen Load a new layout Monitor Audio Switch router cross point Set GPI output Show Fullscreen Layout Hide Fullscreen Layout Assign Channel Custom Note The Friendly name is used with the set KFi reAct ion command to trigger the action Refer to the Kaleido Remote Control Protocol Gateway User s Guide for details Editing an action 1 Select an action under the Actions tab or in the middle pane of the Action Editor wind
85. be reflected on the monitor wall Dashboard Messages The following tables explain messages that may appear in the Status dashboard lower right corner and in the Upgrade dashboard lower left corner on the Monitor wall An x in the 7RU 4RU X16 or KMV column indicates that the message applies to a specific multi viewer model namely Kaleido X 7RU Kaleido X 4RU Kaleido X16 or KMV 3901 3911 Status dashboard messages Message Description 7RU 4RU X16 KMV PSU A absent PSU A is absent overheating has a DC circuitry fault X condition or no current is drawn from it PSU B absent PSU A is absent overheating has a DC circuitry fault X condition or no current is drawn from it PSU A 48 V This message indicates that either PSU A is absent overheating has a DC circuitry fault condition or that no current is drawn from it PSU B 48 V PSU A is absent overheating has a DC circuitry fault condition or no current is drawn from it 349 16 Administration and Servicing 350 Status dashboard messages Message Description 7RU 4RU X16 KMV PSU A 48 V Fuse PSU A fuse is broken PSU B 48 V Fuse PSU B fuse is broken PSU A 12 V PSU A is absent overheating has a DC circuitry fault X condition or no current is drawn from it PSU B 12 V PSU A is absent overheating has a DC circuitry fault X condition or no current is drawn from it PSU A AC PSU A power cord is unplugged
86. card expansion 1 Launch XEdit and open the database associated with the Kaleido X expansion system for which you wish to configure router card expansion 2 Inthe System list add router cards to the OPTION slots in each frame this procedure describes the case where two cards in one frame are connected to two more in the second frame but it is also possible to connect only one card per frame E KXO 24Router Y Kaleido X 2 x FR with expansion Router Card Expansion FRAME A h gt GPIGENLOCK KX4 GPI GEN i bd OPTION A KXO 24Router pI OPTION B KXO 24Router o INPUT A KXI 16 i AMD INPUT B KXI 16 i AMD INPUT C KXI 16 i INPUT D KXI 16 io AMD INPUT E KXI 16 io ADD INPUT F KXI 16 io MD OUTPUT A KXO DUAL i 4 OUTPUT B KXO DUAL i AI OUTPUT C KXO DUAL i EXPANSION KXE EXP V FRAME B gt GPIIGENLOCK KX4 GPI GEN reads N insert KXO 24Router Remove gt MD INPUT C KXI 16 gt D INPUT D KXI 16 gt D INPUT E KXI 16 gt D INPUT F KxI 16 gt M OUTPUT A KXO DUAL gt 0 OUTPUT B KXO DUAL gt 1 OUTPUT C KXO DUAL i EXPANSION KXE EXP XEdit creates a physical router corresponding to each card and two logical routers one for each frame instead of one large logical router This is because the sources of one Kaleido X do not enter the router of the other Kaleido X The signals do not pass via the frame expansion cable For this reason it
87. check its ID and ignore it unless the ID matches its own 4 Click Edit 5 Inthe Edit Level Size window type the number of sources and destinations associated with the physical router E Edit Level Size SOuUrCES 1 6 Destinations 16 video 4udia other LOK Note The three option buttons labeled Video Audio and Other are used for Nevion Network Electronics routers only for which levels must be classified as either Video or Audio These settings are ignored by routers from other manufacturers 6 Click OK and then click OK again in the Physical Level Configuration window 284 Configuring an External Router At this point you have added a level to a physical router which appears in the Levels list under the Router Configurations tab Video video 16x16 Remove level For example if the physical router is a controller talking to a cascade of routers using a specified protocol you might have defined one of these a video router as Level 0 in the cascade with 16 sources and 16 destinations 16 x 16 7 You can continue to add levels for other routers in the cascade The screens below for example show how to define a 32 x 32 level for a Nevion Network Electronics audio router Se Physical Level Configuration x Level name Audio Level size Video 128x2 Level or frame ID 1 Sg Edit Level Size gt lt zs Sources Destinations 32 y C ideo audio Cother
88. click Open 76 Creating a Single Multi Viewer System The content of the local workspace is updated with data from the backup Note XEdit will not prompt for confirmation Creating a Single Multi Viewer System When first opening XEdit in offline mode the database contains the default configuration for a Kaleido X 7RU system including a fully populated frame all cards present as a starting point If you have a different multi viewer type i e a Kaleido Modular a Kaleido X16 a Kaleido X 4RU or an expansion system then you need to replace the default multi viewer type Note For the purpose of creating a system an expansion system Kaleido X 7RU x 2 is considered as a single multi viewer For instructions on creating a cluster system see Creating a Cluster on page 79 To create a system with a single multi viewer 1 Launch XEdit 2 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar The main pane displays the System hierarchical list and the Tools pane displays the equipment library when the root of the System list is selected Tools Sy Stem Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Equipment De cription Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections System aleido x FRU aleido x 4RU4 aleido TROJ x 2 with expansion aleido x1 6 0 aleido x16 5 aleido Modula
89. configure a logical router for a physical external router There is no way to control a physical external router directly Configuring Internal Router Cards The KXO 24Router card provides 24 external monitoring outputs that can route any of the 96 HD SD SDI inputs of the Kaleido X 7RU Two cards can be installed in a Kaleido X 7RU to provide up to 48 outputs These unprocessed outputs can be used to feed high quality CRT monitors test equipment such as waveform monitors as well as master control or production switchers To configure internal router cards 1 Make sure that one or both internal router slots in the System list have a router card installed To add an internal router card right click OPTION A or OPTION B in the System list and then click Insert KXO 24Router on the shortcut menu Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configure System f fe B Kaleido x 7RU Eo P GPUGENLOCK KXA GPI GEN i PTR OPTION A ae M oOfTion E inzert KxO 24Router i b i INPUT a Ep i a INPUT E KXI 16 ADD INPUT E KXIA16 i P INPUT E KxI 16 A KXO 24Router card appears in the selected slot 298 Configuring Internal Router Cards Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configure System Y B Kaleido x 7RU MD GPVGENLOCK KXA GPI GEN ae OPTION 4 KXO 24Router H OPTION B P INPUT A K 16 AD INPUT B KXI 16 P M INPUT KXI 16 M INPUT D Kx1
90. configure network settings on a Kaleido X The application used to create and modify rooms layouts and other components of a Kaleido X monitoring system Composite monitor A group of primary monitors Monitor Action item A graphical component used in the creation of a layout Typical monitors include UMDs time code monitors audio monitors video monitors and clocks Action elements that are associated with a specific action e g Load Layout Set GPI Out etc System list Refers to the hierarchical list visible under XEdit s System tab which gives a virtual representation of the system hardware i e Kaleido X frame and peripheral devices Trigger Triggering of actions Refers to the event that causes an action to be invoked For a monitor wall action a trigger could be a double click on a monitor Background actions are triggered by alarms or by a Gateway command When defining an action for a monitor you could specify for instance that a specific full screen layout be displayed on the monitor wall in response to the trigger on Change background action is triggered by any change in alarms status on Disabled background action is triggered when an alarm is disabled on Normal OK background action is triggered when an alarm reverts to normal on Minor Warning supported for Gateway alarms only on Major supported for Gateway alarms only on Critical Error background action is triggered by a
91. critical alarm Any Kaleido X alarm can be used as a trigger to invoke a background floating action The end event of any Kaleido X countdown timer can be used as a trigger to invoke a background floating action Gateway commands sent by an external device can be used to trigger actions created in XEdit 238 Detailed Directions Term Description Triggering of GPI inputs amp Any Kaleido X alarm can be used to trigger a GPI output change outputs Any GPI input from the Kaleido X can trigger a background floating action Gateway Refers to the Kaleido Remote Control Protocol Gateway interface supported by Miranda multi viewers See the Kaleido Remote Control Protocol Gateway User s Guide for more information Detailed Directions Creating Monitor Wall Actions Monitor wall actions can be assigned to a monitor on a specific layout Such actions can only be triggered when that layout is loaded on the monitor wall To assign a monitor wall action to a monitor 1 Open the layout that contains the monitor to which you wish to assign an action or create a new layout 2 Inthe Layouts tab click the appropriate monitor 3 Inthe Properties pane click the Mouse click box under Actions Scripts lransparency Os kd Actions Scripts P sctonsseits __ Mouse click Action triggered when the widget is clicked Note For a UMD three action types can be set and there is a box for each under Act
92. decoded Configuring Audio Monitors To configure an audio monitor 1 Inthe Layouts tab click the audio monitor you wish to configure 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Audio scale box under Appearance and then select the appropriate audio scale from the list 199 az Creating Layouts 200 kdl Appearance YU Meter fECBO26 Label color Analog Peak Meter DIM PPH Labels Analog Peak Meter EBU PP Monitoring indicator Analog Peak Meter Mordic L Orientation Analog Peak Meter UK PPh Ticks Digital Peak Meter EBU Digi Transparency Digital Peak vU Meter EB id Phase meter tyv LIMeter Meter Vu Meter Ec60268 17 Mormal color Sa ee Out of phase color MB F255 6 0 6 0 Threshold 0 125 ki Mouse click templatehame lcomimirandame Note See Configuring Audio Scales on page 201 for more information 3 The Monitoring indicator check box is selected by default Audio monitors with a monitoring indicator show by their color that someone is listening to the same audio level There could be a distinctive color for each of the displays at the site or one for each room etc telling you in more or less details where the audio is currently being monitored Clear the check box if you do not need this ud Appearance VU Meter lEceo26 Label color C R255 G 255 5 255 Labels C TEOT Monitoring indicator Monitoring indicator check box Orientation 90 0 Ticks Transparenc
93. is broken Fan 9 replace whole module if in error Rear Fan 1 replace whole module if in error Fan 9 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Fan 1 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Rear Fan 2 replace whole module if in error Fan 2 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Rear Fan 3 replace whole module if in error Rear Fan 4 replace whole module if in error Fan 3 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Fan 4 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Rear Fan 5 replace whole module if in error Fan 5 is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken Rear Fan 6 replace whole module if in error Fan 6is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken critical temp status not supported high temp status not supported Board High Temperature Temperature alarm based on the threshold set by the software Board Temperature Board temperature measurement X X Blower North East replace whole module if in error Blower North East is running too low based on the thresholds set at hardware level or is broken 351 16 Administration and Servicing 352 Status dashboard messages
94. is not possible to create a large combined router since some sources cannot go to some destinations this would create holes in the router matrix To be able to have one big logical router the router cards must be connected by their own router expansion cables IN to OUT between cards in the same slot in each frame 307 Routers amp Kaleido X 308 a ET a cS Cc r ca cS co lt 2 Q Be a Router Expansion Cables 22 g COOOOO 2 rO ko 170 000 000 00 A M nf 8 gt J z5 E lt c o Of TOf Ol o OF OF l The cabling connections must then be described in XEdit Click the Interconnects tab then click the expansion frame icon Under the Properties tab notice that there are four entries two per frame for the router cards OPTION A and B with rows labeled Expansion Input and Expansion Output Normally you connect the router cards in matching slots e g FRAME A OPTION A to FRAME B OPTION A system Channets Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions FRAME B OPTION Ah OUT FRAME B OPTION B OUT Kaleido X FR DUAL For FRAME A OPTION A click in the white column beside Expansion Input and choose a corresponding output option from the list A progress window for the router configuration appears briefly Note that the corresponding inverse settings appear beside the card you connected to Click i
95. is wired to the SMPTE master wiring specifications use the crossover adapter Miranda part number 1792 3700 100 The DE 9S pinouts for these two adapters are as follows Pin Straight adapter Crossover adapter 1737 3000 102 1792 3700 100 1 Not connected Not connected 2 RX TX 3 RX 4 Not connected Not connected 5 Not connected 6 Not connected Not connected 7 TX 8 TX RX 9 Not connected Not connected Note Some routers have RS 232 ports which will require the use of a RS 232 to RS 422 converter externally powered ones work best Sample Third Party Serial Pinouts Example 1 Ross Synergy100 RS 422 The Miranda 1737 3000 102 straight adapter can be connected directly to the Ross Synergy 100 276 Q amp A ee a _ CAZES LL LLLI LLE RX 2 RX 3 Z Kt nol 4 n c SA 5 NC EEG et 1 KEELE EEEEE OE TNC 8 n c _ n c 8 Pinout of each RS 422 port s RJ 45 DE 9 male DE 9 female RJ 45 connector on the Pinout of straight adapter Pinout of RS 422 connector multi viewer Miranda part no 1737 3000 102 on SMPTE slave device Standard wiring between multi viewer and Ross Synergy switcher wired to SMPTE slave specification Example 2 Philips VM 3000 RS 422 1 Ground 4 Notconnected 7 2 RX 5 Not connected 8 3 TX 6 Not connected 9 RX PPPI EIII IIIT I IIT RX g a Rx 2 EE E ZZZ EE lt Earra aaa S mefa E paaa ESG BA Z mn l
96. license for Kaleido X16 D HD SDI monitoring output for Kaleido X16 S HD SDI monitoring output for Kaleido X16 D 3D KXS X16 3DLA S KXS X16 3DLA D Stereoscopic display license line alternate mode for Kaleido X16 S Stereoscopic display license line alternate mode for Kaleido X16 D Note After enabling the 3D support option in XAdmin refresh the current layout or load another one for the change to be reflected on the monitor wall ROUTER SDI Router Output KMV 3901 3911 Module INPUT 348 Option 3G KXS X16 RTR16x2 Part No KMV 39N1 8XN OPT 3GBPS Dual router output option 1 frame Feature 3Gbps signal decoding option 8 inputs Embedded Audio KMV 39N1 8XN OPT AUD Embedded audio extraction license 8 inputs KMV 3901 3911 Module Option OUTPUT Second Head Activation SDI Monitoring Part No KMV 39N1 NX1 OPT OP2 KMV 3911 NX1 Key Concepts Feature Output two enabled license HD SDI monitoring output for KMV 3911 1 SDI output Output OPT SDI KMV 3911 NX2 HD SDI monitoring output for KMV 3911 2 SDI outputs OPT SDI 3D KMV 39NN 8x2 Stereoscopic display license line alternate mode for OPT 3DLA KMV 3901 3911 KMV 39NN 8x1 Stereoscopic display license line alternate mode for OPT 3DLA KMV 3901 3911 8x1 Note After enabling the 3D support option in XAdmin refresh the current layout or load another one for the change to
97. list representing the current system appears 2 Expand the multi viewer whose traps you wish to enable navigate to the appropriate alarm and then 134 click the alarm to select it Description Calibrations Interconnects Router configurations Router connections System ma weSystem v DE Kaleido x TRU 0 0 9 10 10 6 9 10 DTM GPVGENLOCK KX4 GPI GEN DD OPTION A KXO 24Router p B OPTION B Pe DD INPUT 4 KXxI 16 Pb e Mideo O1 FeVideo 02 video Alarms meee video Loss H video Black g OQ Video Freeze se Black amp Freeze Zone a Ban Q Video Luma Too High b Video Calibrations P Loudness Dialnorm Teletext amp Subtitling Alarms In the Properties tab select the Trap enabled check box to have the multi viewer issue an SNMP trap each time this alarm is triggered til SHMP O O Click Apply to all to apply this setting to all other alarms with the same name throughout the system Trap enabled __ Apply to all In the example clicking Apply to all will enable Video Loss SNMP traps for every input in your system Note This is particularly useful for audio input errors because of the large number of channels arriving at the multi viewer Repeat the procedure until all desired SNMP traps have been enabled On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Creating Logical So This chapter explain how to configure logical sources for your mul
98. new logical level for the audio 13 Create a new logical level e g 1 Audio and associate it with a physical router Audio level Levels 0 Video Add level Logical Level Configuratiog 24 Logical level name Audio Logical level ID 1 Physical levels i INPUT F Monitor Vall NewPhysicalRouter Audio NevwPhysicalRouter Video OPTION amp OPTION B Cancel Levels 0 Video 1 Audio 14 Click the Destination mapping tab 291 Routers amp Kaleido X 292 A new column appears corresponding to the new logical Audio level The audio destinations can be mapped to correspond to the video destinations The same applies when it comes to mapping sources Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping i f Clear mapping Import labels suto update labels 0 Video 1 Audio NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 1 1 NewPhysicalRouter Audio Input 1 1 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 4 4 NevwPhysicalRouter Audio Input 4 4 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 5 5 NewPhysicalRouter Audio Input 5 5 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 6 6 NewPhysicalRouter Audio Input 6 6 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 7 7 NewPhysicalRouter Audio Input 7 7 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 8 8 N
99. on the monitor wall can be automatically adjusted With multiple video players monitors on a monitor wall in multiple formats aspect ratios this makes it easy to switch from one format to another in the same player Automatic adjustment can be accomplished in two ways e Video monitor slaved to input A video monitor can be slaved to the input format such that the video monitor will change its aspect ratio according to the input signal type e g SD HD DVI Video raster follows AFD WSS A video monitor can be configured so that WSS AFD VI or AFD 2016 metadata is used to crop and or add black bars to the video signal giving the video raster the correct aspect ratio This metadata can be reported as friendly text inside a UMD Its presence can also be made available in alarms as well as via SNMP traps Note The Automatic Aspect Ratio feature can also be configured for each multi viewer input see Calibrating Automatic Aspect Ratio Decoding on page 110 A composite monitor also referred to as a composite a monitor or a tile is a group of primary elements that can be seen as a single object within a layout Composite monitors typically include a video window one or more audio level meters and a UMD with two tallies Term Timer Alarm monitor Description A timer can be slaved to a production timer controlled from the Kaleido RCP2 with start stop and reset control via GPI inputs and or used for monitoring t
100. only the transmit pins are required from the switcher s remote port See RS 422 Connection Diagram on page 28 for pinouts on the multi viewer Required pins Signal 7 TX 2 TX To set up the multi viewer 1 Launch XEdit 2 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar The main pane displays the System hierarchical list and the Tools pane displays the equipment library when the root of the System list is selected 3 Drag the Kalypso device from the equipment library onto the root of the System hierarchical list Alternatively right click the list root and then click Insert Kalypso on the shortcut menu Note On the multi viewer Kalypso is the module that receives and interprets serial tally information from Ross Video production switchers A window appears prompting you for a device identifier ok Input gt lt Enter device identitier a Device identifier input window 4 Type a name for the Kalypso module in the Enter device identifier box and click OK 5 Click the Interconnects tab 6 Position the pointer over the multi viewer icon then click and drag towards the Kalypso device icon A line representing the connection between the multi viewer and the device appears 314 Ross Video Production Switcher Lsystem Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Router Configurations Router Connecti
101. ony serial tally ahuna ayak When first opening XEdit in offline mode the database contains the default configuration for a Kaleido X 7RU system including a fully populated frame all cards present and a set of predefined logical sources 68 Using XEdit Online To customize the layout of the XEdit application window e Resize the window and its three panes by dragging the window s borders corners and pane splitters e Move the Tips Tools and Properties tabs between the left and right panes and reorder them by clicking their handle and dragging to the desired location e Close the Tips Tools and Properties tabs by clicking their X button e Undock the Tips Tools and Properties tabs from the main window by clicking their square button X button Handle Square button System Channels Rooms Booms Laod Rona Actions Layouts RCP users Actions _ Router Connections Interconnects qperties Tips What to do in the System tab A aater represents a grouping of equipment In KEdit you work on one system ata time system is stored in a separate database TSL pier How to create a system External Router Kaleido X 4RU Splitter How to configure a system Ericade How to save the system e Dock the Tips Tools and Properties tabs by clicking their X button To restore the default application layout 1 Dock the Tips Tools and Properties tab
102. over the video signal you wish to change and then press the UNDERSCAN button on the RCP2 Continue pressing UNDERSCAN to toggle between underscan and overscan mode To toggle the cropping mode using the mouse e Right click the video source If the video is in underscan mode then the shortcut menu will allow you to change to overscan 42 Toggling Safe Area Markers Notes The overscan margins are set to 5 by default They can be customized in XEdit e Inthe case of a KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer up to 10 cropping is supported e Safe title area and aspect ratio markers follow the video signal e g if the safe title is within 5 of top left right and bottom then when the video is in default overscan mode the safe title will not appear Toggling Safe Area Markers To toggle the safe area markers on a video using the RCP2 e Move the pointer over the video source and then press SAFE AREA on the RCP2 Continue pressing SAFE AREA to toggle the markers To toggle the safe area markers on a video using the mouse 1 Right click the video source and then click Safe Area on the shortcut menu eee Assign source to monitor oy Unlatch f Acknowledge i j met Send to EX Router output Aspect ratio L Overscan L 5 T 5 R 5 B 5 LJ safe area Text foc Subtitling Monitor Wall The safe area markers appear inside the video window 2 Click Safe Area again on the shortcut menu to hide the ma
103. page 43 Audio monitor UMD An audio monitor also called audio level meter or ALM is a layout element that provides a visual representation of sound See Triggering Audio Monitoring on page 58 An under monitor display UMD has a text label that can be static or updated by a peripheral device It can also have eft and right tally indicators The UMD usually indicates the name of the video source seen in a video monitor See Editing UMD Text on page 47 and Selecting an Input Method on page 47 Time code monitor Key Concepts A time code monitor displays the Ancillary Time Code ATC from an HD video signal or the time code found in an embedded SDI video signal part of the vertical interval of an analog signal VITC or other external Linear Time Code LTC Time code monitors can be used for monitoring the duration of programs Timer Clock Action A timer monitor is based on a timer defined within the Kaleido X system Three timer modes are available 1 UP timer counts up starting from zero up to a preset time 2 DOWN timer counts down from a preset time to zero and 3 REMAINING timer counts down from the current time until it reaches a preset time Timers are defined and configured in XEdit They can be slaved to production timers assigned to logical sources assigned to rooms or specific RCP users and controlled from the Kaleido RCP2 See Using Timers on page 53 A clock is t
104. selected user tor the current root The Full Screen Settings window appears 3 In Full Screen Settings select the appropriate full screen layout and then click OK 4 Full Screen Settings Fullscreen layout ritst RIFS H a Ti Zone rife conc Note Before XEdit 2 00 full screen layouts were not associated with a specific full screen zone In the case of such legacy layouts you must also select the appropriate full screen zone from the Zone list 258 Setting RCP User Preferences Assigning Audio Output to an RCP User To assign an audio output to an RCP User 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the user for whom you wish to configure the RCP2 s AUDIO MONITORING button from under the appropriate room in the rooms hierarchical list In the Properties pane click the Audio monitoring output box and then select the output used to monitor audio signals by this user in this room from the list of available outputs Tips Properties RCP users Foor User2 User name User Fassworg AREENA Description Preset 1 Layouts Preset 2 Layout4 Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout Preset 5 Layoutt Preset 6 Inputs Preset 7 Input Preset 5 Mone Preset 9 Mone Preset 10 Mone Full screen settings rifz1 FIF21 Audio monitoring Mone Keyboard Mone timer QUTPUT AvHead 1 4Sudio Out OUTPUT AvHead 2 Audio Out OUTPUT Bead 1 A amp udio Out OUTPUT BHead 2 Audio Out
105. signals a eft eye signal and a right eye signal and interleaving them into a composite video The interleaved composite displayed on a 3D capable display viewed with polarized 3D glasses is seen as a stereoscopic 3D image In addition combining 2D images and 3D images interleaved on one display is supported Note To be able to monitor a 3D stereoscopic signal you must first add a second video level to your logical sources so you have a level for each eye and then for each video monitor or composite you wish to use for 3D monitoring you must assign the left eye and right eye levels Support for audio monitoring output through HDMI The Kaleido X16 and KMV 3901 8x2 now support audio monitoring output over HDMI for PCM audio pairs from SDI sources Support for Cascade solution To address solutions with more inputs per head using smaller cost effective multi viewers KMV 3901 8x2 multi viewers can now be configured in cascade This allows the support of the following configurations KMV 3901 8x2 cascade with 16 inputs X 2 outputs KMV 3901 8x2 cascade with 16 inputs x 1 output KMV 3901 8x2 cascade with 24 inputs x 2 outputs KMV 3901 8x2 cascade with 24 inputs x 1 output Features Introduced in Kaleido X Version 5 10 Kaleido X version 5 10 was a major release containing several new features enhancements and bug fixes Overview Support for 3Gbps input signals The new KXI 16HSV3 is a universal input card t
106. subtitling Unlatch Acknowledge all p Show dashboard Monitor Wall Hide all dashboards Hide all dashboards Note When a dashboard is closed while the system is in an error condition it will automatically reappear after 60 minutes or when a new error occurs Loading Layouts Loading a Layout by Using the Mouse To load a layout on the monitor wall by using the mouse 1 Right click the anywhere on the monitor wall point to Monitor Wall if you clicked a layout element and then click Load layout on the shortcut menu 38 Loading Layouts Refresh Load layout PE Load layout Unlatch Acknowledge all Hide dashboard Hide all dashboards System configuration Display resolution The layout chooser appears Load layout on Rl a a Ta TTTLLEL LLL LLL arr A rrr rerererree PAN YL MANZ WLAN YS MoAssignment Physicalsources 2 Select the layout you wish to load from the set of layouts defined for this room and then click OK The new layout appears on the monitor wall Loading a Layout by Using the RCP2 To load a layout on the monitor wall by using the RCP2 1 Press LOAD on the RCP2 The layout chooser appears 39 Operation of the Monitor Wall Load layout on Rl i il i ll il Ti F nui ba Dii daai il li i ii ll li So hh a a a a a A MARS YL MoAssignment Physicalsources 2 Select the layout you wish to load from the set of layouts defined for this room and the
107. such as waveform scopes as well as ISO recorders The outputs can even feed other multi viewers The router outputs can be controlled by point and click menus on the monitor wall by a Nevion Network Electronics remote control panel via a serial connection by a Miranda NVISION system controller via a TCP IP connection or by a production switcher s auxiliary bus controls The router outputs can be controlled by external controllers via the following protocols VikinX Compact serial VikinX Modular TCP IP NVISION TCP IP Snell Pro Bel serial TCP IP or manually from the Miranda Router Control Matrix application available from the Kaleido X Web page The built in router improves integration and reduces cabling and equipment costs The routing capability eliminates the need for a separate router for the following applications e feeding baseband high quality monitors anywhere in a facility e feeding test equipment for quality control monitoring e feeding a secondary multi viewer for output expansion e feeding an ISO recorder in production studios Kaleido X as a Router Independent from the routing capabilities obtained by adding KX0 24Router cards to a Kaleido X 7RU multi viewer or by enabling the router output ports on a Kaleido X16 any multi viewer can be used as a router in itself The logical sources defined in XEdit s Channels Sources tab are considered as the sources and the destinations are either monitors on the mon
108. the Sony production switcher in the Enter device identifier box and then click OK 5 Click the Interconnects tab 6 Position the pointer over the multi viewer icon then click and drag towards the Sony production switcher icon A line representing the connection between the multi viewer and the device appears System channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Contigurations Router Connections Sony serial Production Switcher Kaleido X 4RU Connection between the multi viewer and the device 7 Click the connection line between the multi viewer and the device and then click the Properties tab 321 Tally Interface Devices System stem Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Properties Tips Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections Production Switcher lt gt Kaleido 4RU H RS 4227 Com Port Disconnected i A E RAT Sony serial Production Switcher Kaleido 4RU 8 Inthe Properties pane click the appropriate output in the RS 422 Com Port list Production Switcher lt Kaleido x 4RU 3 9 Inthe Interconnects tab click the Sony production switcher icon 10 In the Properties pane set the serial communications properties for the Sony device as follows s ME Production Switcher Baud Rate 38 400 BE Data Bits 8 Baud rate 394010____
109. the card for which you wish to enable an option w OPTION B KXO 24Router s n 079701 183536001 w Firmware 0x40 Safemode 0x43 INPUT A KXI 16HSV s n 079401 18894014 O 2 Click to expand Firmware Ox8F Safemode Ox6F Inputs VV VVIODIVIIVIIIGS INPUT B KXI 16HSV s n 079401 17914023 O lt Click to collapse Firmware Ox8F Safemode Ox6F Inputs VV DIO VIIVIIIIIIG KXI 16 Embedded Audio Option Disable KXI 16 Loudness Option Be Enable KXT 16 48va Status Key 69b50c81 4 Locate the entry for the option you wish to enable and then click the corresponding Enable button A window appears prompting you for the option key 372 Detailed Directions w INPUT B KXI L6HSY s n 079401 17914023 Firmware Ox8F Safemode 0x6F Inputs GJJ VDVIOVDIDIDIIIIG KXI 16 CC XDS Option Disable Key b04bdcd i iil z _ Serial Number x KXI 16 Embedded Audio Opti KXI 16 Dolby E Option 50c51 Please type the option key wes KXI 16 Loudness Option KXI 16 48va Status KXI 16 48vb Status KXI 16 Audio Box Data Error a OK Cancel 5 Type the key for the specific option in the box Once the option is enabled the key is displayed and a Disable button replaces the Enable button Example To activate the Extraction of CC Subtitling and XDS metadata option CC XDS Option for a Kaleido X input card you would need to locate the appropriate card in XAdmin s Status
110. the hierarchical list Note A user s name or password cannot be changed from within the Tools pane They can only be changed from within the rooms hierarchical list The user can be removed from the room after the name or password change The change will be retained See Granting Room Access to RCP Users on page 251 2 Inthe Properties pane click the User name box and then type the new name 261 Ei Managing Kaleido RCP2 Users RCP users Foor JOHN HEAELEEE Passvvord Description Preset 1 Layouts Preset 2 Layout Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout2 Preset 5 Layout Preset 6 Inputs Preset 7 Input Preset 6 Mone Preset 9 Mone Preset 10 Mone Full screen settings rifsi1 F1IFS1 Audio monitoring output OUTPUT AHead 1 4udio Out Keyboard United States Dyorak for lett hand timer Mone User name Give a UNIQUE USer name Note The name must be no more than 8 characters in length and consist of only letters and numbers no spaces or special characters 3 Inthe Properties pane click the Password box Tips Properties RCP users Foor JOH User name Description Preset 1 Layouts Preset 2 Layout Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout2 Preset 5 Layout Preset 6 Input A Preset 7 Inpute Preset 6 Mone Preset 9 Mone Preset 10 Mone Full screen settings rifs1 FIFS1 Audio monitoring output OUTPUT Avdead 1 A4udio Out Keyboard United States Dyorak for lett hand timer Mone Password Enter a
111. the selected head Alternatively type a value between 0 and 100 directly in the Color saturation box kd Calibration Audio Monitoring Color MB R 74G 746 210 ci Audio Monitoring Delay mE Color Saturation mmi mmn OY Input Keying Mode _ Backoroune Apply toall__ Note All videos on the monitor wall display controlled by the selected head are adjusted simultaneously 7 f appropriate you may copy the settings from this head to every output head in the system To apply the color saturation settings globally throughout your system click Apply to all This has the same effect as selecting every output head one by one and adjusting the Color saturation slider to the same value Multi Viewer Output Calibrations Calibrating the DVI Keying Mode Note The KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer does not support DVI keying Kaleido X and Kaleido X16 multi viewers have a DVI input connector for every output head Using these connectors it is possible to feed keying material to the multi viewer Depending on your purposes the content provided through the DVI input can be set either as a background or as a foreground for the layout shown on the monitor wall Note Background keying is enabled by default and should remain enabled when no actual keying is involved Enabling the foreground keying mode when there is no signal at the associated DVI input is not supported To calibrate the DVI keying mode 1 Inthe main window click the S
112. time as multi viewer inputs are assigned different router sources and crosspoints are changed on the upstream router For each multi viewer input the panel displays the current router source assignment the corresponding router destination as well as router status information In the case of a Kaleido X multi viewer model it also indicates if an input card has been removed Note In the case of a Kaleido X multi viewer model if you remove or reseat output cards Signal Path Viewer may stop displaying real time updates in which case close the application and then open it again e Kaleido X 7RU Kaleido X 7RU x 2 and Kaleido X16 With earlier versions of the Kaleido X Software it was possible to send sources to a multi viewer s internal router outputs as long as these sources were associated with multi viewer inputs As of Kaleido X version 5 10 sending sources from an upstream router to the multi viewer s router outputs is also supported Note This feature is based on the KX Router logical router instead of using the internal router This means that you must add the multi viewer s router outputs to the KX Router configuration otherwise the Send to router output menu will not be enabled Once this is done do not use the Internal Router logical router In addition KX Router must have only one level i New Features e HD SDI monitoring output Information about the optional SDI outputs is available in XAdmin s Status and O
113. tne ASTID ONG cy ecinac al eosin etna einir ra EEEE REIRE EEANN EENAA TEENS 37 Lodin VOE aE E E E E E EEE 38 Displaying a Source in Full Screen Mode 00 cee cece cece eee e eee e tenet eect eee eens eee eeeeeneeenes 4 toc CiraNGindd SOURCES Aspet RAO cateunrsacc at aon tants aha cealecn ras catia ATE RE A 41 Video Cropping ZOOMING code Gerwpawenkads super siae A ETA AAA 42 Togaling sale Area Markei aeiae ta niaaa aA A A AA OAE A EUT AATTEET 43 Displaying Subtitles and Closed Caption Text 0 ccc cece cece cece cece nee e rece e eee ee teen teen eneeenes 44 EUNA OMO TEN eaae A ET OA AATE TE A 47 selecind an NDUCMCINOU ss stnsec eo tansa E solani on TATALA 47 ASSIQMING SOUECES to MONTON cairia enna aa EEA oi ewer AANE A 48 enanding Cross DOIN ars dresin aaraa erties E AA OA EAEAN O 50 SING mE aaaea a A E E AT EEE NE ETEO 53 iggen ACONS ssania ENA ATA AAA 56 Teg gening GPl Output EVON naaraan TE E EER E A A EEAO 56 ACKNOWICOOINGAAIMIS sanaa E RETA 57 miggenino AUCIO MOMON Onarerineerena T A E TEE T ATONA E ONAE 58 Setting a Display Monitor s Output Resolution ccc cece cece cece cece reece ee aeeeaeeeaeetaneeanes 59 Changing the IP Address of a Multi Viewer from the Monitor Wall 0 cece cece ene eeeeeeeeeeeas 61 4 Managing Kaleido X Systems 63 BOY COIN CPUS ge scares eet sta deportes ea nrs whe E ac a tne ao ths cues rarer en arelaatasios E EEA 63 Detanca Directions eee ere emee an ccre sere at
114. video monitor Video window s aspect ratio changed to 4 3 within a 16 9 video monitor To set a custom aspect ratio for a video monitor 1 Click the video monitor for which a custom aspect ratio is needed Note Double click the video if is part of a composite monitor 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Custom aspect ratio box The box becomes editable 3 Type the appropriate aspect ratio and then press Enter The new aspect ratio is applied to the video window within the video monitor and it is added to both the Current aspect ratio and Custom aspect ratio lists Note The custom values are appended to the Custom aspect ratio list on an ongoing basis They can then be applied to other monitors in other layouts Current aspect ratio only lists the current custom ratio if any in addition to the default 16 9 and 4 3 values 188 Adding Safe Area Markers To add safe area markers for a video monitor in a layout Configuring Video Monitors 1 Click the video monitor whose safe area you wish to configure Note Double click the video if is part of a composite monitor 2 Inthe Properties pane select the appropriate options under Safe area markers Adding a Custom Safe Area Image XEdit allows you to superimpose an image e g a brand graphic on top of a video monitor in such a way that a video signal will show through the transparent areas in the graphic This is accomplished by adding a free fo
115. will appear if duplicate IP addresses are detected between different KXO cards in the frame As long as this is the case no upgrade is possible You must resolve the duplicate IP address issue before resuming the upgrade This message will appear if software cannot retrieve firmware version from the card s This may indicate an issue with the hardware Key Concepts Upgrade dashboard messages Message Description 7RU 4RU X16 KMV Error during safemode This message will appear if software cannot retrieve upgrade The current Safemode version from the card s This may indicate safemode version could anissue with the hardware not be verified Error during safemode This message will appear as a side effect of the upgrade Card presence presence of cards in frame B running a version older from frame B could not be than version 3 00 The upgrade will not be permitted verified on any card in the frame until these cards are removed from frame B To upgrade these cards transfer them to frame A Cannot upgrade cardin This message will appear on an expansion frame if this slot if any Please frame B contains cards running software firmware remove card from slot older than version 3 00 The upgrade will not be number permitted on any card in the frame until these cards are removed from frame B To upgrade these cards transfer them to frame A Cannot upgrade cardin This message will appear o
116. will be displayed An empty layout appears 4 Add at least one monitor to the layout 175 iz Creating Layouts Note In the case of a KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer layouts are subject to the following limitations e up to eight video monitors over two displays overlapping is not supported e up to four stereo audio level meters per video monitor e one time code per video monitor e only digital clocks are supported e XDS metadata monitors are not supported 5 Assign every monitor a logical source See Adding Monitors to a Layout on page 178 6 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The Save Layout window appears ox save Layout Save Inn CO Room B k ee E Inputs CO impute File Hame i Files of Type All Files B i 7 Type a name for the layout 8 Click Save Creating Full Screen Layouts To create a full screen layout 1 Click the Layouts tab in the main window 2 On the File menu click New The Create a New Layout window appears It lists all the existing rooms and full screen zones in your system 176 Managing Layouts Cancel 3 Click the name of the full screen zone in which this layout will be displayed An empty layout area appears 4 Add at least one monitor to the layout see Adding Monitors to a Layout on page 178 If the full screen layout includes more than one composite monitor you can designate o
117. your desktop ae MEdit 5 00 A startup screen appears followed by the Database Location window Opening the XEdit Software Select the database location MEdit stores your data in a local database Select the path For the database you wish to use in this session ETE Dont ask next time 3 From the window that opens locate an appropriate directory for your workspace and then click Open to close the Select the database location window 67 Managing Kaleido X Systems All Files e 7 a amze me If it is not the first time you open XEdit and you are satisfied with the location of your local workspace then select the Don t ask next time check box to avoid being prompted every time you open XEdit 4 Click OK to close the Database Location window The XEdit main window appears This may take a few seconds What to do in the System tab A system represents a grouping of Kaleido x 7RU equipment In XEdit you work on aleido X 4RU one system ata time Each system aleido X ZRU x 2 with expansion system is stored in a separate database aleido 16 D gt aS x aleido X16 S How to create a system aleido Modular KM 3901 3911 How to configure a system SL serial How to save the system SL network xternal Router ncoda alypso ndromeda erial to TCPAP Dispatcher outer Controller Pro Bel Svy P 08 erial port test outer Controller Network Compact outer Controller Pro Bel Svy P 02
118. 0 G70 6 0 GD F220 G 120 6 0 MMB F70 c0 E0 MR Grey MR GBT MR G7 6 7 MPR Ge MR GTB MR G7 EB M lt lt _ Display alarm latch check box Same as text colors __ Latch colors selection Follow latch _ Blink mode selection M25 6 06 0 MMR 25 6 06 0 MMB F25 c0 En MM EFAA MM eaea MMB F70 c0 E0 Display alarm latch check box Mobik _ Blink mode selection Folloyy latch Critical Critical and major Critical major and minor CS i Display alarm latch check box No blink _ Blink mode selection 3 Click the Blink mode boxes and then select the appropriate blinking behavior for your purposes Blink mode Description Off The status indicator will never blink Follow latch The status indicator s blinking will follow the latch status The indicator will blink until someone unlatches the alarm Critical The status indicator will blink when the current status is critical Critical and major The status indicator will blink when the current status is critical or major Critical major and minor The status indicator will blink when the current status is critical major or minor 215 az Creating Layouts 216 4 Select the Display alarm latch check box to enable the latched status indicators Configuring Alarm Monitors To add an alarm monitor to a layout 1 Click the Alarm monitor button s on the toolbar click the layout and then move or resize the mon
119. 0008 166 loading layouts c eee e cece eens 22 OO emnene wshsceads alae baa ee tae oe 35 UMES reren a EA 53 Monitoring output De SU EESE E E E E E E 161 Monitors AAN eaaa i e E aie 121 216 COC EEE AE E A EE E 220 223 composite 0 0 cece cece cece eevee 225 229 DANES parrari rnar aces dete ties 234 replication 0 ccc cece cece cee e ees 180 FOSI ZING TE E E E tele 229 source assignment 000 48 182 UMEE sererai naana n TaN a 211 VAID a EA 219 VICCO speler ER E AS 187 ADS Metadata Heater 218 Multi viewer KMV 3901 3911 ooon 6 ODNONS rechain t re e 371 status information 85 346 386 version information 0 eeeee 346 N Network impact ccc eee e cece eees 353 Networking ccececceceecnceeseceees 363 Nominal level cc eee e eee 106 107 0 OPA sereine saer a AEA 122 ODUONS 2carndeadecedecaetdetoacanieeen 347 371 QVEISCOIN xeniacdoni cia ataGisnnaepaedeaiek 192 P PC configuration cc cece cence eee e es 363 Peripheral devices ccceceeeeeees 66 311 POM USAC sc eacesiossnetiataaduaerheandeaeaues 353 client PC to multi viewer 354 Mail alerts ccc cece cece e eee 356 iControl to multi viewer 08 355 multi viewer to client PC or laptop 354 multi viewer to multi viewer 355 multi viewer to from NTP server 357 multi viewer to
120. 08 Alarms PAST Teletext Alarms DS Filtering PeNTSC Standard ReDTYCC Alarms W APDASS H AFD Videolndex Loss s AFD 2016 Loss ae DSS Dolby E Selection Click the Properties tab Select Legacy AFD 3 bits to support the legacy AFD 3 bit format for the Video Index Select the appropriate value from the SD AFD Source list The default value is Auto which means that the multi viewer will automatically detect what is present in the signal and use it to report AFD If more than one AFD type is present in the signal and the SD AFD Source is set to Auto then AFD type is selected in this order 1 AFD 2016 first 2 AFD VI or 3 WSS Note For an HD signal the AFD is always AFD 2016 so no calibration is needed 7 Click Apply to all to apply the associated setting to all video inputs on your multi viewer Calibrating Detail Enhancement and Dynamic Range Note The KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer does not support detail enhancer calibrations 111 Calibrating the Kaleido X 112 To configure detail enhancement and dynamic range for a video signal 1 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears In the list expand the multi viewer whose inputs you wish to calibrate Expand the appropriate input then one of its Video elements Under Video Calibrations click Detail Enhancer and then
121. 1 Click the Layouts tab 2 On the File menu click Open Alternatively click the Open button on the toolbar The Open Layout window appears Managing Layouts 173 az Creating Layouts r Full screen layout Muttihead layout All Files EJ 3 In Open Layout navigate to the appropriate layout and then click Open The selected layout appears in the Layouts tab z EIS SOUFCeS vonto all destinations Siji z ai ees AIOO OT VAS CESUNANONS M InputA video InputA videi Jeo g2 Anput AiChannel Ot fa A 4 A nput amp Channel OF nput A Channel 08 A input A Channel 09 Layout Multihead layout Room Anputa Loading a Layout on the Monitor Wall To load a layout on the monitor wall directly from XEdit when working in online mode Click the LOAD button on the toolbar 174 Managing Layouts Edit C _dbXEditDB_1 La File Edt wiew Configure Toole Help DeaG foe Jat Gal vif OEE System Channele Sources De The current layout appears on the monitor wall Closing a Layout To close a layout e On the File menu click Close Alternatively click the Close button on the toolbar Creating Room Layouts To create a room layout 1 Click the Layouts tab in the main window 2 On the File menu click New The Create a New Layout window appears It lists all the existing rooms and full screen zones in your system Cancel 3 Click the name of the room where this layout
122. 12 1536 192 DVI Configurable Analog AES Video Redundant background GPI 1 0 audio channels Composite SD SDI HD SDI reference with embedded audio Inputs Kaleido X 7RU 2 expansion system overview Kaleido X Cluster As of version 4 00 of the Kaleido X Software it is possible to configure a cluster system allowing operation of layouts sharing output signals from multiple Kaleido X multi viewers fed by a router while using only one mouse and one Kaleido RCP2 Refer to Creating a Cluster on page 79 for more information Getting Started Kaleido X cluster system overview KMV 3901 3911 Cascade As of version 5 20 of the Kaleido X Software it is possible to configure up to three KMV 3901 3911 multi viewers as a cascade system Unlike the cluster whose purpose is to increase the number of output heads in a room the cascade increases the maximum number of inputs that can be displayed to a single head For more information refer to the KMV 3901 3911 Cascade Step by Step Configuration guide available on the Kaleido X DVD Detailed Directions 14 Verifying your System Configuration 0 c ec cee ccc ccc n een e ene cnet nee e nee eneeeneees 15 LOGGINGOLGVOUL saiakvaai lt tawsausseahecinaseueaieterttaitanaatuesesaaaeatateaseatees 22 Verifying your System Configuration Verifying your System Configuration Verifying a Multi Viewer s Internal Statuses and Options To perform a system verification 1 Yo
123. 16 MD INPUT D KXI 16 P M INPUT E KXxI 16 DD INPUT F KxI 16 FD OUTPUT 4 KXO DUAL i Head 2 Room i LTC 4 Loss 6 Use the sliders to adjust the brightness and contrast until you obtain a pleasing presentation of the video elements on the monitor wall display driven by the selected head Alternatively type values directly in the Red Green master and Blue boxes Red sire Green master r Blue is til Contrast gain offsets Red miim soo Cv toatl Green master ee C Blue Im so Sith Note Moving the Green master slider will move the Red and the Blue sliders by the same amount The values must be between 0 and 100 A good approach is to set all values the same using the Red and Blue sliders then to adjust for the best overall presentation using the Green master slider and finally to fine tune the color balance using the Red and the Blue sliders If appropriate you may copy settings from this head to every output head in the system For each value you wish to apply globally throughout your system click the corresponding Apply to all button This has the same effect as selecting every output head one by one and adjusting the sliders to the same value for the selected parameter Note If you want to apply the same values to all the other output heads in your system you must click the Apply to all button for Green master FIRST and then the Apply to all buttons for blue and red in any order Ot
124. 19424025 Firmware 0x35 Safemode 0x36 Firmware version in Technical support jj module heading w OPTION A KMO 24Router s n 079701 18536001 Firmware 0x40 Safemode 0x43 W OPTION B KXO 24Router s n 079701 18534020 Firmware 0x40 Safemode 0x43 INPUT A KXI 16HSV s n 079401 19797004 Firmware OxB1 Safemode 0x6F Inputs TO KOP O DO O O OP O TO O O O e e w INPUT B KXI 16HSV s n 079401 17914013 Firmware 0xB1 Safemode 0 6F Inputs DO DO DO TO O TO e T O TO O T e e e e INPUT C KXI 16HSV s n 079401 35927020 Firmware OxB1 Safemode 0x6F Inputs 9 9DOVDIVIOIIIIIVIG Example 1 Status and Option page for a Kaleido X 7RU x 2 expansion system Kaleido x16 D s n 079201 18372020 0 Firmware 0x30 Safemode 0x2 lt e Firmware SYSTEM 1 version in ROUTER OUTPUTS 1 system heading VIDEO INPUTS Inputs JO VIII VIIOIOIVIVIVG MULTI VIEWER OUTPUTS t 4 Example 2 Status and Option page for a Kaleido X16 system 389 16 Administration and Servicing Kaleido X 4RU Frame ao W GPI GENLOCK KXA GPI GEN s n 079899 17912014 Firmware 0x35 Safemode 0x36 Firmware version _KXA GPI GEN 1 2V Status ss s OO lL LL Uinmodule 3 KXA GPI GEN 1 L 8V Status OOOO O heading KXA GPI GEN Card Type 0x30 KXA GPI GEN FPGA Version 0x15
125. 2 LIMEDS aena a a Sans 53 V chip Monitor cc cece eee eee ee 219 ACO eA AA 187 ADS metadata ss cciuvesadewianderioadets 218 Width display 92 entinicheidiwieieviawadaseeas 164 Workflow database management 90 WSS E A E A EE see ed eee 194 WIG aeren eE AAAA 122 X KAAM erreari re eaa 345 ODUONS odor sunieseostetehoineteoanedees 347 virtual card slots ooon 66 AUS sirinin a E 113 218 KEGEL sicrie aaa 64 345 Installation cc cece cece e eee eee 375 ODENING Sacoscslanseieedseuacsueeseaenns 66 SNOLUCULS at acatavnedntamedawen stats aha 8 virtual card slots cece cece eee eee 65 Z LEVONU corine wastes Qou ton ca dua wns tate 106 107 Zoom Pan Layouts ZOOM VIEW vo cece cece eee e eee eeeees 186 FOOMING aeann Sue tou Goatees ETT 42 397 398 Contact Us Miranda Technical Support For technical assistance please contact the Miranda Technical Support center nearest you Americas Asia Office hours 9 00 a m 9 00 p m EST Office hours 9 00 a m 5 00 p m GMT 8 Telephone 1 800 224 7882 Telephone 852 2539 6987 Fax 1 514 335 1614 Fax 852 2539 0804 E mail support miranda com E mail asiatech miranda com Europe Middle East Africa UK China Office hours 9 00 a m 6 00 p m GMT Telephone 86 10 5873 1814 Telephone 44 0 1491 820222 E mail asiatech miranda com Fax 44 0 1491 820002 E mail eurotech miranda com France Office hours
126. 237 for more information Triggering GPI Output Events To trigger a GPI output event 1 2 3 4 In XEdit configure the appropriate GPI line s direction as an output system calibration Create an action to toggle the GPI output on off state and assign it to a monitor Export the database to the Kaleido X Trigger the action by clicking the monitor The GPI line s state changes Note GPI lines configured as outputs can have their state set manually for test purposes in XEdit s System tab system Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users 4 Properties Tips Router Connections Interconnects HE kd Calibration P Direction MOUTE OO TG Description Calibrations We GPVGENLOCK KXA GPLGEM Po Diagnostic EIB HGPL A Line 2 Trap enabled Acknowledging Alarms Acknowledging Alarms Acknowledging Alarms on the Monitor Wall When you acknowledge an alarm latched or current the latched status is reset to normal i e unlatched If the alarm is acknowledged while its status indicates an error condition the latched status is reset to normal and will only go back to error if the alarm status returns to normal and then to error again To acknowledge an alarm by using the RCP2 e Move the pointer over the monitor whose alarm state you wish to acknowledge and then press the UNLATCH STATUS button on the RCP2 To acknowledge an alarm by using the mouse e Right click th
127. 368 6 Using the numeric keypad type the IP address of a Kaleido X on a remote subnet and then press ENTER 7 Repeat step 4 to 6 to add unicast IP addresses for up to three remote Kaleido X systems Logging on to the Kaleido RCP2 As a network device the RCP2 provides access to any room configuration on any Kaleido X system on the network As a security measure access is controlled by a login procedure To log on to a Kaleido X system from the RCP2 1 Press the LOGIN key The following message will appear on the LCD display LOGIN Position Admin 2 Press ENTER to select Admin A message prompting you to enter a password will appear on the LCD display 3 Press ENTER again by default there is no password The message Access granted will appear on the LCD display if the login is successful If a mouse is connected to the RCP2 then you should be able to see and move the mouse pointer on the monitor wall Note If at any time the message Target system is offline or No login list available appears on the LCD display press the ESC ENTER and DEL keys simultaneously and go back to step 1 For more information refer to the Kaleido RCP2 Guide to Installation and Operation available on the DVD that shipped with your system Configuring an Audio Bridge Terminal Note The KMV 3901 3911 is not compatible with the Audio Bridge Terminal The optional Audio Bridge Terminal ABT is an external audio multiplexer
128. 4 New PhysicalRouter NevwPhysicalRouter ETL Metrix HRS 1801 Nidsion N Q000 Protocol For supported drivers only Pro Bel General Remote Control Protocol SW P 08 Thomson Grass Valley GAG 7000 Native Protocol Utah Scientific RCP 3 protocol Auto map button Physical outputs are automatically populated If you have already specified a physical output the sequence starts from that one then autofills from there Ifthe one you specified is in a row part way down the table auto mapping fills in the rows below then continues the sequence starting at the top of the table This feature is particularly useful when mapping a large number of destinations Note If you make a mistake click Clear mapping and then click Yes in the confirmation message that appears to delete the table entries in the physical output column This does not affect the Labels column 11 To import labels from a CSV file i e a comma delimited file such as might be exported from an Excel spreadsheet click Import labels navigate to the CSV file that contains the labels you wish to import select it and then click Open 289 Routers amp Kaleido X Note The file must be formatted as three columns with no header row Column 1 should contain numbers from 1 to N the number of sources column 2 should contain the source labels and column 3 should contain the destination labels
129. 6 DD INPUT F KXI 16 es uu OUTPUT KXO DUAL Head 2 Room i LTC 1 Loss Select the appropriate unit milliseconds or AES samples and then use the slider to adjust the audio monitoring delay until the audio and video are well synchronized on the monitor wall display driven by the selected head Alternatively type a value between 0 and 100 ms or between 4 and 4800 AES samples directly in the Audio monitoring delay box kd Calibration Audio Monitoring Delay Color Saturation AES samples Note All videos on the monitor wall display controlled by the selected head are adjusted simultaneously If appropriate you may copy the settings from this head to every output head in the system To apply the audio monitoring delay calibration globally throughout your system click Apply to all This has the same effect as selecting every output head one by one and adjusting the audio monitoring delay settings to the same values Calibrating the Audio Monitoring Color To calibrate the audio monitoring color 1 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears In the list expand the multi viewer whose output heads you wish to calibrate Multi Viewer Output Calibrations System channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description lalibration Interconnects Router Co
130. 86901 99999556 0 Firmware 0x12 Safemode 0x2 Status and options SYSTEM JE Technical support C pp ae ra VIDEO INPUTS 21 gt Inputs CO TO TO TO TO TO TO TOP TE TE TE TEF TE TE Te MUTLI VIEWER OUTPUTS XAdmin Status and Options page 3 Inthe System header row click the Expand details arrow A list of system details and statuses appears below the System header row 4 Atthe top of the list select or clear PSU B Installed as required ww Kaleido X16 D s n 086901 39109002 0 Firmware Ox3E Safemode Ox SYSTEM 7 BNC Mezzanine Assembly Number 0869 0400 300 BNC Mezzanine Serial Number 086902 38631022 Frame Assembly Number 0869 9900 100 Frame Serial Number 086999 38634018 The change is applied immediately The Power Supply B Status indicator turns gray indicating that probing is disabled for this alarm 374 Detailed Directions Kaleido X16 D s n 086901 39109002 Q Firmware Ox3E Safemode 0x2 SYSTEM PSU B Installed E o BNC Mezzanine Assembly Number 0869 0400 300 BNC Mezzanine Serial Number 086902 38631022 Frame Assembly Number z 0869 9900 1000 Pia a r ee ee Se a M l M B ipa T F LED Mezzanine Card Type Normal Mode Power Supply A Status Power Supply B Status Onfnemnnnn Crermst IMPORTANT The system behavior after selecting or clearing the PSU B Installed check box is as follows e When you select the PSU B Installed check box the system publishes
131. 99 17912014 Oit Firmware 0x35 Safemode 0x36 Technical support OPTION A Empty C EAG OPTION B Empty C ES G INPUT A KXI 16HSV3 s n 088901 41670001 Ol Firmware 0x24 Safemode 0xF Inputs AP ASAA DAAD i INPUT B KXI 16H5V s n 079401 19988038 C ES Firmware 0xB8 Safemode 0x6F Inputs 9G DVIOVIOSIISISOS w OUTPUT A master KXO DUAL s n 079228 38790003 O e Firmware 0x206E Safemode 0x56 OUTPUT B KXO DUAL s n 079201 18372016 C EAG Firmware 0x208E Safemode 0x5B Inthe case of a Kaleido X 7RU or Kaleido X 7RU x 2 cards are presented in the order they appear from left to right when looking at the front of the chassis Inthe case of a Kaleido X 4RU cards are presented in the order they appear starting from the top left corner down and again from the top right corner when looking at the front of the chassis Some heading rows may show a card type serial number firmware and safe mode versions a module status indicator and input signal status indicators 1 The multi viewer must have Kaleido X software version 2 10 or later 386 Detailed Directions The module status indicator shows whether the card or module is running normally green or in safe mode red The signal status indicators reveals the presence of a valid input signal at the corresponding connector 3 Move the pointer to an input signal status indicator to view the associated signal format Status indi
132. A selection for every video signal on your system Repeat the procedure for the Page B C and D elements Note On the monitor wall only Page A will be available with the associated video signal However alarms can be configured for all four preset pages See Configuring Alarm Debouncing on page 128 for instructions on how to configure an alarm Calibrating Metadata Holding Time To calibrate metadata holding time 1 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears In the list expand the multi viewer whose inputs you wish to calibrate Expand the appropriate Video element select the metadata element whose holding time you wish to configure and then set the relevant values under Calibration in the Properties tab CC holding time Set the delay between 5 and 360 seconds after which closed captions 608 are cleared Y BE Kaleido X16 D YIDEO INPUTS Fevideo D1 P Wideo Alarms Video Calibrations 608 Alarms a Line 21 Loss H CC1 Loss fi CC Loss rN OCS Loss A T1 Loss kd Calibration CC holding ti P Teletext amp Subtitling Alarms Loudness Dialnorim fo eeW DS Filtering 113 Calibrating the Kaleido X Subtitling holding time Y BE Kaleido X16 D VIDEO INPUTS FeVideo 01 Video Alarms F Wideo Calibrations b 608 Alarms F Te
133. A14 Vid TC Anput 4Chanmel15 15 M15 Ma Embi imputt wdeo15 A15 Wid TC Anput AiChannel 1e 16 A16 A16 Emb1 inputvideote A16 Vid TE a es ee es input Bichannel 02 2 Incremental copy zone 2 Move the pointer to the incremental copy zone The pointer changes to crosshairs Adding Levels Video Audio Text Alarm Time codi Channels Sources Source ID videol audiot texti alarm timecode input AiChannel 13 13 M13 M13 Emb1 inpattweeots 13 vid TC input AiChannel14 14 Add A14 Embt inputtvideott A14 Vid TC Anput AChannel 15 15 A15 A15 Emb 1 inpattwideotS A15 Wid TC input AiChannel 16 16 A16 A16 Emb 1 linputtvideot A16 Wid TC nut BiChannel 01 s ITC input BiChannel 02 OS o e Anput BiChannel 03 Anput BiChannel 01 ooo o S input BiChannel 04 a E E input BiChannel 05 oo o ee ee input BChannel 06 3 Click and drag to propagate the selected logical source s physical assignments to the next logical sources levels The source cells are highlighted with a green border and the target cells with a red border input AiChannel 45 15 ATS A15 Embi inputd wideotS M15 Vid TC input AiChannel 16 16 M16 A1B Emb 1 jinputdwideot 16 Vid TC Angat BiChannel OS input Bichannel 0G inni t Ai hannal MT 4 Release the mouse button once you have reached the last logical source to be configured The level cells are now populated with incremented physica
134. Bridge Terminal Guide to Installation and Operation available on the DVD that shipped with your system 370 Detailed Directions Enabling Options To enable options on a multi viewer 1 From a workstation on the same subnet open a Web browser window and type the IP address of the multi viewer in the address bar Kaleido X Windows Internet Explorer dit View Favorites Tools Help The Kaleido X home page appears Kaleido X version 5 00 build 35 3 XEdit version 5 00 build 14 Download the Java Runtime Environment installer required to use XEdit 2 Click the XAdmin button The XAdmin Status and Options page appears 1 The multi viewer must have Kaleido X software version 2 10 or later 371 16 Administration and Servicing System configuration Kaleido X 4RU Frame wae Status and options GPI GENLOCK KXA GPI GEN s n 079899 17912014 EAG Firmware 0x35 Safemode 0x36 Technical support Q OPTION A Empty D OPTION B Empty Ea i INPUT A KXI 16HSV3 s n 088901 41670001 O Firmware x2A Safemode OxF Inputs 3000000000000000 i INPUT B KXI 16HSV s n 079401 19988038 o Firmware 0xB8 Safemode 0x6F Inputs 9 9 VVVIOVISSIOVSOS OUTPUT A master KXO DUAL s n 079228 38790003 Ol Firmware 0x208E Safemode 0x5B H d OUTPUT B KXO DUAL s n 079201 18372016 EJE Firmware 0x208E Safemode 0x5B 3 Click the arrow button at the end of the heading row that corresponds to
135. C Apply to all kd Logging Logging enabled Apply toal Click Apply to all if you wish to apply this setting to all other alarms with the same name throughout the system In the example clicking Apply to all will enable logging for the Video Loss alarm on every multi viewer input in your system Repeat the procedure until logging is enabled for all desired alarms On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Publishing Alarms to SNMP Devices Note This section does not apply to the current version of the KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer This multi viewer model does not support SNMP related calibrations and settings The Kaleido X and Kaleido X16 multi viewers support the use of Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP traps to notify an external SNMP manager of significant events These significant events are flagged within the Kaleido X system as alarms Two actions are required to set up the SNMP trap process on the Kaleido x e Identify the targets SNMP managers to which SNMP traps will be sent 131 6 Configuring Alarms 132 e Choose the traps that will be sent to the selected SNMP managers Defining Target SNMP Managers To define target SNMP managers 1 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Click the multi viewer whos
136. Canadian French G Canadian French 6 ans Canadian French 13 ans Note As its name implies the V chip rating preview is only a preview and its value is not saved with the layout 4 Make the appropriate assignments see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors on page 182 and select the desired video level if necessary kd Assignments Monitor wall destination Mone Mame chip Source Video level video 5 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Notes e Unlike alarms the V chip rating associated with a video signal that is currently monitored on the monitor wall is not relayed to the XEdit user interface when working in online mode The V chip monitor uses the holding time configured with the XDS filtering calibrations for the associated video source see Calibrating Metadata Holding Time on page 113 Once the specified holding time has expired the V chip monitor displays the N A logo N A e When V chip data cannot be extracted from the current video signal the V chip monitor displays the N A logo Configuring Clocks In addition to the default combo type clock that can be added to a layout by using the Clock button on the toolbar the predefined widget library includes a selection of analog and digital clocks 220 Configuring Clocks Notes e The KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer does not support analog clocks e Inthe case
137. Controllers Text database download Harris Leitch Harris XY Passthrough Protocol Platinum Xplus Integrator No Via 32 Panacea Xpress Lantronix Lightwave Matrix Hub Protocol Matrix Hub 1000 No Miranda Densit HRS 1801 Yes HCO 1801 No Miranda NVISION NVISION Ethernet protocol Enterprise NV9000 system controllers Yes router NVISION Ethernet protocol Compact Compact router series No router Nevion Network Network Compact serial VikinX Compact No Electronics 7 Network Modular Ethernet VikinX Modular No PESA USP Unsolicited Status Protocol Cheetah Tiger Jaguar No Cougar Ocelot Bobcat CPU Link Protocol No 1 serial TDM3000 PERC2000 system No controller Quintech XRM SRM MRF MBPM Series Protocol SRM 2150 Matrix Switching No serial Systems Snell Pro Bel General Switcher Protocol SW P 02 No General Remote Protocol SW P 08 Halo Aurora and Sirius Yes Controller serial control Sony GVG NP Emulation Sony routers requires HKSPC No card GVG routers Ethernet Thomson Grass GVG 7000 Native Protocol serial Concerto series routers Yes Valley Encore series control panels Thomson Grass Jupiter VM 3000 ASCIII Protocol Venus series and Trinix No Valley Philips series routers 273 Routers amp Kaleido X Routers Company Protocol Routers Controllers Text database download Utah Scientific PL 160 PL 320 AVS 1B No RCP 1 SC 1 SC 2 SC3 series No RCP 3 SC 4 series Ethernet only Yes
138. D 226 Working with Composite Monitors UMD within unlocked composite 7 Move the audio level meter to the very edge of the composite using the mouse and then finishing with the arrow keys and resize it as appropriate UMD Audio level meter resized and moved to the side 8 Move the UMD to the very bottom of the composite using the mouse and then finishing with the arrow keys and resize it if needed UMD resized and moved to the bottom with its upper right handle matching the audio level meter lower left handle 227 az Creating Layouts Note To align a monitor more precisely against another select one of them and then click the second one while holding the Shift key It is then possible to drag any of the sizing handles the larger grey dots to resize any of the selected monitors while their relative position remains visible Whenever appropriate matching adjacent monitors corner or center handles together will help achieve a composite that can be resized elegantly 9 Move the video monitor to the top left corner of the composite then click its bottom right corner handle and drag it to stretch the video until one of its dimensions completely fills the empty area vertically or horizontally Video monitor stretched to fill the remaining horizontal area 10 Drag the video monitor s bottom center handle until it meets the UMD s bounds Video monitor stretched vertically with its bounds mat
139. DVT Out 1 EDID Presence o wwonowz mme 19 oo EDID DVI Out 2 Horizontal Active 1920 Frequency and timing information as listed in XAdmin 4 Type a name for the new resolution in the Friendly name box and then click Save as to close the Edit Resolution Settings window Alternatively if you are modifying an existing custom resolution you can click the Save button Wl General Friendly name hyResolution 1920x1200 60Hz Type a name Refresh rate 59 94 Hz Syne polarity HSPoal WSPol Horizontal active 1 320 Configuring a Custom Resolution from a Specific Display in a Room To configure a custom resolution from a specific display in a room Click the display whose properties you wish to configure 2 Click the Resolution box in the Properties pane and then click the button that appeared on the right of the resolution presets 157 a Setting Up Rooms 158 Properties Tips Rooms Rooms Fooma I UtUb head 7 l Resolution _VESA 12801024 Edit Resolution Settings button HB T Aspect ratio 1250 1000 Diagonal size BS inch Height 1024 mm width 1260 mm Rotation normal Position x 1260 Y 0 The Edit Resolution Settings window appears kd Assignment wupu head Y Resolution VESA 1250x1024 FIGs Aspect ratio 1250 1000 Diagonal size BS inch iral I A PFT P kd Othe Friendly name YESA 1260x1024 60Hz A Refresh rate 59 94 Hz Syne polarity HsPol WSP
140. E Safemode 0x5B 3 Click the Technical support link in the navigation pane The Technical Support contact information page appears System configuration Contact Technical Support Status and options 9 00 a m 9 00 p m EST 9 00 a m 5 00 p m GMT 6 Telephone Telephone 1 800 224 7502 052 2539 6987 Fax 1 514 335 1614 Fax 652 2539 0604 support miranda com asiatech miranda com we ee eo oe oe eee ee ed ee oe oe es 2 a a a 4 Click System snapshot System snapshot Click the following link to download a system snapshot that can be used by Technical Support Click to download Click here a here Memory snapshot Click the following link to view a memory snapshot that can be used by Technical Support Click to view The system snapshot generation takes a few seconds and then the File Download window appears File Download Do you want to open or save this file Name FR7 1_System_Snapshot_Jun042008_143218 zip Type TUGZip ZIP archive From 10 0 9 39 While files from the Intemet can be useful some files can potentially g ham your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this file What s the risk 5 Click Save The Save As window appears Save in My Documents My Music My Recent Bm Pictures Documents My Videos File name 7 1_System_Snapshot_Jun042008_161123 2ip My Network Saveastype TUGZip ZIP archive v 6 Type a
141. ER button until the ESC button lights up to display the configuration menu 2 Press the 8 key to move down the list until ETHERNET OPTIONS appears on the LCD display 3 Press the ENTER key to display the ETHERNET OPTIONS menu 4 Select the IP ADDRESS menu using the 2 key to move up in the list or the 8 key to move down the list and then press ENTER 5 Using the numeric keypad type the chosen IP address and then press ENTER 6 Select the NETWORK MASK menu using the 2 key to move up in the list or the 8 key to move down the list and then press ENTER 7 Using the numeric keypad type the chosen network mask and then press ENTER You have assigned a static IP address to the RCP2 To select a room for the RCP2 1 Press and hold the ENTER button until the ESC button lights up to display the configuration menu 366 Detailed Directions 2 Inthe ROOM SELECTION display press ENTER again to get the room list from the Kaleido X systems that are currently available on the network 3 Inthe room list select the room you wish to access by pressing the 2 key to move up in the list or the 8 key to move down the list Note By default the video outputs of a Kaleido X are assigned to specific rooms Ona Kaleido X 7RU the two DVI VGA outputs from each of the dual head Output cards A B Cand D are assigned to ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 and ROOM4 respectively Ona Kaleido X 4RU the two DVI VGA outputs from each
142. In many cases a single combined status based on all the alarms in every alarm level for a logical source is more useful than having to individually assess each and every alarm condition detected Such a global alarm combines all the individual alarm statuses into an overall status where the most critical events take precedence Example Three alarms occur two of which can be acknowledged without further action while the other one is considered an Error In such a case the overall alarm status would be Error Each logical source has one global alarm for its alarms only The global alarm cannot be configured and is not exposed in the Channels Sources tab It can only be assigned to a layout element that supports alarm levels like a UMD or an alarm monitor In the Properties pane the lists of alarm levels that can be assigned to a monitor include the item GlobalAlarm along with all the individual alarm levels You can select this global alarm not only as an alarm status but also as a text label level When an individual alarm is in Error its friendly name will contribute to the global alarm text value When the global alarm level is assigned to an alarm monitor the text values for all contributing alarms currently in Error will be visible Virtual Alarm A virtual alarm is a special type of alarm that allows you to derive a new result from the status es of one or more existing alarms Note For detailed information about virtual alarms
143. M gaer r nae alee 164 Input Method cece cece eee e eee e ees 47 Interlaced oerrint recat orea 161 IP 0 0 cerie rrari ani enina 358 IP SCUINGS sino hetiencayacreaataaaandaasaate 358 K GIDL heath acer winrd teerbocyive aco a a 323 Kaleido Modular 0 ccceee eee e es 6 64 Kaleido RCP2 cece cece cece ceecees 345 Kaleido ereidead th cakeutanat cite eadkeatae tans Mert 63 RU Tames 238 554 chse0aasaewteddadsages 10 FRU MAME wi cscentewacntcamssassecseeuse 11 Cluster system ceececcescescecees 65 Configuration eee ee 85 358 361 expansion system cece eee ees 12 64 frame StatUS cece ccc cece eee e eee 386 version information 0 eeeee 387 Kaleido A lO a n2as88cchdevsesiaddedsadassescs 8 64 KaD O sit padesiesdendesnendencaseanass 311 313 KAVAK aerae aa E EOE 330 Keyboard input method c eee ee 47 Keying mode CAIDIAUION osred aars EEEE cause 101 KMV 3901 3911 noeneen 6 64 cascade system 0 eee cece cece eee e eee 65 L Languages input method eens 47 Layout background keying eeseeeees 101 foreground keying eeeeeceees 101 POV OUI lt tc etary cyst cece aysenactetenne meus 173 178 assigning to RCP users 0 eee 25 7 automatically populated grid 180 background image eceeeeeees 182 COCKS chs airdhuata deh eatdanin eeieichakaaurs 220 GIO SING EEEE E E
144. Metadata Video format Decoded data Video format Decoded data 10801 50 Hz 25 Hz PSF Teletext NTSC N CC 608 1080p 25 Hz Teletext NTSC J CC 608 1080p 25 Hz EM Teletext SECAM Teletext 1080 25PSF EM Teletext Component Y Only 525 None 1080p 23 98 Hz 24 Hz DIVCC 708 Component Y Only 625 None 1080p 23 98PSF 24PSF DTVCC 708 UNAVAILABLE None 1080p 24 Hz EM DTVCC 708 XGA None 1080 24PSF EM DTVCC 708 SXGA None 1080i 50 Hz Teletext WXGA None 10351 59 94 Hz DTVCC 708 WSXGA PLUS None SDI 525 CC 608 UXGA None SDI 525 507 CC 608 UNSUPPORTED DVI None SDI 625 Teletext 1080p 59 94 Hz DTVCC 708 SDI 525 487 generic CC 608 1080p 50 Hz Teletext SDI 625 generic EM Teletext Dolby E AC 3 Metadata Metadata Dialnorm and Program config information contained in a Dolby E audio stream can be exposed on the monitor wall in text form Dolby E and PCM audio levels can be displayed via audio monitors Decoding of Dolby E metadata embedded as ancillary data VANC in the video stream is also supported e If multichannel audio up to 8 channels is coded in a Dolby E stream and transported over a single AES channel metadata and audio levels are extracted from the Dolby E stream Limited to 1 embedded audio source selectable no ABT support VU and Peak meters 8 channels for each source Program config for each source Dialnorm for program 1 for each source e If multichannel audio up to 16 channe
145. N A H OPTION B DD Double click any card to connect INPUT B KxX1 16 MD OUTPUT A KKO DUAL i OUTPUT B KXO DUAL Once the connection is established the selected system becomes highlighted in the System list and the message Connected to appears in the status bar Tools Sy stem Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Equipment Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections System aleido FRU ee Y aleido 4RU aleido FRU x 2 with expansion aleido X16 D peeControlFromAurora aleido 16 S UPR aleico Modular KM y 3904 73911 P B Kaleido X 4RU SW FRA 10 6 6 50 SL ae MyKayak xternal Router Serial est ncoda gt Kaleido FRU 0 0 9 10 10 0 9 10 alypzo P 3 amp Kaleido X 7RU SA FR7 1 10 0 9 359 Andromeda Serial to TORAP Dispatcher 7 Repeat from step 5 until all cluster members are configured Note In the hierarchical list for a cluster an unavailable system is indicated by a dimmed icon and cannot be expanded It can take up to 15 seconds before a multi viewer s status icon is updated in the System list Creating Rooms for a Cluster System Create rooms for the cluster system by adding displays associated with the different multi viewers as appropriate See Setting Up Rooms on page 145 for details Notes Each room must have a unique name across the cluster system
146. ON A Output 8 amp MATIA i Ou tet ola 302 It is also useful to have manual control over the source destination mapping in the event a router card is removed Note The Auto update labels feature is not yet supported for internal router cards The internal router also has a Logical router matrix ID which can be used by an external router control device or application to control the internal router modules Router Connections Routers Description Calibratians Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections j Routers Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping Physical Routers v Kaleido x TRU internal Router peL OPTION B Video 120x48 bef OPTION A video 120x48 P D MewPhysicalkiouter Logical router name Internal router O Logical Routers Y 1 KX Router 96x80 General information a 0 ideo Logical router matrix ID p D 2 SmallLogicalFauter 16x4 v Number of sources 0 Video Number of destinations Logical router matrix ID Note In the case of a Kaleido X 7RU signals entering the input cards are made available to the internal router cards via the midplane i e there is no cabling between the BNC outputs on the router cards and the BNC inputs on the KXI cards Router Connections To be able to control an upstream router from the monitor wall you must specify physical connections between a number of mu
147. PUT F K l 16 1 OUTPUT A KxXO DUAL M OUTPUT B KXO DUAL TD OUTPUT KXO DUAL M OUTPUT D KXO DUAL ee ss 3 Expand the appropriate output module The expanded module will show the output heads Depending on the multi viewer model other items may also appear 99 Calibrating the Kaleido X 100 4 Select the head you wish to calibrate P INPUT E KXxI 16 P M INPUT F KXI 16 FD OUTPUT KXO DUAL beHead 1 Room Head 2 Room LTC 1 Loss os LTC 2 Lass os LTC 3 Loss gt 4D OUTPUT B KXO DUAL gt MD OUTPUT KXO DUAL gt MD OUTPUT D KxXO DUAL 5 Click the Properties tab The color saturation adjustment control appears Expand the Calibration heading to show the control if it is not visible System wesystem Kaleido X FRU P GPVGENLOCK KX4 GPLGEM f D OPTION A poll OPTION B AOD INPUT K 16 AD INPUT B Kx1 16 DD INPUT KxI 16 DD INPUT D KXI 16 AD INPUT E KXxI 16 DD INPUT F KXxI 16 Y M OUTPUT A KXO DUAL Sead 1 Room Head 2 Room i T LTE 1 Loss Red ire CE annuals Green master _ Apply toal Bue mim Md Contrast gain offsets ee ae Green master mmia Blue mil m Anh to all M4 Calibration O Audio Monitoring Delay r 1 Ba Color Saturation 6 Use the slider to adjust the color saturation until you obtain a pleasing presentation of the video elements on the monitor wall display driven by
148. Pst Output 1 112 Pgm Pst Output 2 113 Pgm Pst Output 3 114 Pgm Pst Output 4 115 Unused 116 Unused 117 DVE 2 Output 1 118 DVE 2 Output 2 119 DVE 2 Output 3 120 DVE 2 Output 4 121 Store 1 329 Tally Interface Devices Source IDs Kahuna 122 Store 2 123 Store 3 124 Store 4 125 Store 5 126 Store 6 127 Store 7 128 Store 8 12 In the Layouts tab create layouts and assign logical sources created in step 11 to monitors that can display text e g UMD and alarms e g UMD video text alarm Tools System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions r Preeti SOURCE LABEL m fall Monitors 4x3 a Monitors 16x9 et Audiometers a Clocks GlobalAlarm_Channel0 13 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 14 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Export to export the database to your multi viewer 15 On the multi viewer load the layout containing the monitors assigned to dynamic text and tallies coming from the Kahuna switcher You should see source names and tallies from the Kahuna switcher on the monitor wall Kayak Production Switcher A multi viewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from Thomson Grass Valley production switchers that support the ACOS protocol including the KayakDD Kayak HD SD DD35 and XtenDD HD SD series The procedures below describe how to set up a multi viewer to inte
149. Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections System AE hoy sten gt 2 Kaleido X 7RU NewPhysicalRouter Equipment Router Controller Network Compact Router Controller Pro Bel SyV P 02 Sony serial tally Kahuna 2 When prompted type a name and then click OK Enter device identitier Lox 3 Click the Interconnects tab draw a line between the multi viewer and the new router controller and then click the line 293 Routers amp Kaleido X 294 Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections Rh hie k te Hy External router HewPhysicalRouter KALEIDO Kaleido 7RU IRC Network Compact Compactctri Click the line to configure the connection properties 4 Inthe Properties tab click the RS 422 Com Port box and then choose a multi viewer output from the list Se Compactltrl Kaleido 7 RL kd Connection s ee Com Fort _ Disconnected ES H Note Simple router controllers can also communicate with Kaleido X via TCP IP This type of connection is enabled automatically and allows such controllers to issue commands to the multi viewer s internal router module 5 Inthe Interconnects tab click the router c
150. SPol Horizontal active 1 920 5 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Changing Room Display Resolutions To change the resolution for a display in a room 1 Click the display you wish to configure 2 Click the Resolution box in the Properties pane The resolution presets appears 160 Configuring Displays Properties Tips Rooms Rooms Rooms E ul Assignment wupu Head Md Size amp Position _ ee VESA 1260x1024 es Aspect ratio VESA 800x600 50Hz 4 Diagonal size YESA 500x600 60Hz Height YESA 1024x768 S0Hz icit WESA 1024x768 60Hz Rotation YESA 1280x1024 50Hz Position WESA 1280x1024 zen YESA 1600x1200 SOHz YESA 1600x1200 60Hz Resolution presets 3 Select the appropriate resolution from the list 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Configuring the HD SDI Monitoring Output Format The HD SDI output format on a given head depends on the resolution configured for the corresponding multi viewer output see Changing Room Display Resolutions on page 160 and in the case of a 1080 line resolution on the selected scan format interlaced progressive for this output head In addition EDID auto detection must be disabled see Enabling EDID Auto Detection in XEdit on page 153 The following multi viewer output resolutions are supported 1920 x 1080 for an HD SDI output in t
151. Save button in the application toolbar 242 Detailed Directions 9 Export the database to the Kaleido X Creating a background action from the System list 1 Under the System tab or any other tab that shows a filtered System list displaying alarms right click ona specific alarm File Edt Configure Views Toole Help System channels o Fevideo D1 video Alarms Set action gt On Change ae A video Freeze On Disabled On Normal On Minor arning On Major On Criticalerror 2 From the Set action menu select a trigger condition on Change on Disabled on Normal OK on Critical Error Note The trigger conditions on Minor Warning and on Major are supported for Gateway alarms only The Action Editor window appears 3 From the Action list pane click and drag one of the available action items to the middle column 243 10 Creating Actions 244 4 5 6 l C 1 2 ag Action Editor On Major Action list On Major Load a new layout Reset atimer Load a new layout Fause a timer Start a timer Load a new layout Monitor audio Switch router crosspoint Set GP output Show full screen layout Hide tull screen layout Assign channel Custom Select the room in which the layout vill be loaded Edit the action item s properties in the Properties pane Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed Click OK to close the window
152. TORING button for a room 1 Inthe main window click the RCP users tab and then select the room for which you wish to configure the RCP2 s AUDIO MONITORING button from the rooms hierarchical list 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Audio monitoring output box and then select the output used to monitor audio signals from the list of available outputs Tins RCP Usera Room Preset 1 Layout Preset 2 Layout Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout4 Preset 5 Layouts Preset 6 Inputs Preset 7 Input Preset 6 Mone Preset 9 Mone Preset 10 None Audio monitoring outp Mone o ss Use large mouse pointer Mone timer OUTPUT AvHead 1 Audio Out OUTPUT Avdead 2 8udio Out Audio monitoring output Physical audio output selected for this OUTPUT Bidead 1 4udio Gut OUTPUT Bidead 2 4udio Gut Setting Room Preferences Enabling the Large Mouse Pointer for a Room To display a larger pointer on the monitor wall for a room 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the room where you wish to use a large pointer on the monitor wall 2 Inthe Properties pane select the Use large mouse pointer check box Tips Pro erties RCF users Room Preset 1 Layout Preset 2 Layout Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout Preset 5 Layouts Preset 6 Inputs Preset 7 Inpute Preset 6 Mone Preset 9 Mone Preset 10 None Audio monitoring output OUTPUT Avdead 1 A amp udio Out Use large
153. Valley GWG 7000 Native Protocol Utah Scientific RCP 3 protocol For supported drivers only 8 Click in a row in the physical level column A menu appears listing all of the available outputs associated with that physical level 288 Configuring an External Router Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping Size 4 Clear mapping Import labels _ 4uto update labels Label 0 Video i 2 3 NewPhysicalRouter Output 1 1 M NewPhysicalRouter Video Output 2 2 NewPhysicalRouter Video Output 3 3 NewPhysicalRouter Video Output 4 4 New PhysicalRouter video Output 5 5 For supported drivers only mies NewPhysicalRouter Video Output 6 6 N dsion N G000 Protel NewPhysicalRouter Video Output 7 7 Y Pro Bel General Remote Control Protocol Si P 08 Thomson Grass Valley G G 7000 Native Protocol Utah Scientific RCP 3 protocol 9 Choose a physical output for each logical destination 10 Click Auto map to automatically enter physical outputs in sequential order starting from the first one in the list Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping i Auto map G Clear mapping Import labels Auto update labels 0 video NewPhysicalRouter Video Output 1 1 NewPhysicalRouter Yideo Output 7 7 Video Output 8 8 Video Output 9 9 Main Out Preview 2 3
154. Version KXI 16 Card Model H YT 16 Card Patch Numh haor Need KAI 16 Sirap value 8 U KXI 16 Temperature Control C KXI 16 Temperature DC DC converter C KXI 16 Temperature FX SX 1 C KXI 16 Temperature FX SX 2 C 43 0 KXI 16 Temperature Sensor 1 C KXI 16 Temperature Sensor 2 C KXI 16 Temperature Serdes 1 C KXI 16 Temperature Serdes 2 C KXI 16 Voltage Supply 1 2 KXI 16 Voltage Supply 1 8 KXI 16 Voltage Supply 2 5 KXI 16 Voltage Supply 3 3 720p 59 94Hz EAV SAV OK Video 02 770p 59 94H7 EAV SAV OK Video 12 NTSC M EAV SAV OK Sm nenea 10801 50Hz 25Hz PSF EAV SAV OK TSC M EAV SAV OK o INPUT B KXI 16HSV s n 079401 19797003 Firmware OxSF Safemode Ox6F Inputs 9 9 VVOVVIIIIIVIOES w OUTPUT A KXO DUAL s n 079201 18372006 EAR Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 4 4 Note See Hardware and Software Options on page 347 for more information on the options available for the different multi viewer models 18 Verifying your System Configuration 6 If your system supports a GPI interface you can check the main system statuses of the Kaleido X multi viewer to make sure that there are no errors or alerts related to system temperature power supply status fan operation card fault conditions GPI GENLOCK KXA GPT GEN s n 079899 17912009 Firmware 0x35 Safemode 0x36 KXA GPI G
155. XEdit will not let you use a name if there is already a room with this name associated with one of the multi viewers within the cluster All multi viewers associated with the cluster system must be available If one of the member multi viewers becomes unavailable while you were configuring a room for the cluster system then XEdit will not let you save the room If you wish to save the room anyway first remove any unavailable system from the cluster 82 Creating Layouts for a Cluster System Creating Layouts for a Cluster System It is possible to create a partial layout for a cluster system in offline mode and then export it to the appropriate multi viewer for further online configuration When configuring a layout for a room that is associated with a cluster system you only work on one part at a time the part that is associated with the current multi viewer s output heads See Creating Layouts on page 171 for detailed instructions Note Each layout must have a unique name across the cluster system XEdit will not let you export a layout to a cluster system if there is already a layout with this name associated with one of the multi viewers within the cluster As a workaround you could make a copy of one of the conflicting layouts under a different name and then delete the original before proceeding with the export see Copying layouts on page 181 Replicating RCP Users Across a Cluster System Currently RCP
156. ZIP file Backing Up Resolutions To back up resolutions from the current system 1 On the Configure menu point to Database then to Create backup and click Resolutions The Create Backup window appears 2 InCreate Backup select the location where you wish to save a backup copy of the resolutions from the current database and then click Save The resolutions are saved as an XEdit collection file with a xco1 extension Backing Up Audio Scales To back up audio scales from the current system 1 On the Configure menu point to Database then to Create backup and click Audio scales The Create Backup window appears 2 In Create Backup select the location where you wish to save a backup copy of the audio scales from the current database and then click Save The audio scales are saved as an XEdit collection file with a xcoi extension Retrieving a Backup Retrieving a Database from a Backup Note When XEdit retrieves a database backup it replaces the content of the local workspace with data from the backup This cannot be undone Always create a backup of the current data before retrieving data from a different source See Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently on page 90 for an overview of the recommended workflow To retrieve a backup database 1 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Retrieve backup 15 az Managing Kaleido X Systems File Edt Configure View Toole Help Connect
157. __ a e Data bits a Parity ODD Parity opp Stop bits EE Stop bits 1 11 In the Channels Sources tab create logical sources using text and alarms levels coming from the Sony serial tally device 322 Kahuna Production Switcher System Channels Rooms RCP users Actions Channel Video Audio Text uf H T k T Video OF E ATE vided inputB videos mhedded audi Mouii viden mhedded audi fnagib wdeo td bedded audi fnavtbwdeods Tin Tin Tin Tin Tint Tin Tin Tin Tin Tin ngut BAchannel OF nput BaChannel 08 ngut BAchannel 09 nput BAchannel 10 nput BaChannel 11 ngut BAchannel 12 ngut BAchannel 13 nput BaChannel 14 nput BiChannel 15 nput BAchannel 16 we system F Kaleido x 4RU Y Production Switcher Video 12 mbhedded audi dsegifeywoeot2 E E E E Tally GP1 green E Video13 Embedded audi inout video 13 E E E E E fe Tally CSPI red A Tally GP2 green fill Tally GP2 red ro Tally GPS green m Tally GP3 red A Tally GP4 green Se Tally GP4 red mhedded audi ouii weed tet mbedded audi mbedlec audi Video 01 mbhedded audi Ooo S fnguteeyidied 15 inpatient l 1 Inputlabel 1 6P1 Green GPi Red 2 Input label 2 GP1 Green 2 GP1 Red Aiii E pal ca y a a a T mm hannelt hannel2 ate 1 1 12 In the Layouts tab creat
158. a 214 DVI KEYING MOUE sa pesiercosnacasin gns 101 SYStEM otesicrateatoneaueceacumesenie 85 361 dynamic range s es 111 OE E ETET E EET E E 214 GELINES sarisicceri neire awa 117 Control panel metadata holding time 113 Kaleido RCP2 o on 345 router field selection switching 115 Countdown timers 0 00e eee 207 211 router output signal reclocking 116 Cropping cceeceeceeeeeeeee ene 42 192 SUDHUNG sssusa neatins 112 Crosspoints ceeceeceeceeeeeeeees 50 51 COND AUON suite terdeet anata ncaaa acs anand 66 I seisin ins nee vec A 65 D Va r EAA 65 Dashboard cc cece eee e cece cence eee ees 36 CASE 2teeniadicesanascetoshanttedcrstens 14 65 disabling ccc cece eee e eee e eens 166 E EE A E eee aoa 122 Datobi E arreire reis eT 64 CHANNGIS cvs ceseseusamieeGandes 65 135 136 141 EE T Access aire ETA A aes 74 assigning to monitors 48 182 Ocat sucacanenpenteamacieonnanesdrees 77 392 recommended workflow 008 90 retrieving backup e cece ee eees 15 Debouncing cece cece ee eee ee eens 119 128 Default layouts ccc cee cee cence eee e ees 22 Detail enhancement 0cceceeeeees 111 Diagonal size cece cece cece eee eee 163 DIGINGINY cccktacmaenceaaa tad wartateaan ais 107 123 Digital content advisory descriptor 218 Display libraries ccceececces
159. a Connection and then click Properties If the system prompts you for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation The Local Area Connection Properties window opens On the Networking tab under This connection uses the following items click Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and then click Properties The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens On the General tab click Use the following IP address Type an IP address in the same range as the default IP address of the multi viewer For example if the IP address of the multi viewer is 10 0 3 707 then the IP address of your client PC could be 10 0 3 123 If you are unsure contact your network administrator Type a subnet mask in the same range as that of the multi viewer Click OK In Local Area Connection Properties click OK Configuring the Kaleido RCP2 The Kaleido RCP2 is a multi function remote control panel designed for use with Miranda s Kaleido X Ethernet connectivity allows multiple RCP2 users to access multiple Kaleido X systems allowing convenient access to the real time operating features of the Kaleido X When logged on to a Kaleido X via its Ethernet connection the RCP2 user can control various operating features of the Kaleido X 365 16 Administration and Servicing P h peee E fj SS S gt 1 l 2 3 4 l 5 6 7
160. able of displaying an alarm status e g video monitors UMDs alarm monitors can be configured with a latching mechanism An alarm latch will keep the error state visible until someone acknowledges the associated alarm Video monitors can provide alarm status information through their borders color and blinking behavior and show the latched state as small indicators in each corner of the video window UMDs text and tallies and alarm monitors can change their text or background color and blinking behavior to reflect the alarm status and show the latched state through their borders 33 Operation of the Monitor Wall me Red border indicates current alarm state Red corners indicate latched state See Configuring a Video Monitor s Alarm Reporting Behavior on page 196 Configuring a UMD s Alarm Reporting Behavior on page 214 and Configuring Alarm Monitors on page 216 for details on configuring the alarm reporting and latching attributes for these layout elements The Kaleido X system tracks the latched state of all alarm levels in a logical source at all times even when alarms are not being monitored on the wall or via SNMP traps or background actions It could thus happen that some layout elements will show a latched Status indicator after a layout is loaded even if the current state of the corresponding alarm is normal and the alarm was not monitored in the previous layout the alarm occurred on the feed
161. ackground actions ccce cece ee eees 241 Closed captioning 45 112 113 198 Background images Closed captions c cece cece eee ee seen eee 122 COCK LOJO eines S 223 UWE acer ventive Errar Cr S 13 65 79 custom Safe area 1 kee eee eee eee ee eee 189 OOMS cas nes dusks deayaedeuunsdawaa ees 151 DVD eeoa 184 Colorsaturation 0 cece cece eee 99 DOIMMAVOUNS sacs coanianneanmnciacnmeatianaieas 182 Composites Backup R EEE E E 225 iudi SAES uana eS 75 FESIZING EE E EESE 229 C EISE TE EAT 74 Configuring resolutions 1c cpencamanaGasonaeasamnsees 15 alarm thresholds 0eeeeee 125 FOUMCVING poipoia ia 75 aspectratio ooeec 194 Audio Bridge Terminal 368 C audio scales n n 201 203 Calibrating a EE AE 363 De eee 106 107 IPaddress o n 358 audio metadata cc cece eee eee 109 IP settings ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeees 358 audio monitoring delay 06 102 Kaleido X o oo 85 358 361 automatic aspectratio cea 110 networking n u 363 Drightness s cee ee cece eens ee eens 96 RCP RIOTEC E E T 365 closed captioning 112 router output signal reclocking 116 color saturation cece cece cee ee 99 TOUTES ooo occ cc ccc cece cee eee cece 265 CONUAT oconcneenscmemumeaen menses dae cues 96 serial devices oo occ ccc ccccccccccccccee 311 detail enhancement 0 00e 111 static UMD text oo
162. aleido RCP2 if available e Inthe case of a KMV 3901 3911 you can only connect a keyboard to the Kaleido RCP2 if available If two displays are connected to the multi viewer then the resolution is applied to both Note If the keyboard is connected to a Kaleido RCP2 the Keyboard attribute for the current RCP user must have been set to US in XEdit otherwise the shortcut may not work i e it could be parsed and converted to a special character depending on the selected locale In the case of a Kaleido X the shortcut will reset the resolution on the active display the one where the mouse pointer is located and on the other display connected to the same output card if any Enabling EDID Auto Detection from the Monitor Wall To enable EDID auto detect for a display 1 Right click the monitor wall background and then click Display Resolution on the shortcut menu Refresh Load layout Unlatch Acknowledge all Hide dashboard Hide all dashboards System configuration Display resolution 2 Select the Use detected monitor resolution check box Display Resolution Use detected monitor resolution V Detected monitor resolution 1920x1200 60Hz Based on EDID Default DVI resolution VESA 1280x1024 60Hz OK Cancel 3 Click OK Note The monitor EDID auto detect feature is enabled by default in order to facilitate the initial setup of a Kaleido X system To avoid problems Miranda recommends t
163. ame of the peripheral device in the Enter device identifier box and click OK Click the Interconnects tab Click the multi viewer icon and hold the mouse button while dragging the pointer towards the peripheral device icon A line representing the connection between the multi viewer and the device appears Lsystem Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections Kalypso Production Switcher Kaleido x 4RU Connection between the multi viewer and the device example using Kalypso same for all devices 6 Click the connection line between the multi viewer and the device 7 Inthe Properties pane click the appropriate Output in the RS 422 Com Port list Properties Tips Production Switcher lt Kaleido x 4RU H ul Connection s RS 422 Com Port Disconnected B Disconnected Output A Output E RS 422 Com Port output assignment example using Kalypso same for all devices except External Router 8 Click the peripheral device icon in the Interconnects tab 9 Inthe Properties pane set the serial communications properties for the device 10 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Ross Video Production Switcher A multi viewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from a Ross Video production switcher Synergy 2 3 4 SD MD and Vision
164. ample the input might be directly connected to a source signal 2 Click the second menu and choose the appropriate output e g Output 1 1 Description alibrations Interconnects Router Se Router connections Router outputs Router Port INPUT _ MyRouter Video INPUT Video O02 Unconnected Inputs INPUT 4 video O03 Uncannected Output 1 1 INFUT 4 video 04 Unconnected Output 2 2 INPUT Video 05 Unconnected Output 3 3 INPUT A Video 06 Unconnected Output 4 4 INPUT A Wideo OF Unconnected In this example the Kaleido X Software registers that Output 1 from the router has a cable that connects to the BNC connector corresponding to Video 1 on the multi viewer s INPUT A module This means that when you select a router source to be assigned to a monitor on the monitor wall the Kaleido X software will be able to determine whether the multi viewer s INPUT A Video 01 connector is available and if so request the appropriate crosspoint change for Output 1 of MyRouter 305 Routers amp Kaleido X 306 3 Use the incremental copy tool to assign the next router outputs to contiguous multi viewer inputs Deecriptian Calibrations Intercannects Router eaii Router connection Router outputs Fort INPUT video 01e MyFouter video Output 1 1 INPUT A video 02 Unconnected INPUT A Video 03e U
165. an alarm from the System tree onto the newly created action This defines the alarm as the trigger for the action Alternatively you can right click on the action and select the alarm source from a pop up menu 241 10 Creating Actions Video Alarms r gt video Black H Video Freeze bai Video Luma Too F Note You do not have to perform this step for actions triggered by Gateway commands because the Gateway alarm itself acts as the trigger 5 From the Action List pane under the Tool tab click and drag one of the available action items and drop it in one of the six columns at the bottom of the Actions pane r Video Freeze Fob ob pe Video Luma Too On MinorVarning On Major _ On Critical Error Switch router crossp Pause a timer Start a timer Load a new layout Monitor audio Set GPI output Show full screen layout Hide full screen layout Assign channel Custom Drag an Action Item into the column that Define Action describes the alarm state or transition properties here that should trigger the action 6 Configure the action s properties in the Properties pane 7 Repeat step 5 and step 6 as necessary Note If you assign multiple action items to a trigger you can change the order of execution by dragging items to higher or lower positions in the list When the background action is triggered its associated action items are executed in order from top to bottom 8 Click the
166. an be retrieved from a backup repository to your local workspace later See Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently on page 90 for a description of the recommended workflow e Itis not recommended to have two or more users simultaneously connected online to the same multi viewer for editing Disconnecting from a Multi Viewer To disconnect from a multi viewer e On the Configure menu click Disconnect XEdit displays the OFFLINE status on the status bar OFFLIHE OOOO Importing a Database To import a database 1 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Import KEdit C _DBXE File Edt Configure View Toole Help Connect Disconnect Databaze Tools A Export Use Admin p4y Import Configure Audio Bridge Terminal Create backup d Retrieve backup aleido x FRU Merge backup ace 4RU C Do not prompt for the database path Kaleido FRU x 2 vith expansion estore TSI A window appears prompting you for the IP address of the multi viewer whose database you wish to import 71 Managing Kaleido X Systems 72 5 Click OK 10 09 94 0 0 9 94 10 0 8 400 O 0 3 70 10 0 9 112 50 9 112 IP addresses for all the multi viewers that are on the same subnet as your PC are included in the list lfyour PC and the multi viewer are on the same subnet then you can select the IP address of the multi viewer from the lis
167. and Options page and enter the key Notes e One CC XDS Option key is needed per input card and the extraction of CC 608 CC 708 XDS and Subtitling WST metadata are all activated as a single option e After enabling the 3D Support option in XAdmin refresh the current layout or load another one for the change to be reflected on the monitor wall Configuring Power Supply Redundancy on a Kaleido X16 Power supply redundancy is an option on the Kaleido X16 which can ship with a single PSU In order to avoid having the system dashboard display unnecessary alarms there is a check box in XAdmin to indicate the presence of the second PSU By default this option is selected both PSUs are monitored Removing the check mark will stop the monitoring of alarms for PSU B its status is set to disabled and therefore will not appear on the dashboard PSU A removed from Slot A Slot A Slot B Location of Slot A and Slot B in the front of the Kaleido X 16 frame To configure the PSU B Installed option in XAdmin 1 Open a Web browser window and type the IP address of the Kaleido X16 frame in the address bar 373 16 Administration and Servicing The Kaleido X home page appears 3 3 Kaleido X version 4 00 build 3801 XEdit version 4 00 Build 3801 Download the Java Runtime Environment installer required to use XEdit 2 Click XAdmin The XAdmin Status and Options page appears System configuration Kaleido X 16 D s n 0
168. and port number appear in the data boxes and the Edit button is available 2 Type new or revised data in the data boxes Abc alles m Port 161 3 Click Edit Aao The revised data appears in the target list To remove a trap target from the list 1 Click the trap target you wish to remove in the list It becomes highlighted and its host address and port number appear in the data boxes 2 Click Delete The trap target is removed from the list Note The host address and port number remain in the data boxes Hence the trap can easily be added back to the list by clicking Add if it was removed in error Enabling SNMP Traps The multi viewer analyses the signals that pass through it and can detect and flag problems by raising alarms Each alarm can be individually configured Most alarm definitions specify detection thresholds and detection windows in order to exclude transient events Note See Configuring Video Audio Alarm Threshold on page 125 and Configuring Alarm Debouncing on page 128 for more details on alarms and their configuration As part of the alarm calibration process you can specify that the alarm when triggered be sent as an SNMP trap 133 6 Configuring Alarms To choose the traps that will be sent to the selected trap targets for this system 1 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical
169. annels Room Layouts RCP users Actions DescriptionCalibr ations Interconnects Router Contiqurations Router Connections System ma Y a Y Kaleido X FRU P 4D GFGENLOCK KXA GPLGEN H OPTION A i OPTION B I INPUT A KXI 16 D INPUT E Kx1 16 M INPUT KxI 16 D INPUT D KXI 16 M INPUT E KXI 16 M INPUT F KXI 16 D OUTPUT 4 KXO DUAL I OUTPUT E KXO DUAL I OUTPUT KXO DUAL D OUTPUT C KXO DUAL OE ae 3 Expand the appropriate output module The expanded module will show the output heads Depending on the multi viewer model other items may also appear P M INPUT E KX1 16 P AOD INPUT F KXI 16 Y OUTPUT A KXO DUAL Head 1 Roomt Head 2 Room output heads 1 and 2 E LTC 1 Loss fi LTC 2 Loss see LTC 3 Loss amp AD OUTPUT E KXO DUAL P M OUTPUT KxXO DUAL P OUTPUT D KxO BUAL 4 Select the head you wish to calibrate 5 Click the Properties tab The brightness and contrast adjustment controls appear Expand the headings to show the controls if they are not visible 97 Calibrating the Kaleido X System AS Red iP 3 Green master ee aa Blue l y kdl Contrast gain offsets T Kaleido x FRU ar p a ic Green master Ir i eeN Later feel to all ac Blue I ef OPTION B eae ADT atlan P AMD PUT A KXI 16 i Audio Monitoring Delay _ ms Z 4d A gt DD INPUT E KXI 16 TEENE alor Saturation i 50 a P M INPUT Kx1
170. appears in the main window 3 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The Save Room window appears Managing Rooms Save Room Savelm Rooms Ha fea jE 1 Preview File Mame Files of Type ll Files B Seve Cancel 4 Type a name for the new room and then click Save Notes e Aroom name cannot exceed 7 characters e Ina cluster system each room must have a unique name across the whole system XEdit will not let you use a name if there is already a room with this name associated with one of the multi viewers within the cluster e Ina cluster system if one of the member multi viewers becomes unavailable while you were configuring a room then XEdit will not let you save the room If you wish to save the room anyway first remove any unavailable multi viewer from the cluster Opening a Room To open an existing room 1 Click the Rooms tab in the main window 2 On the File menu click Open The Open Room window appears 147 a Setting Up Rooms 148 B Room O Room Cj Rooma 4 Room File Mame 3 Select the room you wish to open and then click Open The selected room appears in the Rooms tab Preview Files of Type All Files Note In the case of a cluster system it is possible to view a room configuration in offline mode but any changes must be made in online mode Clos
171. ard s identifier for example OUTPUT A master Viewing Kaleido X Version Information To view your multi viewer s system and software version information 1 From a workstation on the same subnet open a Web browser window and type the multi viewer s IP address in the address bar 387 16 Administration and Servicing The Kaleido X home page appears showing the system s and XEdit s software version information at the bottom ROUTER CONTROL Kaleido X version 5 00 build 35 Edit version 5 00 build 14 Download the Java Runtime Environment installer required to use XEdit 2 Inthe Kaleido X home page click the XAdmin button The XAdmin Status and Options page appears As shown in the examples below The Kaleido X Software version appears on the Web browser s title bar or tab label The firmware and safe mode package numbers appear both in the relevant heading row and within the detailed status information 1 The multi viewer must have Kaleido X software version 2 10 or later 388 Detailed Directions gt XAdmin 5 00 build 40 Windows Internet Explorer Kaleido X Software 6 E htip 10 5 5 180 XAdmin com miranda xadmin x Admin Admi bed yp Xx BI G version number on We Favorites xadmin 5 00 build 40 browser title bar or tab label Miran dja gt x rm AA System configuration Frame A Status and options G GPI GENLOCK KXA GPI GEN s n 079801
172. ase of a Kaleido X or Kaleido X16 multi viewer model the system s time zone is configured in XAdmin In the case of a KMV 3901 3911 time is always based on UTC On a Windows PC or laptop the time zone is configured in the Date and Time control panel 10 Click Save to save your new timer and close the Timer Editor window 11 Under the Channels Sources tab create a new logical source to associate with the timer and name it System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Properties Tips JAA Name Timerthanneli Video Audio Text Alarm Time code Channels Sources Source ID videol audiol texti alarm timecode F12 F12 Emb1 inowtFvideot F12 Wid TC Input F Channel 13 23 FAS F13 Emb1 inputFvideots F13 Yid TC Anput FiChannel14 94 F14 F14 Emb1 imputFvideotd F14 Wid TC _Anput FiChannel15 95 Fis F15 Embi mputFvideot5 F15 Vid TC Anput FiChannel 16 26 F168 FIB Emb1 inputFvideot F16 vid TC 12 Click a cell in the time code level of the new logical source and drag the timer you wish to assign to this logical source from the filtered System list that appears in the Tools pane to the selected cell in the sources table Tools System _Channelsources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions system Video Audio Text Alarm Time code Channels Sources Te So
173. ately and you can click Show dashboard directly Refresh Load layout Uniatch Acknowledge all Show dashboard Hide all dashboards After a brief delay the dashboard appears at the bottom right corner of the monitor and the command Hide dashboard replaces Show dashboard on the menu Layout OUTPUT A Head 1 Room O 0 9 39 Room4 10 0 9 49 Version 4 00 build i80 Dashboard on the monitor wall Hiding the Dashboard To hide the dashboard Click the x button at the bottom right corner of the dashboard Alternatively right click anywhere on the monitor wall point to Monitor Wall on the shortcut menu if you clicked a layout element and then click Hide dashboard to hide the dashboard on the current display 37 Operation of the Monitor Wall Refresh Load layout Uniatch Acknowledge all Hide dashboard ee _ Hide dashboard Hide all dashboards Note Clicking the x button closes the dashboards on every display monitor in the room if they were displayed automatically To hide all the dashboards e Right click anywhere on the monitor wall point to Monitor Wall on the shortcut menu if you clicked a layout element and then click Hide all dashboards to hide the dashboard on every display in the room we Assign source to monitor w u d p ee Send to KX Router output ASPect ratio mm Overscan L 53 T 53 R S3 B 55s ml E Refresh Load layout Text CC
174. ative Port Notes 4000 TCP 12345 TCP 356 Key Concepts Driver Port Notes NVISION Ethernet protocol 9193 TCP Enterprise router VikinX Modular 4381 TCP Quintech 9100 TCP Sony HKSPC 12345 TCP GVGNP Emulator Utah RCP 3 5001 TCP SC 4 Ethernet Snell Pro Bel SW P 02 2000 TCP Snell Pro Bel SW P 08 14000 TCP Note This is configurable in XEdit you can choose any UDP or TCP IP port to use for communications between the multi viewer and an external router From Multi Viewer to from SNMP Devices Service Port SNMP 161 162 Transport Notes UDP Simple Network Management Protocol used for communications between multi viewer and peripheral devices e g sending get get next and set commands to an SNMP agent and receiving the response UDP Simple Network Management Protocol used for receiving traps alerts from peripheral devices From Multi Viewer to from NTP Server The following ports used for communications to from Network Time Protocol servers are open by default on all Kaleido X systems Service Port Transport Notes NTP 123 TCP Used for Network Time Protocol synchronization Port needs to be open in both directions 357 16 Administration and Servicing Detailed Directions Assigning an IP Address to Each Device in Your System Multi viewers and most peripheral devices that are part of a Kaleido X system communicate through a TCP IP network Configuri
175. ayout If your system was configured prior to shipment then the designated layout will show up on all displays Otherwise a gray screen will appear with the following message in the middle No layout has been assigned to this room Please load a layout Mo layout has been assigned to this room Please load a layout To load a layout on the monitor wall 1 Connect a mouse to the Kaleido RCP2 if available and log on to the multi viewer from the RCP2 if you have not already done so see Logging on to the Kaleido RCP2 on page 368 Alternatively connect the mouse directly to one of the USB ports on the multi viewer 2 Right click anywhere on the monitor wall point to Monitor Wall if you clicked a layout element and then click Load layout on the shortcut menu Loading a Layout Refresh Load layout Unlatch Acknowledge all Hide dashboard Hide all dashboards System configuration Display resolution Monitor wall shortcut menu A layout browser appears on the displays associated with the current room Note By default each room is associated with one multi viewer output or output card Most predefined layouts are configured to show all video streams for a given input card in the case of the Kaleido X multi viewer models or all video streams connected to the multi viewer s inputs in the case of a Kaleido X16 or Kaleido Modular multi viewer model 3 Choose a default layout from
176. ayouts Trop users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Configurations Router Connections General information Router name NewPhysicalRouter Datatek Routers J Routers Y Physical Routers YG Kaleido X 7RU Internal Router if teed OPTION A Video 120x48 L OPTION B Video 120x48 ba B HewPhysicalRouter Y Logical Routers Router protocol mulator YG 7000 Native Protocol Connection type 0 Video RS 1801 1 KX Router 96x80 EE E ERR Harris Leitch XY Passthrough Protocol i 0 0 Video pet O Router antronix Lightwave Matrix Hub VISION Ethernet protocol Compact router VISION Ethernet protocol Enterprise router Logical Port name Bits per second Data bits 8 B Flow control None B Use protocol defaults Once you have chosen a protocol you can click Help to view tips on its use Note The connection type and multi viewer output specified earlier in the Properties tab appear here automatically These values can be changed if necessary Any changes will also appear under the Properties tab In the case of a serial connection you can specify serial communication parameters the bit rate bps the number of data bits parity stop bits and flow control 282 Configuring an External Router Description Calibrations interconnects Router C
177. bedded time code signal from a video source an LTC input if available or the internal clock time default kd General Timer name Timer mode Timer end Repeat Preset Start Time IMPORTANT Timer down loop 1 Duration 00 00 00 Holc Time Code Reference Y System Kaleido x FRU gt DD INPUT A KXI 16 gt DD INPUT B KXI 16 gt ADD INPUT KXI 16 gt OD INPUT D KXI 16 DD INPUT E KXI 16 DD INPUT F KXI 16 4 OUTPUT A KxXO DUA i ers Tod me LT 2 i wees LT a gt OUTPUT B KXO DUA gt I OUTPUT KXO DUA gt I OUTPUT D KXO DUA Before setting a timer s start time in XEdit review the following e Ifthe selected time code reference includes time zone information then make sure that the PC or laptop that has XEdit is configured for the same time zone 209 az Creating Layouts Ifthe selected time code reference does not include time zone information or you chose to bind the timer to the multi viewer s internal clock then the multi viewer s system time will apply Inthe case of a Kaleido X or Kaleido X16 multi viewer model make sure the time zone settings are the same on the multi viewer and on the PC or laptop that has XEdit Inthe case of a KMV 3901 3911 when you save or export the timer to the multi viewer XEdit automatically converts the start time you specified to UTC based on your computer s time zone settings Note In the c
178. ble it once the new display is up and running e Prior to Kaleido X v 3 00 EDID information was only reported for the master KXO Dual card In more recent versions every KX0 Dual KXO Dual3 card reports the EDID information for its associated displays Seealso Formore information on the DXF 100 interface refer to the DXF 100 DVI Fiber Optic Interface User s Manual part no M792 9500 101 Servicing Generating a System Snapshot To generate a system snapshot 1 From a workstation on the same subnet open a Web browser window and type the IP address of the multi viewer in the address bar 2 Inthe Kaleido X home page click the XAdmin button The XAdmin Status and Options page appears 1 The multi viewer must have Kaleido X software version 2 10 or later 383 16 Administration and Servicing 384 System configuration Kaleido X 4RU Frame i Status and options GPI GENLOCK KXA GPI GEN s n 079899 17912014 JEJE Technical support Firmware 0x35 Safemode 0x36 OPTION A Empty QAE OPTION B Empty 0 2 INPUT A KXI 16HSV3 s n 088901 41670001 JCE Firmware 0x2A Sa femode 0xF Inputs 9OVVVIVIVIOVIIBVIIOVIA INPUT B KXI 16HSV s n 079401 19988038 Olly Firmware 0xB8 Safemode 0x6F Inputs JOVVVIIIOVIOOIVIVIOOS OUTPUT A master KXO DUAL s n 079228 38790003 MAE Firmware 0x208E Safemode 0x5B OUTPUT B KXO DUAL s n 079201 18372016 Olly Firmware 0x208
179. cale On the other hand custom audio scales can be tweaked and saved repeatedly until the desired configuration is achieved Removing Audio Scales From the System To remove a custom audio scale from the system 1 On the Tools menu click Edit audio scales File Edt Configure View Tools Help Edit audio scales Edit resolutions Edit timers The Edit Audio Scale window appears 204 Configuring Audio Scales 2 In Edit Audio Scale select the custom scale you wish to remove from the list at the bottom of the window and then click Delete Edit Audio Scale Previews Middle color Lower limit Bottom color My Peak Meter H Note The default audio scales cannot be removed from the system Configuring Audio Metadata Note To decode Dolby E audio metadata the Dolby E option KXS DolbyE is required See Enabling Options on page 371 for more information To configure audio metadata 1 In XEdit under the Layouts tab select the audio monitor for which you wish to apply audio metadata settings then click the Properties tab Properties Tips Layouts Layout Muttihead layoutRoom_A MuttifheadLayout0 2 kd Assig Audio format Dolky E Audio level audio Channel address URI Channels Steren Dolby program 1 Friendly name audio meteri 2 Choose the source associated with this audio monitor from the Audio format list Auto PCM Dolby E or Dolby VANC 205 az Creating
180. calibrate an ABT audio source 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Inthe list expand the multi viewer whose inputs you wish to calibrate 3 Expand the appropriate input its ABT element and then one of the ABT s audio elements Select Zero VU Silence Lett Silence Right 4 Click the Properties tab 5 Set the reference levels to the appropriate values in dBFS and in dBu using the Zero VU sliders under Calibration Alternatively type the values directly in the Zero VU boxes Properties Tips Kaleido 4RU kd Calibration Zero YU fdBF 3S ero YU dBu Zero VU reference level selection 6 Click Apply to all to apply the chosen Zero VU reference values throughout the system Calibrating Dolby VANC Loudness Measurement To calibrate an audio source 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Inthe list expand the multi viewer whose inputs you wish to calibrate 107 Calibrating the Kaleido X 3 Expand the appropriate input and then click Loudness Dialnorm B Kaleido x 4RU F M GPVGENLOCK KX4 GPI GEN P OPTION A KXO 24Router gt TD OPTION B KXO 24Router Y INPUT KXI 16 FVideo D1 Wideo Alarms P
181. cally restart the next day at the same start time To restart it you must either reset the timer monitor on the monitor wall or set and specify a new start time 5 Choose what happens when the timer reaches the end of its countdown period from the Timer end list kd General Timer name Timer Timer mode Timer end Repeat Preset Start Time Time Code Reference Loop The timer restarts and repeats its cycle not available with the Remaining timer mode Stop The timer stops Overrun The timer counts through its specified end point and then continues when Overrun is specified the timer always counts up 6 Ifyou chose Loop as a timer end mode specify the number of times the loop should repeat 208 kd General Timer name Timer mode Timer end Preset Start Time Timer down loop 1 Duration 00 00 00 Halq Time Code Reference Internal clock 7 Specify a Preset duration kd General Timer name Timer mode Timer end Repeat Start Time Timer down loop 1 Duration00 00 00 ___ H Hold Time Code Reference Internal clock 8 Specify a Start time kd General Timer name Timer mode Timer end Repeat Preset Start Time Time Code Reference Timer down loop d Duration 00 00 00 Hale Eleso 620 PM Configuring Timers 9 Choose a synchronization source from the Time code reference list either an em
182. cator Card type Serial number INPUT A KXI 16HSV s n 079401 19797007 Jag Firmware Ox8F Safemode Ox6 F _ _ _ __ __ Version information Inputs GAII VOU G0 a Input signal status INPUT B KXI 16HSV s n 079401 19797009 ideo 14 inn 50Hz 25H21PSF 0 Firmware Ox8F Safemode Ox6F Input signal format Inputs 9 GO VVOVIVIIVIVIIGS wi OUTPUT A KXO DUAL s n 079201 18372006 C EA i Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 wi OUTPUT B master KXO DUAL s n 0792701 18900026 O Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 KXO DUAL Display 90 Deg Rotation Option Disable Key B1bc6c3e EDID DVI Out 1 EDID Presence E EDID DVI Out 1 2a uency 59 95017128620368 Cran Fy Meat d ariran tal A rtira 30O 4 Click the arrow button at the end of each heading row to view detailed information about the associated module ig OPTION B Empty O EA a INPUT A KXI 16HSV s n 079401 17914037 2 lt Expand details Firmware Ox8C Safemode Ox6F A Refresh Inputs O Vee VWG Reset card INPUT B Empty Olz W OUTPUT A master KXO DUAL s n 079201 19722004 i Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 Master card status indicator In the case of a Kaleido X multi viewer model you can identify which output card currently assumes the software master role and is thus assigned the multi viewer s IP address by looking for the word nN master next to the c
183. ce cece cnc ee en ceeceeenseeeeseeeeeeeneseeseenees 12 Kaleido X CIUStCr oo ccc cc cece cece eee e nee e ence eee n eee nee e see teenetneneteenees 13 KMV 390 1 3911 ASE gnc coun cas uadanee reinii ae aaae ie 14 Kaleido Modular The Kaleido Modular KMV 3911 which has replaced the earlier KMV 3901 model is an expandable 8 input dual output multi viewer 3Gbps HD SD on one Densit Series card Hosted in a Densit 3 frame the KMV 3911 is the most space and energy efficient multi viewer system with up to 20 multi viewer outputs per 3 RU frame or up to 288 multi viewer outputs when connected to an upstream router Kaleido Modular Overview of single card functionality OUTPUTS CONTROL ann RCP 200 advanced monitoring int tori erfacing routing control panel HRES Kaleido RCP2 control pane 2 multi viewer outputs RS 422 ji fa 8 window processors Pa tilitiiililiillly NVISION router contro panel Ethernet 8 x 8 switch Multi format reference input 8 x 3 Gbps HD SD video inputs GPI in GPI out XEdit layout editor with embedded audio INPUTS Kaleido Modular KMV 3901 3911 Features With its unmatched space and energy efficiency Kaleido Modular is ideal for production monitoring in trucks The multi viewer system integrates tightly with the highly space efficient NVISION 8288 Truck router 288 x 576 in 10 RU as well as Densit signal processing cards and third party production switchers Contr
184. cecceees 166 COSI a enue anseaennmnnnnctenwet 169 OPENING xicccadnasausnideetennadeeeiensdees 169 Displays adding to room eee e eee cee e eee 148 aspectratio eiin E EE EES 162 diagonal size ooe 163 fullscreen zone cc cece eee eee es 151 NEIGNE scccuuaaseuteaierssanansnmannees 164 POSION secctcet crite iiti tio n 165 0 0 00 a 152 resolution 085 31 154 157 160 VOAN orenean a N 165 WOM serurisnronene a 164 Dolby E metadata cece cece ees 123 Dolby VANC daN cacera 107 JOUGNCSS ina 107 DIN CG oranana EE 113 D al SySteM korcro andaa 12 DUI poeni aea a oe anoneuanas 184 DVEKOYINO crrdraopetiecreor etin n 101 VTS EE E ET ETET 122 Dynamic range 5 0 padaccdo dann dqusarwardwoeens 111 E EVID apenas abusdandancondantaedantaaaanacs 31 Expansion system ce eee eeees 12 64 306 Extended Data Services c cee eeeees 218 F Factory defaults cc cece cence ee eees 8 Floating actions cc cece eee cee eee eees 241 Frame OPUONS orreen EAAS 371 status information 06 346 386 version information 86 346 387 Full screen layouts assigning to RCP user 0e eens 258 CHCAUING dc audhednauteaarinaeandaesases 176 Full screen zones ccececcececencees 41 151 G Global alarms ccc cece cece eee e ees 121 GP EE aed E EE E 56 117 H HD closed captions cece cece cece es 122 PI
185. ching the UMD Note Resizing the video monitor is easier with the UMD s bounds visible first click the video monitor and then click the UMD while holding the Shift key 11 Adjust the size and position of the components some more if needed making sure to keep the peripheral monitors at the very edges of the composite s boundary box while minimizing empty space within the composite 12 Click outside the composite to lock it 228 Working with Composite Monitors Locked composite 13 Drag the composite s top or bottom center handle inwards until there is no more empty space above and below the video monitor Composite resized to remove remaining empty space around video monitor 14 To be able to reuse the new composite in other layouts drag it onto the appropriate widget library while holding the Ctrl key See Creating a Widget Library on page 234 for more information 15 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Resizing a Composite To resize a composite e Click the composite and drag any of its corner handles outwards or inwards The composite expands or shrinks while its individual elements maintain their relative position and aspect ratio 229 az Creating Layouts Larger and smaller copies of the original composite Individual monitors within a composite are resized according to the following rules Video monitors are scaled proportionally
186. ckground EE Fo c0 ean 4 Ifyou wish to assign a logical source drag the appropriate element from the Channels Sources list that appears in the Tools pane to the timer monitor Channels Sources Monitor wall destinations Channels ee eee eee imrit Sebel eS The selected logical source s name appears in the Source box and the Timer source box shows the value of the corresponding time code level 211 az Creating Layouts kd Assignments Monitor wall destination Mone Mame my Timer Source Input A Channel 01 Assigned logical source name Time code level timecode Tier Scuree INPUT avvideo 01 Timecode Time code level value from assigned logical source Note The first time code level applies by default If your systems logical sources include more than one time code level select the one you wish to apply from the Time code level list 5 Click the button beside Timer source kd Assignments Channel address URT Friendly name Source Time code level timecode timerd The Timer Editor window appears 6 Choose a timer see page 207 from the Timer List Timer Editor Timer name Timer Timer mode down Timer end stop Repeat Preset Duration 00 00 00 Start Time Hold Time Code Reference Internal clock Itis also possible to assign a timer to a timer monitor by dragging an existing logical source containing a timer assignment to the monitor Note Each timer monitor is as
187. clude displays of various shapes and sizes each with its specific characteristics The displays you add to your rooms in XEdit must be configured to match the attributes of their physical counterparts The Kaleido X Software includes a set of predefined resolutions that cover most standard displays Any custom resolutions you add to this set will be available throughout the system and can be reused when configuring any display in any room Note In the case of cluster systems custom resolutions must be replicated from one multi viewer to the others manually See Replicating Custom Resolutions Across a Cluster System on page 83 You can manually configure display resolutions in two ways either globally from the Tools menu or by clicking a specific display in a room In addition to monitor wall displays your system can include other monitors connected to the multi viewer s HD SDI outputs one for each output head available with the SDI monitoring output option The HD SDI output format on a given head depends on the resolution configured for the corresponding multi viewer output and in the case of a 1080 line resolution on the selected scan format interlaced progressive for this output head Viewing Room Display Properties To view the properties for one of the display in a room 1 Click the display whose properties you wish to view 2 Review the attributes and values that appear in the Properties pane Configuring Disp
188. composite monitors that can be resized elegantly To create a composite monitor 1 Open an existing layout or create a new one 2 Click the Composite button on the toolbar and then click the layout Resize the empty composite box approximately to a size that will be appropriate for the display where it is to appear Empty composite 3 Right click the empty box and then click Unlock on the shortcut menu Alternatively click the box and then press F2 Notice that the handles around the box boundary line become orange Unlocked empty composite 225 az Creating Layouts Note If you double click a composite monitor the handles also become orange However in such a case you cannot add move or resize individual components within the composite you can only edit each existing components properties 4 Adda monitor to the composite either using a button on the toolbar or dragging an element from a widget library For example click the Video monitor button E on the toolbar and then click inside the composite to add a video monitor Video monitor within unlocked composite Note Only primary monitors not composite can be part of a composite 5 Click the Audio monitor button 55 on the toolbar and then click inside the composite to add an audio level meter Audio level meter within unlocked composite 6 Click the UMD button on the toolbar and then click inside the composite to add a UM
189. contain representations of GPI genlock input output and internal router cards that are equivalent to their physical counterparts on the Kaleido X 4RU and Kaleido X 7RU models Likewise the KMV 3901 3911 multi viewers have virtual card slots with representations of GPI genlock input and output cards There are however some differences in the Kaleido X16 and KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer models are presented in XEdit compared to the other Kaleido X models e Cards in virtual slots are always present by default and cannot be removed in XEdit e There are no status icons next to a virtual card slot e g inserted or empty card slot icon 65 az Managing Kaleido X Systems Term Description In XAdmin the virtual slot card concept is represented as follows e ards in virtual slots have no name e There is no reset button associated with each card Instead there is a single multi viewer reset button that sends a reboot command to the multi viewer e Cards in virtual slots have no serial number Instead there is one serial number for the multi viewer e Cards in virtual slots do not have individual IP addresses There is only one IP address which is associated with the multi viewer Calibration Calibration refers to the configuration of different card attributes For example an output card s Brightness and Contrast attributes can be calibrated or an input card s Silence threshold attribute See Calibrating the Kalei
190. creen zones and are defined and configured by using the XEdit application See Logging on to the Monitor Wall Using the Kaleido RCP2 on page 35 Automatic Automatic resolution detection eases the initial setup of a new display monitor by resolution detection automatically determining the best resolution supported by the display This ensures that the multi viewer will be configured for the best video quality When a new display is connected the multi viewer will detect the EDID of the display on boot up and will set the correct resolution accordingly This means that displays can be hot swapped If an existing display is replaced by a new one the Kaleido X will automatically change the resolution without the need for a system restart See Setting a Display Monitor s Output Resolution on page 59 31 Operation of the Monitor Wall 32 Layout Dashboard Monitor A layout refers to a visual grouping of monitors on the monitor wall Layouts are specific to a room and created by using the XEdit application Full screen layouts also defined in XEdit are specific to a full screen zone within a particular room See Loading Layouts on page 38 and Displaying a Source in Full Screen Mode on page 41 The dashboard is a window that contains the system name IP address and software build version It also displays error messages The dashboard is displayed at the bottom right of each display on the monitor wall
191. ctions Properties Tips Equipment Description Calibrations interconnects Router configurations Router connections What to do in the System System tab Kaleido X 7RU A system represents a Kaleido X 4RU grouping of equipment Kaleido X 7RU x 2 with expansion ive LI In XEdit you work on Kaleido 16 D gt 29 Kaleido X 7RU one system ata time Kaleido K16 S Each system is stored Kaleido Modular KM 390173911 in a separate database TSL serial TSL network How to create External Router s TETA configure a system How to save the system Router Controller Pro Bel SyV P 08 Serial port test Router Controller Network Compact Router Controller Pro Bel SyV P 02 OFFLINE Notes e Once it has been downloaded from the multi viewer the XEdit application remains on your PC and can be launched from the shortcut icon that was created on your desktop in step 5 above e You may need to upgrade your Audio Bridge Terminal and Kaleido RCP2 devices if available to the latest firmware The update files can be found on the DVD that shipped with your multi viewer Please refer to the Kaleido RCP2 Guide to Installation and Operation and to the Audio Bridge Terminal Guide to Installation and Operation available on the DVD for instructions on how to determine the firmware level and how to perform the upgra
192. d sizes as well as zones that are used to display full screen layouts Within the XEdit workflow a display refers to the representation of a physical display monitor such as a CRT within a room whereas a monitor represents a physical signal within a layout for example a video monitor displaying a specific video signal a Setting Up Rooms Term Description Full screen zone A full screen zone is a sub section of a room It can be any size and it can be positioned on any of the displays in the room A full screen zone can be associated with one or more full screen layouts assigned to specific users Display library A display library contains a collection of predefined displays that can be conveniently reused to configure your system s rooms More than one display library can exist Detailed Directions 146 Managing Rooms In XEdit a room represents a grouping of displays on the monitor wall driven by your Kaleido X system When creating a room you add displays and assign each of them an output head You can also define full screen zones Note In the case of a cluster system it is possible to view a room configuration in offline mode However to create and configure a room XEdit must be connected to one of the cluster members see Using XEdit Online on page 69 Creating Rooms To create a room 1 Click the Rooms tab in the main window 2 On the File menu click New An empty room with a black background
193. de for these devices Installing the Java Runtime Environment XEdit is a Java Web Start application and thus requires the Java Runtime Environment to be installed on your system When you try to access XEdit from the Kaleido X home page the system will automatically detect the Java Runtime Environment J2SE version on your computer and if necessary will prompt you to install version 1 6 0 update 20 Alternatively you can download the J2SE installer from your multi viewer by clicking the link at the bottom of the Kaleido X home page 379 16 Administration and Servicing To install J2SE 1 Click anywhere in the prompt area on the page that appeared when Java Web Start detected that your system was missing the required J2SE version Click here and choose open to download and install JRE Alternatively click the link at the bottom of the Kaleido X home page Kaleido X version 5 30 build 4301 XEdit version 5 30 Build 4301 ownload the Java Runtime Environment installer required to use XEdit lt _ __ Click here Launch the Signal Path Viewer D 2 Ifa security warning appears click Run to start downloading the J2SE installer file 0 of jre 6u20 windows i586 exe from 10 5 5 130 X Getting File Information jre 6u20 windowsi586 exe f Name jre 6u20 windowsi586 exe Type Application 15 5MB From 10 5 5 130 File Download Security Warning Do you want to run or save this fi
194. detailed configuration instructions on the different monitor types refer to e Configuring Video Monitors on page 187 e Configuring Audio Monitors on page 199 e Configuring Timers on page 207 e Configuring UMDs on page 214 e Configuring Alarm Monitors on page 216 e Configuring Metadata Monitors on page 218 e Configuring V Chip Monitors on page 219 e Configuring Clocks on page 220 e Working with Composite Monitors on page 225 e Managing Widget Libraries on page 234 Spanning Graphical layout elements UMDs audio monitors etc and video monitors can be made to span across multiple heads on up to 4 displays portrait or landscape in any combination On displays that fit perfectly side by side this gives the impression of having one large screen When any layout element is spanned across displays an icon automatically appears in the top right corner Managing Layouts System channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions System Channets Rooms Layouts RCP users actions O O f Warning icon appears even if monitor Video monitor spanned over two displays is one pixel over the edge with warning icon in top right corner To avoid pixel cropping on spanned monitors you must position room displays so that there is no gap between them Use XEdit s Remove horizontal space and or Remove vertical space buttons to make sure your disp
195. do X on page 93 for details Peripheral devices A peripheral device is an external piece of equipment such as a router or production switcher that can be connected to the multi viewer Detailed Directions 66 Creating and maintaining a Kaleido X system involves a number of file management tasks including backup and restore operations The XEdit software is used to perform these tasks Some tasks are done online others in offline mode Most are available in both modes A local database is used as a workspace to save layouts and related configuration data temporarily while you are building your Kaleido X system in offline mode If you need to build more than one system you can keep working with the same database and use the backup tool to save the data for each system separately To further work on a specific system you would then use the retrieve backup tool See Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently on page 90 for an overview of the recommended workflow Opening the XEdit Software When using XEdit offline you work inside a workspace located on your client PC When you first open XEdit a window will prompt you for the location for this workspace It is recommended to consider this workspace as a sandbox into which you will always first import the database you wish to work on during the current session and from which you will export the database at the end of the session To open XEdit 1 Double click the XEdit icon on
196. dware release for the various elements that constitute your Kaleido X system e g XEdit XAdmin etc is associated with a version number see Viewing Kaleido X Version Information on page 387 Default IP Settings Multi viewers are shipped with the following default settings KMV 3901 3911 X16 4RU 7RU 7RU Expansion System IP address 192 168 3 31 10 0 3 70 10 0 3 70 10 0 3 70 10 0 3 70 Network mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0 Gateway 192 168 3 1 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 1 Output A 10 0 3 69 10 0 3 66 10 0 3 66 Output B 10 0 3 68 10 0 3 67 10 0 3 67 Output C 10 0 3 68 10 0 3 68 Output A frame B 10 0 3 61 Output B frame B 10 0 3 62 Note If the IP address of the multi viewer has been changed i e it no longer corresponds to the as shipped configuration it is still possible to determine the current setting To determine the IP address of your multi viewer see Finding a Multi Viewer s System IP Address and Application Version on page 362 Hardware and Software Options You can purchase various software and hardware options to expand your multi viewer s capabilities The following tables list options that can be enabled and disabled via the XAdmin Status and Options page see Enabling Options on page 371 Kaleido X 4RU 7RU and 7RU x 2 Module Option INPUT 3G Part No KXS 3Gbps Key Concepts Feature Notes 3Gbps f
197. e Connect the display directly to the DVI output of the multi viewer by using a copper cable This is not always practical since the display can be far or mounted on a wall Alternatively connect the DXF 100 transmitter to the DVI input connector on the display and then connect it to its power supply The LED will flash for a few seconds while the transmitter reads and stores the EDID information from the display When the LED stops flashing disconnect the transmitter from the display and reconnect it to the multi viewer The EDID information from the display will now be visible in XAdmin The EDID information from the display will now be visible to the multi viewer If the multi viewer is configured to adapt itself to the native resolution of the display the resolution for the output will change automatically Detailed Directions Notes e Miranda offers a more versatile bidirectional interface the DXF 200 DVI HDMI Optical Extension System which has superseded the DXF 100 interface For more information on the DXF 200 contact your Miranda sales representative As of Kaleido X version 4 10 the Monitor EDID Auto detect feature is enabled by default in order to facilitate the initial setup of a Kaleido X system To avoid problems Miranda recommends that you disable the auto detect feature once the initial setup is completed If you later wish to replace one of the displays re enable the Auto detect feature beforehand remember to disa
198. e Logical level ID is not important at this point gt 4 Logical Level Configuration x Logical level name video Logical level ID Physical levels ohea Re oe 5 The logical level must be associated with a physical router level Click Add and then select a physical level from the list that appears A ailable levels ChannelSource INPUT A INPUT EB INPUT INPUT O INPUT E INPUT F Monitor wall New PhysicalRouter video OPTION A OPTION E 6 Click OK and then click OK again in the Logical Level Configuration window 287 Routers amp Kaleido X The new logical level appears in the Levels list and also under the new sub folder that represents the logical router in the Routers list Routers Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections Routers Configuration Source mapping Destination mapping v D Physical Routers v Kaleido X 7RU Internal Router General information p i OPTION A Video 120x48 2 gt df OPTION B Video 120x48 v 0 HewPhysicalRouter Logical router name SmallLogicalRouter pooo ha ed Video Video 16x16 v o Logical Routers Help _ v 0 Internal router 96x48 Logical router matrix ID 2 teed 0 Video v Om Router 96x80 Number of sources 16 OR r 0 video v Op SmallLogicalRouter 16x4 BA iC 0 Video Number of destinatio
199. e SNMP trap targets you wish to define 3 Inthe Properties tab click the Community box which contains public by default and then type a new name for the group of target SNMP managers Properties Tips Kaleido 4RU Trap targets 4 Click the Trap targets box ji TTS Kaleido x 4R F Community public am 5 Click the button that appeared at the end of the boxto gg SNMP configuration open the SNMP Configuration window Trap target list The trap targets list shows all trap targets currently 10 10 111 01 162 identified for the selected multi viewer SNMP Managers that are trap targets for this multi viewer are identified by their host address and port Host address Port number Add Eat 6 Add remove or modify trap targets as needed and then click OK to confirm and apply the changes or click Cancel to close the SNMP Configuration window without saving your changes to the trap targets list Publishing Alarms to SNMP Devices To add a trap target to the list 1 In the Host address box type the IP address of the device that has the target SNMP manager 2 Inthe Port box type the port number through which the SNMP manager will be accessed 3 Click Add The new trap target is added to the list To modify an existing trap target 5 SHMP configuration ss X 1 Click the trap target you wish to modify in the list Trap target list It becomes highlighted and its host address
200. e a GPI line s direction as an output 1 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears In the list expand the multi viewer you wish to calibrate Expand the GPI GENLOCK module and then click the appropriate GPI line element In the Properties tab click the GPI Direction box and then select output from the list Click Apply to all if every GPI line in your system is to be configured as an output 117 Calibrating the Kaleido X 6 Toset this GPI output line s ON OFF state set manually for test purposes click the GPI Out box and then select either ON or OFF from the list system Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users 4 Properties Tips Y GPIAGENLOCK KX4 GPI GEM F Diagnostic GPI A Line 2 m 118 Configuring Alarms Your Kaleido X system can help you monitor alarm conditions efficiently This section describes how to configure alarm detection and alarm sharing parameters for your system This configuration is made in XEdit Summary Configuring Video Audio Alarm Threshold 00ccccccucccnccnnceneceneceneeeneennes 125 Configuring Alarm Debouncing 00 c cece nec n nec n een n een e een n ee ne eens ean etnneennes 128 Sharing Alarm Status Information Between Multi Viewers and iControl 00 00e0e 128 Publishing Alarms to SNMP Devices
201. e equipment library select the appropriate multi viewer type Kaleido Modular KMV 3901 3911 Kaleido X16 S Kaleido X16 D Kaleido X 4RU Kaleido X 7RU or Kaleido X 7RU x 2 with expansion and drag it onto the root of the System hierarchical list Alternatively right click the list root and then click the system of choice on the shortcut menu A message appears prompting you to confirm your intention 88 Restoring Factory Defaults From a Specific Multi Viewer sD Are you sure You want to change the muti vieyer type to Kaleido N16 5 7 h a The selected type should reflect your actual mutti vieyver model 2 Click Yes XEdit then prompts you to confirm that you want to restore the factory defaults for the multi viewer type you chose Do you want to restore the database factory defaults based on the selected mutti viewer model h d The current database content will be lost 3 Click Yes The selected multi viewer type appears in the System hierarchical list 2 gt 23k Kaleido X TRU 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Restoring Factory Defaults From a Specific Multi Viewer Note See Importing a Database on page 71 for details To restore factory defaults from a multi viewer 1 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Import A window appears prompting you for the IP address of the multi viewer whose factory default databa
202. e full screen zone and then press FULL SCREEN again on the RCP2 Note A full screen layout can also be loaded by configuring actions in XEdit See Managing Layouts on page 173 for information on creating a full screen layout and refer to Creating Actions on page 237 for detailed instructions Changing a Source s Aspect Ratio To change the aspect ratio using the RCP2 e Move the pointer over the video source whose aspect ratio you wish to change and then press ASPECT RATIO on the RCP2 Continue pressing ASPECT RATIO to toggle between the available aspect ratio options 4 3 16 9 and possibly a third custom aspect ratio if one was defined in XEdit for the monitor To change the aspect ratio using the mouse 1 Right click the video source 2 On the shortcut menu point to Aspect Ratio and then click 4 3 or 16 9 41 Operation of the Monitor Wall eee Assign source to monitor eo Unlatch f Acknowledge e Send to KX Router output Aspect ratio L_ Cverscan L 5 T 535 R S35 B 536 LI Safe area Text CC Subtitling Monitor Wall Note There may be one more choice on the menu if you set a custom aspect ratio in XEdit for this monitor See Setting a Video Monitor s Aspect Ratio on page 187 The video is resized accordingly within the layout Video Cropping Zooming To toggle the cropping mode using the RCP2 e To change the current cropping mode move the mouse pointer
203. e information on the Kaleido RCP2 please refer to the Kaleido RCP2 Guide to Installation and Operation available on the DVD that shipped with your system Displaying the Dashboard Whenever your Kaleido X detects an error it will automatically display the dashboard on every monitor of the monitor wall When all errors are resolved then the system automatically closes the dashboard on every monitor You can also display the dashboard as needed to view the Kaleido X system name IP address software version and current error messages In such cases you must close the dashboard manually Note It is possible to disable the automatic display of the dashboard on specific displays See Disabling the Dashboard on page 166 for details on how to configure this option To display the dashboard 1 Right click anywhere on a monitor On the shortcut menu point to Monitor Wall and then click Show dashboard to display the dashboard associated with the current head Hiding the Dashboard ee Assign source to monitor a a pe ee Send to KX Router output Aspect ratio L Overscan L 53 T 5 R S3 B 5 ml A Refresh Unlatch Acknowledge all Load layout Text CC Subtitling Sees Show dashboard Monitor Wall t Hide all dashboards Monitor wall shortcut menu from composite monitor shortcut menu Note If you right click the monitor wall background directly then the monitor wall shortcut menu appears immedi
204. e layouts and assign logical sources created in step 11 to monitors that can display text e g UMD and alarms e g UMD video text alarm ools System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Toots Layouts a Monitors 4x3 r f2 1_SOURCE_LABEL r GlobalAlarm_Channel0 Audiometers E Clocks Monitors 16x9 13 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 14 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Export to export the database to your multi viewer 15 On the multi viewer load the layout containing the monitors assigned to dynamic text and tallies coming from the Sony switcher You should see source names and tallies from the Sony switcher on the monitor wall Kahuna Production Switcher A multi viewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from a Kahuna production switcher The procedures below describe how to set up a multi viewer to interface with a Kahuna switcher To set up the Kahuna switcher 1 Physically connect one end of an RJ 45 crossover cable to the multi viewer s RS 422 port 2 Using an DE 9S to RJ 45 converter connect the other end of the crossover cable to the appropriate RS 422 control port on the Kahuna switcher See RS 422 Connection Diagram on page 28 for pinouts on the multi viewer The illustration below shows the location of the RS 422 ports on an 11RU Kahuna
205. e monitor whose alarm state you wish to acknowledge and then click Unlatch Acknowledge on the shortcut menu Assign source to monitor ANECT aee o aaten E e a Unlatch Acknowledge Assign Digipath input Send to KX Router output J Aspect ratio L Overscan L 5 T 5 R 5 B 5 Ol Safe area cc Text CC Subtitling Monitor Wall To acknowledge all current alarms in a room e Right click the monitor wall point to Monitor Wall if you clicked a monitor and then click Unlatch Acknowledge all on the shortcut menu 57 Operation of the Monitor Wall 58 ee Assign source to monitor k 3 i I P hl A j me Send to KX Router output Aspect ratio mm Cyerscan L 53 T 536 R 555 B 535 il Safe area Retresh Load layout Text CC Subtitling METEN EE Unlatch Acknowledge all Show dashboard Monitor Wall t Hide all dashboards This will acknowledge every alarm monitored in the current room Acknowledging Alarms by Using an Action To acknowledge alarms by using an action Create a Unlatch Acknowledge all action This action can be assigned to a monitor on the monitor wall or it can be a background action See Creating Actions on page 237 for details Triggering Audio Monitoring Triggering Audio Monitoring by Using the mouse or the RCP2 To trigger audio monitoring by using the mouse or RCP2 Move the pointer over an audio monitor and then click the monitor o
206. e most integrated monitoring and routing solution As a multi image processor it offers the highest level of signal flexibility Each chassis can display 96 HD SD or Analog inputs any number of times in any size across 8 displays of any resolution and orientation As a router it offers switching of 96 unprocessed inputs to 48 HD SD outputs for feeding monitors test equipment and master control or production switchers Getting Started OUTPUTS DXF 100 High Resolution HD SD SDI Router Outputs N DYVI RGBHY Outputs Drive full resolution HDSD SDI Optical DVI extension Drive multi image mosaics signals into video monitors into displays test equipment or production mixers CONTROL Analog Digital Audio Monitoring Outputs 1 24 aan LTC K RCP2 multi image display remote panel RS 422 Dual Output Multi lmage Processor Modules HD SD SDI Router Modules Option USB Network Series router control panel 24 Outputs Module Up to 48 Outputs Frame Ethernet Up to 8 Outputs Frame DVI backgrou nd input a Frame Expansion Keyboard and mouse ys a Universal Input Modules 6 GPII O and 16 Auto sensing Inputs Module Genlock Module Up to 96 Inputs Frame Option XEdit layout editor 72 16 Audio Bridge Terminal software Teas Configurable Multi format Video Inputs 128 Channels Terminal GPI Input Reference Input Compos
207. e multi viewer is added to the System list Note The system type is automatically adjusted based on the actual target system Repeat from step 2 until you have added all the required systems to the cluster If further system configuration is required on the individual members of the cluster start with the current system i e the one you are connected to See Configuring the System Representation on page 85 for detailed instructions on adding cards Refer to Routers amp Kaleido X on page 265 and Tally Interface Devices on page 311 for instructions on adding other routing and control devices Note Each member of a cluster has its own database where both common information about the cluster and information local to the individual cluster member are stored Room and layout definitions are automatically replicated to all cluster members whereas the configuration for devices connected to a specific system is only stored in this system s database Once you have completed the current system s specific configuration save it and then connect to the next cluster member you need to configure by expanding the appropriate node and double clicking any card 81 az Managing Kaleido X Systems wesystem P BE Kaleido x 7RU SW FRT 1 10 0 9 39 f Kaleido 7RU 0 0 9 10 10 0 9 10 S Kaleido x 4RU SVV FR4 10 6 6 50 Double click to expand multi viewer H GPUGENLOCK KXA GPI GEN H OPTIO
208. e of a card booting in offline mode a duplicate IP address a defective fan a power supply alarm etc To disable the dashboard for a specific display e Click the display on which you do not want the dashboard to appear and then clear the Allow dashboard display check box in the Properties pane TOLALI Position x 0 0 Allow dashboard display m Managing Display Libraries The default display library includes configurations for the most popular display models You can also create your own display configurations and add them to custom display libraries All open display libraries appear on the Tools pane The default display library is always open Custom display libraries are stored separately from the XEdit workspace and must be opened explicitly Managing Display Libraries Creating Custom Display Libraries To create a custom display library 1 Click the Rooms tab in the main window 2 On the File menu click New Alternatively click Open to open an existing room 3 On the File menu click New display library Alternatively right click anywhere inside the Tools pane s display library area and then click New display library on the shortcut menu C Mew display library Ga Open display library Bj Close display library m Save display library W Delete entry Display library shortcut menu The new display library appears below the default display library area in the Tools pane A Display E
209. e rar hve wire E ter enn erie Ree EO Attar cer Ee ON 66 Opening the AECIE SOMWAlCsc26 hi00 2cuduasanad ieootvadodhecweundadoqudedwhedianseetacwendad oeei 66 USWIG AIC OMING S24 caciuscsdiendratast Ad gelin soe TN EN S ees 69 I PORLING a Vala DAS Csie sctncussit citalna areas tes eaaenata boar aeesetennrd ea reacnnana dame eaeetenhnetla no atnbrain A 71 EXDOMING a Databas Ene iceman saat Mas onto E E Mick uiia ise es Week E Mien eavenees 73 GEGTING a ACK UD et 3 8 cca ssoeacnin to eta nN EE AEEA EE bhatedeg ad neeaienum aad AEEA 74 Retrieving a Backis cveaxasiesdousas sab sacstanacdehs aiees na bdoewemeataedssense EATA AEA TNE 75 Creating a Single Multi Viewer System cccccecccececeetseeeceseseeeteeesecenneeeneeeutenaes 71 CHEATING a CHISTOR is 5 48 Sa Geter dnc a EE tial ies ane EEEE tes neta neds cole iawemien ade 79 Configuring the System Representation cceccceecccenceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeseeeeneneees 85 Restoring Factory Defaults y censeieeeaut rird keke AW TAA ene Rhewekee 87 Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently 0 0 ccc cece cece cence eee e nee eee e eee eeteee sean eenaeees 90 5 Calibrating the Kaleido X 93 REV CONCEDIS EEE E E E E E E A E E E A ote ees EE wana anna eacosunes 93 Detaned Directions cia 5i ascot naene aTa AE AOA E Da A A oad aot 96 Multi Viewer Output Calibrations iss lt rz ohedciwinadatnen shoud awesieedscvop sedaosedorenas obesdenadnwsias 96 Multi Viewer Input Calibrations
210. e that shipped with your multi viewer Once you have completed your multi viewer s initial installation perform a system verification see Verifying your Getting Started System Configuration on page 15 load a layout on the monitor wall if you haven t done so already see Loading a Layout on page 22 and then review the more advanced topics in Administration and Servicing on page 345 to fine tune your initial system configuration After you have established that your basic configuration works as expected move on to the other chapters in this manual to complete your system configuration until it meets your actual monitoring requirements Note In line with our commitment to environmental preservation only the Release Notes the Quick Start Guide for your multi viewer model and some ancillary documents e g welcome letters warranty cards are distributed in printed form All manuals are available on the Kaleido X DVD You can also obtain them from the Software Downloads section of Miranda s Technical Support portal System Overview This section reviews the different multi viewer models that support the Kaleido X Software Kaleido MOdular 00 cece ccc ccc cence cece ence ence eee e nee e eee teeeeteeeeeeeteees 6 KEON IG periit A EAE nenr erate E E AEA E AAEE 8 aTa GNU EEES EE E EE E E E E E 10 KUOA URU sa cirssoreectiwrnctovatec tau receatadeestwrncsanadesd EE E 11 Kaleido X 7RU x 2 Expansion 00 0 ccc
211. ean it has 120 inputs and 48 outputs A No Each card can route up to 96 inputs to 24 physical outputs and so has an actual size of 96 x 24 120 Xx 48 refers to the size of the router card when including other internal connections that are used for router expansion Detailed Directions Configuring an External Router The process of creating and configuring an external router e g a third party router or router control panel for use with your Kaleido X system consists of 4 steps e defining the physical router e adding one or more physical levels e creating one or more logical routers e adding one or more logical levels 1 Controlling a logical router from an upstream router control device or application is supported since version 3 00 of the Kaleido X Software 279 Routers amp Kaleido X 280 Step 1 Defining a Physical Router To configure an external router 1 Launch XEdit and open the database associated with the multi viewer for which you wish to configure an external router Drag External Router from the Equipment library onto the root of the System hierarchical list in the Description Calibrations pane System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions __Description Calibrations Equipment Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections Kaleido X 7RU Serial to TCPAP Dispatcher Router Controller P
212. ed it is added to the shortcut menu below Service 6 Selecting a Teletext Subtitle Page from the Monitor Wall To change the decoded Teletext Subtitle page for a video source on the wall e Right click a video monitor point to Teletext amp Subtitling and then click Page A page number on the shortcut menu mee Assign source to monitor a TF amp e f mem Send to KX Router output Aspect ratio I Overscan L 5 T 5 R 5 B 5 55 Ll Safe area Page A 100 Egit pages j Fage A 100 Text mode a Monitor Wall The shortcut menu displays Page A where is the number of the actual page being monitored from 100 to 899 It is possible to change the assignment using the Edit pages sub menu This menu allows you to configure the page selection for the current input 46 Editing UMD Text Editing UMD Text To edit the text on a UMD 1 Right click the UMD whose text label you wish to modify and then click Edit text on the shortcut menu eee Assign source to monitor k 7 of r PN ee Edit text Monitor Wall The UMD text area becomes editable InputA videos 2 Type the new text and then press ENTER on the RCP2 or external keyboard The UMD displays the new text CAM1 VIDEO 16 Selecting an Input Method Note In the case of a KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer the current version of the Kaleido X Software does not support input methods on the monitor wall A
213. ee Assigning Tallies Input Names and Output Names to Logical Sources above to monitors that can display text e g UMD or alarms e g UMD video text alarm status 2 Depending on your purposes assign the appropriate text or alarm levels to specific components within the monitors e g assign an alarm level to a tally component in an UMD or a text level to the UMD text component agen 209C0 localibaadafdd 225 11dd 90f5 d37b526625c0 1_INPUT_SI ICRT_LAGIL agent 20000 local Gaadafdd c251 1 1dd S0fS d3 b526826c082 INPUT SHORT LABEL 338 3 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 4 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Export to export the database to your multi viewer On the multi viewer you can now load the layout containing the monitors that were assigned dynamic text and tallies provided by the Kayak switcher Input and output names as well as tally status from the Kayak switcher will be visible on the monitor wall Any changes made by the switcher s operator will be immediately reflected on the monitor wall Serial Port Test Agent Serial Port Test Agent During a setup it is sometime not clear if the wiring between the multi viewer and a peripheral device is correct or if the peripheral device sends the expected data One can connect a Serial port test agent as a peripheral device in XEdit export the database to the multi viewer and then read o
214. een underscan or overscan Overscan settings can be customized Changing the underscan overscan mode dynamically It is also possible to dynamically change the overscan underscan mode based on a feed assigned to a video monitor For example you can change logical sources in a video monitor using Gateway commands where a video source requires the monitor to be in overscan mode but a graphics source requires the monitor to be in underscan mode to avoid cropping the image A custom action script can make the monitor change its scan mode depending on the format detected For information on how to create such a script please contact support miranda com To set the underscan overscan properties of a video monitor 1 In XEdit open a layout and click to select the video monitor for which you wish to specify overscan underscan settings X XEdit C Documents and Settings smatthew Desktop Kaleido X Y2 20 Factory Data DB_1 Layout Multihead layout Room_A MultiHeadLayout0 3 o RJ File Edit Configure Yiew Tools Help DEEA bl EBs I OO HWS WS Hi wel ell Wels Gales s users ions Tips a Layouts Layout Multihead layout Room_A MultiHeadLayoutO BE Assignments Audio level d Monitors 4x3 Border alarm level alarm F Monitors 16x9 Channel address URI MENS Friendly name videoO E Audiometers Router input None Video level videot Daw M Appearance
215. eido x 4RU inout Bichannel 13 29 B13 B13 Embi fnputhevidead3 B13 Vid TC wD INPUT A KXI 16 Al aanne ee Bid B14 Embi iputBvideotd B14 Wid TC Video 01 TV nout Richannel 14531 Mm E15 B15 Emb1 _ iputB video15 BIS vid TC wideo 02 inbut BiChannel 1E 22 6 B16 Embi imputB videni6 B16 Vid TC video 03 ese 4 MWideo O4 Channel Sources table with a selected cell in the Video level category for Channel1 3 Repeat the procedure until all desired physical assignments are completed for this logical source Making Further Assignments by Incremental Copy Once done with a first logical source if the next logical source is to be similar to the first one it is possible to use incremental copy to automatically create it Alternatively if only one or a few specific levels are to be similarly configured it is possible to use incremental copy on the corresponding level column only To use the incremental copy tool to propagate physical assignments to adjacent logical sources 1 Click the row header for the logical source whose assignments you wish to propagate A small square the incremental copy zone appears in the bottom right corner of the header cell System _Channels sources Destinations Roome Layouts RCP users Actions Video Audio Alarm Time code Channels Sources Source ID Video audio text alarm timecode Anput AiChanneld4 14 A14 A14 Embi inputA videot
216. els Rooms Layouts REP Users Actions RCP users Admin User RCP user User2 has been granted access to Room2 5 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Removing RCP Users From Rooms To remove RCP users from rooms 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the RCP users you wish to remove from the hierarchical list Note Use Shift click or Ctrl click to select multiple users 2 On the File menu click Remove user from room Alternatively click the Remove button x on the toolbar or right click and then click Remove user from room on the shortcut menu 3 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Note The user Admin cannot be removed Setting Room Preferences Room preferences will apply by default for any user who log on to the room from the RCP2 See Setting RCP User Preferences on page 256 to learn how to configure preferences for a specific user To set default preferences for a room 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the appropriate room from the hierarchical list The selected room s preferences layout presets audio monitoring output mouse pointer size and timer are listed in the Properties pane Setting Room Preferences System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Tips Properties RCP users Roomi Preset
217. em components including external devices create rooms logical sources layouts and RCP user definitions and perform all the configurations required for successful operation of the multi viewer XEdit has two modes of operation you can work offline in a local workspace and then apply your changes by exporting them to the multi viewer or you can connect to a multi viewer and work in online mode directly on the system Changes made in online mode take effect immediately on the monitor wall Database Layouts and related configurations for your Kaleido X system are created in XEdit All this information is stored in a database When you work in offline mode your load the appropriate database in a local workspace on the PC where XEdit is used XEdit can export such a database to a multi viewer or import the current layouts and configurations from a multi viewer into the local workspace on your PC For changes you make in offline mode to take effect on the monitor wall you must export the database to a multi viewer Conversely any configuration change you make in online mode must be imported from the multi viewer into your local workspace if you wish to be able to make further changes in offline mode Expansion system An expansion system includes two Kaleido X ZRU frames working together as a single unit Term Cluster Cascade Key Concepts Description A cluster refers to multiple multi viewers configured so that th
218. enceueneeuceeceaeuaeneenens 1 Features Introduced in Kaleido X Version 5 20 1 0 cece ccc cece cece cence cee cenceeeneeucenceaeuaeucenens 2 Features Introduced in Kaleido X Version 5 10 1 0 0 ccc ccc cece cece een cee cecenceecneeeceneeaeuaencenens 2 2 Getting Started 5 ADOUE TMS DOCUMENT se esrnr erraria iischaeeuaa anor Reena aetna etre EA E EEEE EEEN EEEN 5 NOOO N eee E E E E E E E E A E 6 Kae O MOUE ornen E EEA E NA EEE ONEA E EEES EAE OE REEE AAEN 6 E 1 E E E E A E T E A EE E 8 EO O E E A E T A E 10 EATA I E E E E AE E E NET 11 Kaleido X 7RU x 2 Expansion cts ws esnearowatiacoearncanrviduuss warean walawndeauievaalcdauwaaesandenepaateutes 12 EOE e E E E E E AE E E oagaeo niet 13 AE EEEE S E es 14 DETAICUIDINECIONS E E S OET E A AT TE S 14 Verifying your System Configuration 0 ccc ccc cece e cece eee e ee eee een e eet e eee e ee eee ee eee ees 15 Eor OaE o T wc crcayp E E phoe uetertateaeaueron E EE AE 22 E ADEE i E P A A E ANE 24 RS 422 Connection Diagram siis cceisscireniiorrrisiiniiti Krsan oi AERAN EENE RE ROA EENEN 28 KEdit Application ShOrtCUtS oo iseieccisicrcrercirriisria CEE EEn EEE EEEE EEEa 29 3 Operation of the Monitor Wall 31 Oy O S E NE EEE EEE E AS EEEE EEE EEE E EEA EEEE ES 31 Derea DECON eari i e E EE EEE E E EEEE E R EE E E S 35 Logging on to the Monitor Wall Using the Kaleido RCP2 nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsneseesrnssesn 35 Displaying the Das NDOA 54s oxeemoay ierit ke ARE E A 36 hiding
219. er in the current room only A keyboard configuration must be selected for each user in every room unless the system default is suitable Assigning a Timer to an RCP User To assign a timer to an RCP User 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the user to whom you wish to assign a timer from under the appropriate room in the rooms hierarchical list 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Timer box and then select the appropriate timer to be controlled by this user in this room from the list of available timers 260 Setting RCP User Preferences Tips Properties RCP users Room JOHN User name JOHN Fassword aati Description Preset 1 Layouts Preset 2 Layout4 Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout Preset 5 Layoutt Preset 6 Input Preset 7 Input Preset 5 Mone Preset 9 Mone Preset 10 Mone Full screen settings rifs1 RIFS1 Audio monitoring out CUTPUT AcHead 1 Audio Out Keyboard United States Dvorak for le Mone mer Timer timer Timer fm Note If no timer is specified for this user the timer that has been selected in the room s preferences will apply It will appear in gray in the Time box See Setting Room Preferences on page 252 Changing an RCP User s Name and Password To change an RCP user s name or password 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the user whose user name or password you wish to change from under any of the rooms in
220. ew more detailed information about this module Verifying your System Configuration ig OPTION B Empty l INPUT A KXI 16HSV s n 079401 17914037 lt Expand details Firmware 0x80 Safemode Ox6F Refresh Inputs VVVIVIOVIIVIVIIVIIG Reset card INPUT B Empty OUTPUT A master KXO DUAL s n 079201 19722004 JEJE Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 At any time you can click the Refresh button to make sure the data displayed for the selected module is up to date Inthe case of a Kaleido X multi viewer click the Reset card button at the end of a card s header row to reset the card remotely directly from your Web browser Inthe case of a Kaleido X16 or Kaleido Modular multi viewer model click the Reset multi viewer button at the end of the multi viewer s header row to reset the multi viewer remotely directly from your Web browser 5 Review the enabled options for each module and make sure that no error is reported 17 Getting Started t w INPUT A KXI 1L6HSY s n 079401 19797007 Firmware Ox8F Safemode Ox6F Inputs Ge VOU daaa KXI 16 CC XDS Option Disable Key c88820a6 KXI 16 Dolby E Option Enable KXI 16 Embedded Audio Option Disable Key a8459e2F KXI 16 Loudness Option Enable ABT IP address 10 6 5 251 KXI 16 48va Status KXI 16 48vb Status KXI 16 Audio Box Data Error w KXI 16 Audio Box Detected KXI 16 CPLD
221. ewPhysicalRouter Audio Input 8 8 NewPhysicalRouter NewPhysicalRouter NewPhysicalRouter Video Video Video Input 9 9 Input 10 10 Input 11 141 NevePhysicalRouter New PhysicalRouter New PhysicalRouter Audio Audio Audio Input 9 9 Input 10 10 Input 11 11 NewPhysicalRouter Video input 12 12 NevPhysicalRouter Audio Input 12 12 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 13 13 NewPhysicalRouter Audio Input 13 13 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 14 14 New PhysicalRouter Audio Input 14 14 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 15 15 NewPhysicalRouter Audio Input 15 15 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 16 16 NevPhysicalRouter Audio Input 16 16 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 2 2 NevwPhysicalRouter Audio Input 17 17 NewPhysicalRouter Video Input 3 3 New PhysicalRouter Audio Input 18 16 lf the audio mapping mirrors the video mapping then when a video switch is made e g from Video 1 to Video 2 the corresponding audio will follow i e the same command will switch a crosspoint in both the physical video router and the physical audio router Note Miranda s Router Control Software includes applications for controlling routers single bus and matrix where you can operate in all f
222. ewer system while an upgrade is in progress If the multi viewer does not reboot after 10 seconds or so try clicking Apply settings again after a minute or two until the multi viewer reboots Remember to change your client PC s IP address to one that matches the new subnet You will also need to edit the XAdmin URL in your Web browser s address bar in order to log on to the multi viewer again Configuring a Multi Viewer s IP Settings Without a Client PC The IP address system name and other parameters can be set via a control panel directly on the monitor wall To change the multi viewer s system IP address and adjust your system s configuration 1 2 Connect a mouse to any USB port on the multi viewer Right click anywhere on the monitor wall On the shortcut menu point to Monitor Wall and then click System Configuration Change the configuration settings as necessary and then click OK 361 16 Administration and Servicing eee Assign channel to monitor i mm a system configuration j General Ethernet ml System name SGBOURAS SQHz system frame rate Aspect ratio dversean Laan ees ase ala ml hate area are 608 Monitor wall Refresh Cancel Load layout Unlatch Acknowledge all show dashboard Hide all dashboards System configuration 4 Click Yes when prompted to restart the system Finding a Multi Viewer s System IP Address and Application Version To
223. ey can be operated as a single system from a room comprising up to 48 displays fed by the different multi viewers outputs The complete cluster system can include up to 128 displays See Creating a Cluster on page 79 A cascade refers to up to three KMV 390 1 3971 multi viewers configured so that they can be operated as a single system from a room The cascade makes it possible to monitor up to 24 video inputs on a single monitor wall display Refer to the KMV 3901 3911 Cascade Step by Step Configuration guide for more information Logical source Cards Virtual card slots A logical source called a channel in earlier versions of the documentation refers to a group of physical audio video or metadata sources and text attributes A logical source can be used as a whole and assigned to a virtual monitor See Creating Logical Sources on page 135 for details Cards are added to and removed from a Kaleido X 7RU or Kaleido X 4RU multi viewer There are different specialized types of cards input cards output cards a GPI genlock card expansion cards and internal router cards Refer to the appropriate Hardware Description amp Installation Manual available on the DVD that shipped with your system for more information The Kaleido X16 introduced the concept of virtual card slots that represent a set of hardware features directly on the multi viewer s main board In XEdit the Kaleido X16 virtual card slots
224. ffers switching of 96 unprocessed inputs to 48 HD SD outputs for feeding monitors test equipment master control or production switchers ISO recorders or other multi image processors 63 az Managing Kaleido X Systems 64 Term Kaleido X16 Description The Kaleido X16 is a compact ultra quiet multi viewer in a 1RU frame with 16 inputs and two outputs It provides a subset of the features of the Kaleido X 4RU and 7RU models There are two types of Kaleido X16 Kaleido X16 S single head and Kaleido X16 D dual head KMV 3901 3911 XEdit The KMV 3901 the first member of the Kaleido Modular series is a multi viewer on a single Densit card with eight inputs and two outputs Designed to address production type applications it supports a subset of the features offered by the other Kaleido X series multi viewer models e Processing Video scaling Video cropping 3Gbps Level A support KXI DVI Bridge support e Probing Display of audio levels up to 16 audio signals per head time codes based on URS signal from a REF 1801 Densit card or on embedded reference signal video format and audio format e GPIO interface Support for 8 GPI inputs and 2 GPI outputs In addition to the features listed above the new KMV 3911 multi viewer supports up to two HD SDI monitoring outputs XEdit is the Kaleido X layout editor a software intended to be run ona remote computer Its purpose is to define your Kaleido X syst
225. find the system IP address system name and application version e Right click anywhere on the monitor wall On the shortcut menu point to Monitor Wall and then click Show dashboard to display the dashboard associated with the current output head A small window appears revealing the system IP address and the system version 362 Detailed Directions eol InputA video7 InputA video8 DO DD DDO 0000 00 00 000D 0DDO InputA video11 InputA video12 04 35 40 23 00 00 02 00 Layout OUTPUT A Head 1 Room O O0 9 39 Roomd 10 0 9 29 X PWersion 4 00 build sao InputA video15 Partial view of a monitor wall display showing dashboard at the bottom right Layout OUTPUT 4 Head 1 AUTH ed ee ee er RN bee System IP address i E a la a a S A version fa OO puid saad i Application version System name Room name Enlarged view of dashboard Changing the Client PC s IP Address Both the client computer that you will use to communicate with the multi viewer via XAdmin and XEdit and the multi viewer itself must have IP addresses within the same subnet The following procedure applies to a typical Windows XP system For Windows 7 see Changing an IP Address on Windows 7 on page 365 363 16 Administration and Servicing Changing an IP Address on Windows XP To change the IP address of a client PC that has Windows XP 1 On the Windows XP Start menu point to Control Panel right click Netw
226. for details 2 Physically connect one end of an RJ 45 crossover cable to the multi viewer s RS 422 port 3 Using an DE 9S to RJ 45 converter connect the other end of the crossover cable to the enabled serial tally port on the Sony switcher See RS 422 Connection Diagram on page 28 for pinouts on the multi viewer DVS 9000 Switchers Since there are no serial tally connections on the DVS 9000 switcher you will need an additional device either a Device Control Unit DCU or a System Control Unit SCU between this switcher model and the multi viewer Use a DCU model MKS 8700 or DCU 8000 or an SCU model MKS 8010A or MKS 8010B Note MKS 2700 The 1 RU DCU model MKS 2700 does not have a serial tally connection so serial tally must come from a MKS 8010A or MKS 80108B SCU e Ona DCU MKS 8700 or DCU 8000 use the connectors labeled Serial Tally 1 and Serial Tally 2 EYA Serial Tally 2 Serial Tally 1 Sony Device Control Unit Pack DCU 8000 e Onan SCU MKS 8010A or MKS 8010B use the 15 pin connector labeled EDITOR PANEL with an adapter 1 The User s Manuals for the DVS 9000 for example are available here http bssc sel sony com BroadcastandBusiness docs manuals dvs9000ccp8000_ug_1er11e pdf http bssc sel sony com BroadcastandBusiness docs manuals dvs9000ccp8000_ug_1er12e pdf 319 Tally Interface Devices EDITOR PANEL Sony System Control Unit MKS 8010A EDITOR PANEL n n amp Jae
227. freeze alarm will only be released after a long time longer than the value of the reset delay if the video has short duration freezes during the reset delay interval SD HD detection zone Audio Calibrations Determine the video window area to be monitored for Freeze and Black detection Two detection zones can be configured one for SD signals one for HD signals Overload left right Select the level in dBFS dB or dBu depending on the signal source above which the audio signal will be considered overloaded Silence left right Select the level in dBFS dB or dBu depending on the signal source below which the audio signal will be considered silenced Out of phase Select the sensitivity level below which the audio signal will be considered out of phase The sensitivity is a value between 1 and 1 where 1 means completely out of phase and 1 means perfectly in phase Mono An audio source is considered to be mono if the left and right signals are perfectly in phase i e more likely to be the same Select the sensitivity level above which audio will be considered mono The sensitivity is a value between 1 and 1 where 1 means that everything is considered to be mono and 1 means that only perfectly in phase audio will be considered mono Metadata Calibration DIVCC service presence timeout Set the delay in seconds after which a service presence alarm will be triggered This calibration a
228. from RCP2 356 multi viewer to from SNMP devices 357 router controller to multi viewer 356 Preferences RCP user ccc cee eee ees 256 PROSCUS E E wae wie E EEEN 40 Production switchers N aean e nes orn eaten OO 323 NAN OSO sss ciceserndccccoueattemeoneeahawniteetdeas 313 ROSS Video ccidcsiedicditecadaedinddedins 313 Snell amp Wilcox wo eee e cece eee eee 323 6 eee eee eae ee heme eer rere 318 Progra COMNG siusiattie aioe iene S 123 PIOGIESSIVG ssh wsincadwsiutedystagutadduade eees 161 R RCP2 adding Users cece cece ec eeceveees 250 audio monitoring cece eee eee ee ee 58 configuration cece cee ee eee eee 365 layout presets ccceccecceececes 40 removing USEFS eee e eee eee ee 251 252 user preferences cece cee ence eee 256 NGPZ AOI roarsicenn o 368 Reclocking sccaddtalncaieiiceieiadwerasaees 116 Reference levels cceeceeceeeees 106 107 Refreshing layouts cece eee e cee eeee 40 Region editor ccececeececeeees 231 232 Remote control panel NalClGO RCP2 ns cnacenamtoosennentantes 345 Resolutions ccc cece eee eee 154 157 160 automatic detection cece eens 31 DACKUD irarria nan AREE 75 Restoring database backup cece eee e eee es 75 factory defaults ccc cence eee 87 Rooms assigning layouts to RCP users 257 OSNO 25 6ceS cturtewas oesdadate
229. from the list Kaleido 4RU ze ew ties kd Calibration Switch field selection igialebe B Field 1 Field 2 Any tield Switch field selection Calibrating SDI Signal Reclocking To calibrate reclocking of a router module s output signal 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Inthe list expand the multi viewer you wish to calibrate 3 Expand the appropriate router output and then click SDI Output Reclocking 116 GPl Genlock Calibrations Lsystem Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Descrigtion Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections System Y M OPTION A KXO 24Router PF Output 1 Pb Pelnput Number SEED Output Reclocking Output 2 M 4 Inthe Properties tab click the SDI Output Reclocking box and then select ON or OFF from the list Kaleido 4RL 2 5 Click Apply to all to apply the chosen value throughout the system GPI Genlock Calibrations Calibrating GPI Lines You can define actions that change the state of a GPI output line and assign them to a monitor GPI lines configured as outputs can have their ON OFF state set manually in XEdit for test purposes Note GPI direction is pre defined on the Kaleido X16 and KMV 3901 3911 multi viewers To configur
230. g and then click Add channel on the shortcut menu System Channels Sources Destinations a innt Facthannel 15 g5 F15 A logical source is added at the bottom of the sources table Note You can change the logical source name and path For example Input A Channel 1 can be renamed Cam 1 You can group related logical sources together by adding elements to the path and then sorting the table as needed to suit your purposes see Sorting the Sources Table on page 140 3 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The sources table is saved 137 Creating Logical Sources 138 Adding Physical Assignments Once you have created a logical source you must make the physical assignments This is required before you can create a layout 1 Inthe sources table click the cell that corresponds to the level you wish to define for this logical source 2 Expand the filtered System list that appears in the Tools pane and then drag the appropriate element from the list to the selected level in the sources table Toots Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions System Video Audio Text Alarm E 3 Channels Sources m ji E Source ID ideo audiot text alarmi timecode Anput Bichannel 14 2T B11 Bit Emb1 jfaeatievideod Bit Wid T T J input BiChannel 12 28 B12 B12 Emb1 inputBvidend B12 vid TE amp Kal
231. gent router controller via a serial or TCP IP connection The controller can issue commands to the multi viewer internal router module if available or to any external router connected to the multi viewer The Kaleido X Software directs the commands to the designated device and as needed translates the command to the required protocol Router Configuration Scenarios Controlling an External Router 3 An operator chooses an assignment option on the monitor wall menu e g switch output 2 of external router A to QC monitor The Kaleido X Software interprets the command and sends it to the designated router over a serial or TCP IP connection using the appropriate router protocol The router receives the command and executes a crosspoint switch either changing the signal on one of its connections to a multi viewer input or Sending the signal to another device e g vector scope QC monitor ISO recorder 269 Routers amp Kaleido X Note In the same way commands from the monitor wall menu can also change crosspoints on the multi viewer s internal router if available or on the KX Router logical router Controlling External Routers in a Cascade OGOOGOGHGOOG9O0506 sam coeeee A 0 00000000000600 sia Level 1 O OKORORORORORKORORORORORO Om 2 8 S 2 y O CIC ae E Level 2 Level 3 1 An operator chooses an as
232. h the following static network configuration DHCP OFF 369 16 Administration and Servicing Static IP address 10 0 3 190 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway 10 0 0 1 5 Using a Web browser on the PC connect to the ABT using the following address 10 0 3 190 The home page of the ABT s built in Web server is displayed 6 Click Network Configuration in the navigation pane The Network Configuration page is displayed Miranda ABT 128A_18377 001 Windows Internet Explorer Sele QO Brems Jede ER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help w oo BF Miranda ABT 1284_18377 001 fn By fy e Page iO Tools Miranda Audio Bridge Terminal status Network Configuration Parameters Network Configuration MAC Address 00 50 1E 02 04 BE Iere masier Label 128A_18377 001 EER DHCP Disabled Enabled Sate IP Address ao fe s W250 Static Network Mask 255 255s fo o Static Default Gateway 10 e Ho hio Apply amp Reboot Cancel Changes Factory Defaults Ca Internet i00 7 Change the ABT s network settings as necessary and then click Apply amp Reboot Note If you purchased more than one Audio Bridge Terminal unit keep in mind that they all ship with the same default static IP address Make sure to assign each of them a different static IP address before connecting them to the network if DHCP is not used For more information please refer to the Audio
233. hat accepts 3Gbps 1080p 60 Hz 1080p 59 94 Hz and 1080p 50 Hz HD SDI SD SDI and composite inputs the KXI 16HS3 supports 3Gbps HD SDI and SD SDI inputs Support for version 5 0 of the TSL UMD protocol Version 5 0 of the protocol allows TCP IP or UDP IP communication between the TSL UMD controller and a multi viewer over a network Since the protocol and connection mode are totally different devices using version 5 0 of the TSL UMD protocol and those using version 3 1 of the protocol are considered different devices in XEdit To use the latest protocol v 5 0 select the TSL network device from XEdit s Equipment library As of XEdit version 5 10 the earlier version 3 1 TSL device is called TSL serial Note The current implementation of the TSL UMD v 5 0 protocol in the Kaleido X Software does not support multicast mode Enhancements in Kaleido X Version 5 10 Ref 25844 Router Control Support for the HCO 1821 HD SD ASI Change Over with Clean Switch Ref 25706 Viewing assignment information for a video source on the monitor wall Right click a video monitor and then point to Info on the shortcut menu to view the monitor wall destination label current logical source physical source ID Ref 25780 26851 Viewing assignment information between router sources and multi viewer inputs The Signal Path Viewer application can be launched from the Kaleido X home page It opens as a standalone panel updated in real
234. hat they match those of the physical display you need to configure 155 a Setting Up Rooms Edit Resolution Settings Refresh rate 59 94 Hz PS HSPol WSPol Lj van HEFa vsPot Horizontal active 1 HSPol SFol Horizontal tront porch 2 HSPol WSPol Horizontal back porch Ue Horieantal total Vertical active Vertical tront porch Vertical sync Vertical back porch vemical total kd Modeline Horizontal blank start Horizontal sync start Horizontal syne end Horizontal blank end Vertical blank start Vertical syne start Vertical syne end Vertical blank end Eikel clack Sync polarity Syne polarity 1920x1200 60Hz Save Save as Delete Close Note In XAdmin s Status and Options page these parameters are listed under the corresponding output card information according to the blank sync start end modeline system and with the sync polarity expressed as a number between 0 and 3 Refer to Viewing a Multi Viewer s Status Information on page 386 for details Example Suppose you want to configure the display that is connected to the OUTPUT C master KX0 DUAL card s head 1 The image below shows the relevant data you need to copy to the Modeline section of the Edit Resolution Settings window 156 Configuring Displays W OUTPUT B KXO DUAL s n 079201 21234019 JEJ Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 wi OUTPUT C master KXO DUAL s n 079201 37475005 Oz Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x53 EDID
235. hat you disable the auto detect feature once the initial setup is completed If you later wish to replace one of the displays re enable the auto detect feature beforehand remember to disable it once the new display is up and running 60 Changing the IP Address of a Multi Viewer from the Monitor Wall Specifying Output Resolution from the Monitor Wall To specify output resolution from the Monitor Wall 1 Right click on the Monitor Wall background and choose Display Resolution from the menu that appears Refresh Load layout Unlatch Acknowledge all Hide dashboard Hide all dashboards System configuration Display resolution 2 Choose a value from the Default DVI resolution menu Display Resolution Use detected monitor resolution V Detected monitor resolution 1920x1200 60Hz Based on EDID Default DVI resolution 1920x1200 60Hz Based on EDID 1 1920x1200 60Hz Based on EDID 1 Barco 1400x1050 50Hz Barco 1400x1050 60Hz Clarity 1920x1080 50Hz 3 Click OK Changing the IP Address of a Multi Viewer from the Monitor Wall The IP address system name and other parameters can be set via a control panel on the monitor wall To change the IP address of the multi viewer from the monitor wall 1 Right click anywhere on the monitor wall point to Monitor Wall and then click System configuration 61 Operation of the Monitor Wall 62 GE t e oe IS Refresh Load layout Unla
236. he 1080i or 1080p format and 1280 x 720 for an HD SDI output in the 720p format Any other DVI RGBHV resolution will result in the HD SDI output being disabled Multi viewer output resolution HD SDI output interlaced HD SDI output progressive 1280 x 720 50Hz No output 720p 50Hz 1280 x 720 59 94Hz No output 720p 59 94Hz 1920 x 1080 50Hz 1080i 50Hz 1080p 50Hz 1920 x 1080 59 94Hz 1080i 59 94Hz 1080p 59 94Hz Any other HDMI resolutions No output No output To configure the scan format for a 1080 line signal at the SDI monitoring output 1 Inthe Room area click the display associated with the multi viewer output head whose properties you wish to configure 161 a Setting Up Rooms 162 2 Inthe Properties pane verify that the selected default resolution configured for the monitor wall display is compatible with the desired format at the SDI output for this head see table above and make sure that the Use detected monitor resolution option is disabled 3 Click the SDI Resolution box and then select the appropriate scan format Progressive or Interlaced Head 1 Layer 2 head for cascade configuration Unassigned Layer 3 head for cascade configuration Unassigned kd Size amp Position Detaut OVRGBHY resolution Use detected monitor resolution Monitor wall display resolution EDID auto detection disabled 1920x1080 B0Hz HDTV SDI Resolution Interlaced
237. he Enter device identifier box and click OK 5 Click the Interconnects tab 6 Position the pointer over the multi viewer icon then click and drag towards the Kayak production switcher icon A line representing the connection between the multi viewer and the device appears System Channels Soaurces Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions DeecriptionCalibrations Interconnect Router Configurations Router Connections Kaleido x 4RU Kayak Production Switcher Connection between the multi viewer and the device 7 Click the connection line between multi viewer and device and then click the Properties tab 8 Inthe Properties pane click the appropriate output in the RS 422 Com Port list 333 Tally Interface Devices System Channels Sources Destinations Rooma Layouts RCP users Actions Tips Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections Production Switcher Kaleido 4RU kd Connection s oe ee eee Disconnected Disconnected Output A Output E hiiia K 4RU Kayak Production Switcher Kaleido 9 Inthe Interconnects tab click the Kayak production switcher icon 10 In the Properties pane set the serial communications properties for the Kayak device as follows Tips Baud Rate 38400 o E Production Switcher Bee Baud rate a400 l Data bits i m Stop bits 1 Parity NONE J stop bits a Data
238. he duration of programs Three timer modes are available 1 UP timer counts up starting from zero up to a preset time 2 DOWN timer counts down from a preset time to zero and 3 REMAINING timer counts down from the current time until it reaches a preset time A timer monitor is based on a timer defined within the Kaleido X system Timers are defined and configured in XEdit Timer monitors can be configured directly on the monitor wall See Configuring Timers on page 207 Alarm monitors help you see the status of global and virtual alarms but their use is not limited to this type of alarms When any alarm level is assigned to an alarm monitor the status of this alarm is shown When using the global alarm at the text label level the alarm monitor displays the text value of the alarm which is a readable name See Configuring Alarm Monitors on page 216 V chip monitor The V chip monitor provides a visual indication of the V chip rating from the CC 608 metadata in an SD video signal or from the CC 608 legacy caption data when such data is present within an HD video signal See Configuring V Chip Monitors on page 219 Widget library Detailed Directions A widget library is a collection of predefined layout elements Monitors from a library can be used to help construct a layout More than one widget library can coexist Managing Layouts Opening an Existing Layout To open an existing layout
239. he multi viewer are on the same subnet then you can select the IP address of the multi viewer from the list Otherwise type the appropriate IP address in the box 3 Click OK A window appears prompting you to confirm that you really want to export data to the multi viewer 73 Managing Kaleido X Systems 4 Click Yes A progress window appears followed by a message stating whether the export succeeded or not 5 Click OK All data on the remote system is now replaced with content from the local workspace Creating a Backup Use the Create backup and Retrieve backup functions to manage copies of your system database This is equivalent to the usual Save as and Open functions and is useful not only for security purposes but also on sites where more than one system must be maintained Backing Up the Current Database To back up the current system database 1 On the Configure menu point to Database then to Create backup and click All Connect Disconnect gy Export Use Admin Configure Audio Bridge Terminal py Import Retrieve backup Resolutions Merge backup Audio scales O Do not prompt tor the database path Restore Database backup menu 74 Backing Up Resolutions The Create Backup window appears 2 In Create Backup select the location where you wish to save a backup copy of the current database content and then click Save The database is saved as a
240. he visual representation of time in a video or display It can be based on a reference LTC signal or on the Kaleido X system time Clocks can be in a digital or analog format Note The KMV 3901 3911 supports digital clocks only An action is an operation automatically performed in response to a specific trigger Monitor wall actions are directly associated with layout elements Background floating actions are actions that are global to the Kaleido X system Unlike monitor wall actions background actions are always available See Triggering Actions on page 56 Trigger Alarm monitor Alarm latch A trigger is an event that triggers an action An example of a trigger could be a double click on a monitor Background actions are triggered by alarms or by Gateway commands In XEdit when defining an action for a layout element you could specify for instance that a specific full screen layout be displayed on the monitor wall in response to the trigger Alarm monitors help you see the status of global and virtual alarms but their use is not limited to this type of alarms When any alarm level is assigned to an alarm monitor the Status of this alarm will be shown When using the global alarm at the text label level it will display the text value of the alarm which is a readable name See Configuring Alarm Monitors on page 216 To prevent operators from missing temporary alarms on the monitor wall layout elements that are cap
241. hen opening XEdit in offline mode the initial database is populated with the default configuration for a Kaleido X 7RU system including a fully populated frame all cards present and a set of predefined logical sources The KX Router logical router is also created as a 96 X 80 router where the 96 inputs are the multi viewer s logical sources the first 48 outputs are those from the two router cards and the last 32 outputs are monitor wall destinations Likewise when you replace the initial Kaleido X 7RU with the appropriate multi viewer model that matches your actual system you can choose to have your local database populated with a default set of logical sources and a preconfigured KX Router logical router Adding a Logical Source To add a logical source 1 Click the Channels Sources tab in the main window The sources table appears Adding a Logical Source System pChannelsSources Destinations Roome Layouts RCP users Actions Video Audio Text Alarm Time code Channels Que aaee Source ID videol audio texti alarm timecode Anput AfChannel OI Ta Anput AfChannel 02 2 A02 A02 Emb 1 inputAvideo 02 Wia TC Anput AiChannel 03 3 A03 A03 Emb 1 _ inputA video3 ADS Vid TC Anput A Channel 04 4 A04 A04 Emb1 inputdwideot ADA Wid TC Minput Channel 5 2 AOS ADS Emb 1 inpwtd wieeoS A05 vid TC Anput AiChannel 0g 6 A06 AD Emb 1 _ inputA video6 ADB Vid TC Anput AiChannel Or 7 AOF AOF Emb 1
242. herwise the values for blue and red would be modified following the application of the value for green 98 Multi Viewer Output Calibrations Calibrating the Color Saturation Note The KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer does not support color saturation calibration Each of the output heads in the multi viewer can drive a monitor wall display The image on the monitor wall contains both graphic elements created by the Kaleido X system and video signals that are passed through the system It is often useful to be able to modify the color saturation of the video so that its appearance within the graphic environment is pleasing The Color saturation calibration control provides this function The color saturation calibration does not affect the graphical elements within the monitor wall display To calibrate the color saturation 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Inthe list expand the multi viewer whose output heads you wish to calibrate System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions DescriptionCalibrations Interconnects Router Contiqurations Router Connections System me F M GPVGENLOCK KXA GPLGEN Pl OPTION A i OPTION B M INPUT A KXxI 16 M INFUT E KxI 16 M IMPUT KXI 16 M INPUT D KXl 16 M INPUT E KXI 16 i IN
243. his case Each router in the cascade has an ID To represent this arrangement in XEdit the router connected to the multi viewer is considered the physical router with all of the routers in the cascade represented by a physical level Even if the multi viewer is connected directly to a router i e no intermediary device you still use the mechanism of defining a physical level The distinction here is that there would only be one physical level To add one or more physical levels 1 In the Router Configurations tab click Add level 283 Routers amp Kaleido X Levels X Remove level 2 Inthe Physical Level Configuration window type a Level name e g Video Be Physical Level Configuration Level name Video Level size Video 128x72 Level or frame ID 0 3 Type the appropriate value in the Level or frame ID box whether a evel ID or a frame ID is relevant depends on the protocol in use Note This value identifies and must match the ID of the physical router in a cascade there is sometimes a jumper on the router that is used to set its ID or it may be done by changing a configuration setting using software that comes with the router The Kaleido X Software uses this ID to issue a command via the serial port e g Change this crosspoint on router ID 2 When the command is sent to routers on a MIDI bus each router will examine the command
244. i Video 04 Embedded audi videol Mame put A channel 01 Input Aihannel 02 Input AfChannel O03 Input A Channel 04 Input AvChannel 05 Input A Channel 0G Delete channel Assign item b Clear Pue aig Alarm Enbeded aut Baias ee Tre oe i Time code timecode T Time code ivy E B input 1 Pi input tabel Kaleido FRU d Input 2 i Switcher Input 3 Input 4 Note Refer to the table below for a list of valid source IDs and their meaning in the context of the Kalypso serial tally protocol Source IDs Kalypso 1 92 Inputs 1 92 93 M E 1 PGM A 94 M E 1 PGM B 95 M E 1 PGM C 96 M E 1 PGM D 97 M E 1 PVW A 98 M E 1 PVW 2 99 M E 2 PGM A 316 Source IDs Kalypso 100 M E 2 PGM B 101 M E 2 PGM C 102 M E 2 PGM D 103 M E 2 PVW A 104 M E 2 PVW 2 105 M E 3 PGMA 106 M E 3 PGM B 107 M E 3 PGM C 108 M E 3 PGM D 109 M E 3 PVW A 110 M E 3 PVW 2 111 Pgm Pst PGM A 112 Pgm Pst PGM B 113 Pgm Pst PGM C 114 Pgm Pst PGM D 115 Pgm Pst PVW A 116 Pgm Pst PVW 2 117 Test Signal 118 Black 119 Background 1 120 Background 2 121 Still Store 1 122 Still Store 2 123 Still Store 3 124 Still Store 4 Ross Video Production Switcher 317 Tally Interface Devices Source IDs Kalypso 125 Still Store 5 126 Still Store 6 127 Still Store 7 128 Still Store 8 2 M E sys
245. ialnorm is displayed as a numeric value between 31 and 1 dB Program Config is displayed as the Dolby E Program Config description Unavailable is displayed if the source is not being decoded or is not Dolby E Logical Source Assignment Logical source assignment is performed by dragging an AES pair onto a logical source s audio level Detailed Directions For Dolby E ifthe AES pair is calibrated as a Dolby E source then the 8 channels are available to be displayed by an audio monitor The channel displayed by the audio monitor depends on how the monitor was configured For Dolby VANC if the audio monitor is set to Auto or Dolby VANC the VANC metadata from the video of the assigned AES will be decoded The audio monitor will have access to all amended audio peaks depending on VANC program configuration regardless of which AES pair was assigned to the logical source Detailed Directions Configuring Video Audio Alarm Threshold To configure the threshold for a video or audio alarm 1 Connect to the multi viewer you wish to configure if you wish to apply the changes in real time see Connecting to a Multi Viewer on page 70 Note If this step is omitted then you will need to export the database to apply the calibration changes 2 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar 3 Navigate to the alarm whose threshold you wish to calibrate by expanding the ap
246. iewer to split feeds between the multi viewer and a vectorscope monitor you can use the multi viewer as a router Your feeds enter at a single point and one of the outputs can go to a vectorscope or quality control QC monitor so that instead of a large expensive station router in front you can have a smaller one you don t lose outputs for QC Q Is there a matrix GUI available for controlling routers via the multi viewer A Yes The Kaleido X Software version 4 00 and later incorporates the single bus and matrix view from iControl Router Control Software Q Is the External Router item in the Equipment library always used to add a router A Yes This is done for consistency with iControl Other types of equipment production switchers controllers tally boxes have their own specific entries in the Equipment library Q Can there be more than one external router A Yes Every router or router control panel that is connected to a serial port on the multi viewer corresponds to an External Router in XEdit Similarly every router with a unique IP address connected via TCP IP to the multi viewer is considered a unique External Router If the multi viewer is connected to a series of physical routers in a cascade configuration the cascade corresponds to a single External Router in XEdit where each router is a Level Q Why was the iControl Router Manager integrated into XEdit version 3 00 A Previously a version of the iContr
247. in Kaleido X 7RU 96 4 24 1 Admin Kaleido X 7RU x 2 192 6 36 1 Admin Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently To avoid mistakes in managing databases especially when multiple multi viewers are involved it is recommended to follow the rules below 90 Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently e Back up the database for each system to a central repository separate from the local workspace you use when working in XEdit offline e When using XEdit limit yourself to a single workspace When working online the local workspace is not used When working offline first either import the database from the appropriate multi viewer into your XEdit workspace or retrieve the latest backup for the system you wish to work on When your work session in XEdit is complete always create a new backup of the database regardless of whether you were working online or offline The next sections describe three typical situations summarized below Online Offline System restore from backup offline 1 Work in XEdit 1 Import database from multi 1 Retrieve backup from central repository into 2 Backup database from viewer into local workspace local workspace multi viewer to 2 Work in XEdit 2 Work in XEdit if needed central repository 3 and then backup database from local Backup database from local l workspace to central repository workspace to central repository 3 Export database from local workspace to 4 Expor
248. ing a Room To close a room e On the File menu click Close Alternatively click the Close button on the toolbar Adding Displays To add a display to a room 1 Select a display from the display library and drag it onto the room area Alternatively click the Display button on the toolbar and then click the room area to add a custom display Managing Rooms System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions pepe Rooms A Rooms Room1 l mz E e view fiters Default SN Dupuy Dupuy See Ou TRUTE Sec OU TRUTS Resolution YESA 1260x1024 60Hz Aspect ratio 1250 1000 Diagonal size 65 inch v System a Height 1024 mm Width 1280 mm v BE Kaleido x 4RU 10 6 5 140 Rotation normal Vr 7 0 OUTPUT A KXO DUBL pon oe x 0 y 0 Head 1 Room1 Head 2 Room v be OUTPUT B KXO DUAL lt lt S anaa pn E a an nn OS e Filtered System list Display library Roomarea Selected display Properties of the selected display Note All currently open display libraries appear on the Tools pane Custom display libraries are stored separately from the XEdit workspace See Managing Display Libraries on page 166 for details 2 Expand the filtered System list in the Tools pane and then drag the appropriate output head onto a display in the Rooms tab Display a System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions
249. ing mode The color saturation of an RGB output signal can be adjusted so that colors in the video windows will match the graphic elements introduced by the Kaleido X around them on the corresponding display See Calibrating the Color Saturation on page 99 Depending on your purposes key material provided through the DVI input can be set either as a background or as a foreground for the layout shown on the monitor wall See Calibrating the DVI Keying Mode on page 101 Audio monitoring delay Audio monitoring color The audio monitoring delay parameter can be adjusted to optimize the relative timing of the audio and video signals on the monitor wall display See Calibrating the Audio Monitoring Delay on page 102 Audio monitors can have an indicator that changes color depending on the output display where audio monitoring of the associated audio level is taking place The default color is a shade of blue See Calibrating the Audio Monitoring Color on page 104 Multi Viewer Input Calibrations Detail enhancer Dynamic range The purpose of the detail enhancer parameter is to recover sharpness that may have been lost in the de interlacing and scaling process See Calibrating Detail Enhancement and Dynamic Range on page 111 The dynamic range parameter determines the color model to be applied either full range RGB 0 255 or video RGB 16 235 Full range RGB is also called computer RGB video RGB i
250. ion 1 In XEdit connect to System B the multi viewer that was unavailable when the change was made once it is available again 83 az Managing Kaleido X Systems 84 Inthe Description Calibrations tab remove System A from the cluster and then add it back to the cluster If other cluster members were unavailable when the change was made e g if System A is a KMV 3901 3911 whose name or IP address was changed from the Densit frame s control panel or from the KMV 3901 3911 control panel in iControl then repeat the previous steps for each If only the IP address was changed then no further action is required Otherwise if the system name was changed then proceed as follows Connect to System A Change something in every room e g move a display and then bring it back to its initial position to enable the Save button Save the room This will replicate the proper room configuration to the other members of the cluster At the same time the layouts will also be updated on all multi viewers in the cluster Configuring the System Representation Configuring the System Representation In the case of Kaleido X 4RU Kaleido X 7RU and expansion systems configuring your system s representation in XEdit includes adding or removing cards until the representation matches the hardware configuration of your actual multi viewer system Note This topic applies to the Kaleido X 4RU Kaleido X 7RU
251. ion the multi viewer can monitor the presence of up to three more pages without decoding their content Refer To Setting a Video Monitor s Text Mode on page 198 and Displaying Subtitles and Closed Caption Text on page 44 for more information The following table contains a list of supported video formats and the type of captioning teletext or subtitling data that is decoded by default for each video format when a video monitor s text mode is set to Auto sense DIVCC 708 CC 608 teletext OP 47 or WST or none Note The EIA 708 standard supports legacy EIA 608 data In the case of an HD SDI source carrying both 708 captions and 608 legacy caption data the multi viewer will display the 708 captions and automatically fall back to displaying the 608 captions only if the 708 data becomes unavailable Video format Decoded data Video format Decoded data 720p 59 94 Hz DIVCC 708 SDI 525 507 generic CC 608 720p 59 94 Hz EM DIVCC 708 720x480p 59 94 Hz DTVCC 708 720p 29 97 Hz DIVCC 708 UNKNOWN HD None 720p 29 97 Hz EM DIVCC 708 UNKNOWN SD None 720p 50 Hz Teletext INVALID None 720p 50 Hz EM Teletext NTSC M CC 608 720p 25 Hz Teletext PAL BGDHI Teletext 720p 25 Hz EM Teletext PAL 60 Hz Teletext 720p 24 Hz DIVCC 708 NTSC 50 Hz CC 608 720p 24 Hz EM DIVCC 708 NTSC 4 43 CC 608 10801 59 94 Hz 30 Hz PSF DTVCC 708 PAL N Teletext 1080p 29 97 Hz DTVCC 708 PAL M Teletext Dolby E AC 3
252. ion threshold Luma too high detection threshold Set the level in IRE or mV below which the signal will be considered to be black By default the threshold is set at 8 IRE and the alarm will be triggered after 3 occurrences of at least 5 seconds of black within a period of 1 minute Set the level in IRE or mV above which Luma Too High will be reported Freeze sensitivity 126 Freeze detection is done by comparing successive frames Noise in the signal could disrupt this process so filtering is added to remove it Adjust the sensitivity according to the signal being monitored on a range of 0 fora noisy signal to 16 for a clean signal By default the sensitivity is set at 8 and the alarm will be triggered after 3 occurrences of a least 5 seconds of freeze within a period of 1 minute Once the alarm is triggered it will only be released if no other freeze condition is detected over the specified reset delay period by default there is no delay in order to avoid unwanted alarm flickering that could be caused by glitches on the signal Reset delay Configuring Video Audio Alarm Threshold The alarm reset delay is the time allowed for a Video Freeze alarm state to be normal before the system actually clears the alarm This helps eliminate the false releasing of Video Freeze alarms The default value is 0 on a range of 0 to 60 seconds Note that when setting the reset delay to any value other than 0 it may happen that the
253. ions Scripts Left tally Mouse click Right tally Mouse click and UMD click Md Actions Scripts Left tally Mouse click Right tally Mouse click UMD click Action triggered when the widget is clicked 4 Click the button that appeared at the end of the box you clicked The Action Editor window appears 239 10 Creating Actions 5 In Action Editor click an action and then drag it from the Action List pane into the middle pane under either the Single Click or Double Click tab Action Editor UMD click Action list Double Click Single Click Load a new layout Load a new layout Load a new layout Reset a timer Pause a timer Start a timer Monitor audio Switch router crosspoint Set GPI output Show full screen layout Hide full screen layout Assign channel Custom Load a new layout 240 ma S eren Select the action in the middle pane In the right pane specify the attributes of the action Repeat the procedure to add more actions If multiple actions are specified the trigger e g single click on UMD will cause all of these actions to be executed in order Action Editor UMD click Action list Double Click Single Click Switch router crosspoint Load a new layout Reset a timer Load a new layout Switch router crosspoint Paar Pause a timer OLIER Start a timer Monitor audio Swich router crosspoint Destination Set GFI output Show full screen la
254. ions as follows Extension Enable On Full Table Enable On Notes e Refer to the Kahuna User Instruction Manual for further details on setting up the port protocols and tally protocol parameters see https kahuna snellgroup com kahunaclub kahunacare documents php e Although it is possible to define user configuration source names on the Kahuna switcher these are not transmitted over the serial tally interface The switcher only transmits the engineering configuration source names To set up the multi viewer 1 Launch XEdit 325 Tally Interface Devices 2 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar The main pane displays the System hierarchical list and the Tools pane displays the equipment library when the root of the System list is selected 3 Drag the Kahuna production switcher device from the equipment library onto the root of the System hierarchical list Alternatively right click the list root and then click Insert Kahuna on the shortcut menu A window appears prompting you for a device identifier Device identifier input window 4 Typeaname for the Kahuna production switcher in the Enter device identifier box and then click OK 5 Click the Interconnects tab 6 Position the pointer over the multi viewer icon then click and drag towards the Kahuna production switcher icon A line representing the connection be
255. ips NewPhysicalriouter Kaleido x RU JEEZ Disconnected Metwork TCRAP At this point there are still no properties associated with the new physical router 6 Click the Router Configurations tab Notice that in the Routers list under Physical Routers XEdit has added the new physical router 281 Routers amp Kaleido X System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router configurations configurations Router connections General information Router name NewPhysicalRouter Router protocol Datatek B Connection type Serial B rCommunication parameters Port name Output B Parity None B Bits per second 19200 B Stop bits 1 i Data bits 8 B Flow control None E rLevels Routers Routers v Physical Routers v Kaleido x 7RU Internal Router 2 i bel OPTION A Video 120x48 O v O Logical Routers v 1 KX Router 96x80 Fis D 0 Video v O 0 Internal router 96x24 i 0 Video Add level Note A physical router associated with the multi viewer s own internal router module is also predefined In the case of a Kaleido X 7RU multi viewer that does not have any router card there will be no entries in the Levels list for this physical router 7 Select the appropriate protocol in the Router protocol list System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms T L
256. isanadsyeanasn aO E AE AT A AE 136 Creating and Configuring Logical SOUrCES cc cece cece e cence eect eect eect ee eens teen tenetenetaees 136 Configuring Alarmi LEVELS erresiren rrtt naar ETEEN time aioe EAEAN moma 141 Monitoring Internal Router Outputs on the Monitor Wall Sample Scenario nuenean 142 8 Setting Up Rooms 145 KEV CONCEDIS E E E A EE E EA E EEE E T A 145 DEtAIEC DINCCHONS sccastsccsvaian sans E A AT E E ae eulenes 146 Managing ROOMS eneren Goss states aa EEE naa A EEE EEE TA Meee E a N 146 CONMGUMNG Displays serieren raara dott EA ET E EAE NARE 152 Managing Display DANES 2 4 3 3 s y aeniesinedeseavetidencecn A EEEE E EE E REEE 166 9 Creating Layouts 171 REV CONCEDIS O E A E E E A EEE EE E EEE ET 171 Detaned Direction eseina sieren na AE A E TAEA 173 Managing Layouts 220 a5sesit aie er EE TAE A E T EE EE EO O 173 Configuring Video Monitors o ossa ma caren tate ceen seas cheewen Saten EECA E A mma 187 Configuring Audio MONIO ercrsptrerensitrererysiciptseien i reeet o EAEE EEEE 199 Confiounng Audio Stale eritin arna DETA ATEA E ANAD ATENE 201 COMMUTING TIMERS ix sxc ccechotnculra net sehitaseaded A a A E OEE E 207 CONMOUING MDS sts caswar sees ane chtevaait aula Reaeuntasuee see Auntie elie nica alts Recut ween 214 Configuring Alarm Monitors secsiua sse he oced rb std areata chavaetuielon ae athueah aerate onittoeiineos hake ewateanuesidor 216 Configuring Metadata Monitors ccc ccc cece cence e e
257. ite SDI HD SD up to 768 Channels Frame Outputs Eal Embedded Audio Extraction Reporting of alarms to INPUTS an Ti iControl SNMP based signal and facility monitoring HD SDI HD SDI DYI Bridge a channel DYI inputs with loop out Densit Series IRD 3801 compressed video MPEG to HD SDI pee t j Video MPEG BM Kaleido X 7RU system overview Kaleido X 7RU x 2 Expansion Since version 3 00 of Miranda s Kaleido X Software it is possible to expand the input connectivity of one Kaleido X 7RU frame to include that of a second The two frames each with its own expansion KXO EXP card are connected by a high bandwidth cable such that all the output KXO modules on each frame up to 6 in total have access to all inputs KXI on each frame up to 192 in total without any blocking or bandwidth limitations Using XEdit the two frames can be configured as a single system allowing rooms to share input modules from either frame The expansion card allows seamless sharing of video audio monitoring output time 12 Kaleido X Cluster code inputs reference input metadata information CC XDS alarms etc and audio level meter data Refer to the Kaleido X 7RU Expansion chapter in the Kaleido X ZRU Hardware Description amp Installation Manual for more information 12 Multi image HD SDI SD SDI DVI RGBHV router Mid plane Expansion Multi viewer Control Interconnection P ____
258. itor Drag any of the corner handles inwards or outwards The video monitor and the associated video window will become smaller or larger and they will both keep their aspect ratio e Drag any of the side handles inwards or outwards The bounds of the video monitor will change while the video window will still keep its aspect ratio e Change the aspect ratio property of the video monitor See Setting a Video Monitor s Aspect Ratio below The video monitor will keep its bounds and the video window will be resized to fill as much of the video monitor area as possible given the new aspect ratio Setting a Video Monitor s Aspect Ratio To set a video monitor s aspect ratio 1 Click the video monitor whose aspect ratio you wish to configure Video monitor with an aspect ratio of 16 9 Note Double click the video if is part of a composite monitor 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Current aspect ratio box and then select the appropriate aspect ratio from the list 187 az Creating Layouts W ADpEarancEe O OOOO O O Bevel none Hide at loss of video v kd Aspect ratio Current aspect ratio 6 9 _ Custom aspect ratio Automatic Aspect Ratio 4 3 Follow AFOWYSS i Default SD AFD SS value Mone Default HD AFD value Mone Y Mode Underscan Custom overscan Overscan L 5 0 T 5 0 F 5 0 B 5 0 5 Aspect ratio selection The selected aspect ratio is applied to the video window within the
259. itor as needed You may choose to layer this monitor on top of the video window within a composite See Working with Composite Monitors on page 225 for instructions on how to add elements to a composite Alarm monitor InoutA videos Note On the monitor wall an alarm monitor positioned over a video window has the following default behavior e Ifthe source assigned to the alarm monitor is an active alarm red the alarm monitor is visible The video transparency settings configured in XEdit for this alarm monitor apply to the part of the monitor that overlaps the video window e Ifthe source assigned to the alarm monitor is an inactive alarm green the alarm monitor is not visible on the monitor wall If the alarm monitor partially overlaps the video window then the part of the monitor that does not cover the video window remains visible green 2 Inthe Properties pane set the transparency attribute to the appropriate value for your purposes by clicking the Transparency box and then using the slider or typing the desired value directly into the box kd AD pearance Bevel raised Text font Dialog plain 0 12 Text format shrink Text horizontal alignment Lett Text vertical alignment Inzide UM edges angle vertical Set the other appearance attributes as desired 3 Inthe Alarms Tallies section set the appropriate color and video transparency scheme for the text and background to achieve the desired alarm rep
260. itor wall or the multi viewer s own router outputs if applicable Just as the built in routing the logical source routing can be controlled by any external router control device or software Key Concepts Term External Router Physical router Key Concepts Description In XEdit s Equipment library External Router refers to an upstream router that will be controlled by the multi viewer For example the multi viewer can request a specific source from the external router to be routed to a specific video monitor on the monitor wall In XEdit a physical router is a software representation of router equipment Physical routers hold information on how to communicate with the equipment as well as the number of physical levels associated with the router Physical level Some router equipment can have multiple physical levels which are subsets of the physical router s inputs and outputs Protocol The instruction set and parameters used to communicate with and control a device The Router controller router protocols supported in iControl are also supported by Kaleido X and vice versa although there might be a slight lag between the time the latest software versions are released Router controller refers to any software or hardware that can request a crosspoint change on a router The Router Control Software Single Bus and Matrix View applications also part of the iRouter Router Control Software packaged with iControl App
261. ize from one monitor to another To use the Copy properties tool 1 In the Layouts tab click the monitor whose properties you wish to copy to another monitor of the same type 5 6 Format Painting The monitor s boundary box appears The Copy properties button becomes available on the toolbar Click the Copy Properties button to switch into format painting mode Point to another monitor of the same kind in the layout The pointer changes to a pointing finger 1 indicating that the properties of the first monitor whose boundary box is still shown can be copied onto the monitor beneath the pointer Click the monitor beneath the pointer to copy the properties onto that monitor Its appearance will change to reflect the new properties Note To have the width and height copied as well press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the monitor Repeat this for each monitor whose properties you wish to change Click the Select button on the toolbar to exit format painting mode when you have finished Copying Size from one Monitor to Another The size of every monitor in a layout can be adjusted by the user by dragging handles on the boundary box that appears when the monitor is selected The Copy size tool copies the size from one monitor to another monitor of the same kind Note The Copy size tool does not copy any other property from one monitor to another To use the Copy size tool 1 In the Layouts
262. l assignments inpuid vides id Al4 Vid TC M5 AS Embi neutd witeodS M15 Vid TC input AsChanne input AsChannel 15 15 Anput AiChannel 16 16 O A16 A16 Emb1 neutd videote M16 Yid TC Anput Bchannel 04 Anput BiChannel 02 input Bichannel 03 Anput BChannel 04 Anput BiChannel 05 input Bichannel 06 Anput Bichannel OF input Bachannel 08 INPUT Bevideo OF Note It is possible to drag the incremental copy zone up or down The physical assignments will be decremented or incremented accordingly Adding Levels Note To be able to monitor a 3D stereoscopic signal you must first add a second video level to your logical sources so you have a level for each eye and then for each video monitor or composite you wish to use for 3D monitoring you must assign the left eye and right eye levels To add a level 1 Click the Channels Sources tab in the main window 139 Creating Logical Sources 140 The level categories appear as the main column headings in the sources table System Destinations Rooms Layouts ROP users Actions Video Audio Text Alarm Time code lt Level categories ChannelsSources Source ID video audiot text alarmi timecode input AChannel O11 ADI Emb1 jinputdvideot A01 vid TC inout faChannel 02 2 Age A02 Emb1 inewtd wideo AOZ Vid TC input AChannel 03 3 ADS AOS Embi mputd wiedeos JAD vid TC input AtChannel ogy 4 A04 A04 Emb1 inewttvideot ADA Vid TC An
263. l or Major Critical Major and Minor The status indicator will blink when the current status is critical or major The status indicator will blink when the current status is critical major or minor 6 Select the Display alarm latch check box to enable the latched status indicators in each corner of the video window 197 az Creating Layouts Setting a Video Monitor s Text Mode Note Closed captioning subtitling text services can be enabled by purchasing the Extraction of CC Subtitling and XDS data option The CC 608 CC 708 XDS and Subtitling WST are all activated as a single option In the case of the Kaleido X 4RU and Kaleido X 7RU models one key is needed per input card See Enabling Options on page 371 for more information To set the subtitling properties of a video monitor 1 In XEdit open a layout and click the video monitor for which you wish to specify subtitling properties The CC Subtitling settings appear in the Properties pane Layouts LayoutMuttihnead layout Foon Anput Z Dynamic range Full range 0 255 Kill chroma y Text enabled O Text mode Auto sense Text colors Auto ElA bue Service l FIS 708 service L 2 Select the Text enabled check box Dynamic range Full range 0 255 ry Kill chroma v Text enabled m Text mode Auto sense Text colors Auta BA 6ile Service l EI4 708 service 1 subtitling page T 3 Select a value from the Text mode list
264. l someone acknowledges the associated alarm For UMDs the latch color can be set to follow the background or the text color configuration To set the alarm reporting features for a UMD text and tallies 1 In XEdit open a layout and click the UMD whose alarm reporting behavior you wish to configure 2 Inthe Properties pane scroll down to the Alarms Tallies section to set the appropriate text and background color scheme Alarms Tallies Showe tallies OMD OMD UMD OMi UMD UMD UMD UMD OMD OMD UMC UMD UMD UMD UMC Right tally Right tally Right tally Right tally Right tally Right tally Right tally Text color Disabled text color Mormalfok text color Minors varning text color Major text color CriticalError text color Background Disabled background color Mormalfok background color Minor Yarning background color Major background color CriticalError background color Display alarm latch Latch colors Blink mode Background Disabled color Mormaliork color Minor Yearning color bajor color Critical Errar color Display alarm latch ally Blink mode Lett tally Lett tally Left tally Left tally Lett tally Lett tally Left tally Lett tally Background Disabled color Mormal ok color MinorYarning color Major color CriticalErrar color Display alarm latch Blink mode R255 G 255 B 255 CD R 255 G 255 5 255 ERB F0 G70 Bo GS R17
265. lays Foor Rooms Roomd z E view fiters ka I QUTUb head hd Size amp Position Default DWI resolution YESA 1600x1200 50Hz Use detected monitor r Aspect ratio 4 3 Diagonal size S00 mm Height 300 mm wWicth 400 mm Rotation normal Position x 1130 153 Allow dashboard display v Display properties Enabling EDID Auto Detection in XEdit Note The monitor EDID Auto detect feature is enabled by default in order to facilitate the initial setup of a Kaleido X system To avoid problems Miranda recommends that you disable the auto detect feature once the initial setup is completed If you later wish to replace one of the displays re enable the auto detect feature beforehand remember to disable it once the new display is up and running To enable EDID auto detection for a display 1 In the Rooms tab click the display you wish to configure 2 Select the Use detected monitor resolution check box 153 a Setting Up Rooms Rooma Rooms Roomn E kd Assignment WUT Tesi OUTPUT 4 Head 2 kd Size amp Position m lt j Select to enable Display yonal si of EDID information Slot OUTPUT A jh Head Head 2 vidth x 1926 0 pe Pri 3 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Configuring Custom Resolutions from the Tools Menu To create a custom display resolution from the Tools menu 1 On the Tools men
266. lays are perfectly positioned for spanning You must also ensure that each display has the same pixel per inch or per mm ratio calculated as horizontal resolution pixels divided by display width inches or mm and vertical resolution divided by display height Ideally you should use displays that have the same physical size and resolution The figure below shows two displays properly sized and positioned for monitor spanning System Channels Rooma Layouts RCP users Actions Display Slot QUTPUT A Displa Head Head 1 Play Slot QUTPUT A Head Head 2 z kd Assignment UBUD head QUTEUD head v u Fesolution YESA 00x600 60Hz Resalution 1366x765 ms0Hs Aspect ratio 43 Aspect ratio 16 9 Diagonal size 501 mm Diagonal size T4 mm Height 300 mm Height 34 mm wicth 400 mm Width Ba mm Rotation narmal Rotation narmal Position x 15 17 Position x 415 y 17 Horizontal 800 pixels 400 mm 2 pixels mm Horizontal 1366 pixels 683 mm 2 pixels mm Vertical 600 pixels 300 mm 2 pixels mm Vertical 768 pixels 384 mm 2 pixels mm Notes e Monitors can extend outside the edge of a display but not completely The use of a mouse is not completely supported with spanned video monitors e Inthe case of a KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer which supports a maximum of eight video monitors over two displays a spanned video monitor counts as two i e if you have one spanned video monitor you can only add six o
267. le Estimated time left Download to Transfer rate _ Close this dialog box whe MSs While files from the Intemet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not run or save this software What s the isk Another security warning may appear 380 Detailed Directions Internet Explorer Security Warning Do you want to run this software Name JavafTM SE Runtime Environment 6 0 Update 20 Publisher Sun Microsystems Inc More options Ri Don t Run _ d While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer Only run software from publishers you trust What s the risk 3 Click Run to open the installer file You will be prompted to accept the license agreement ig Java Setup Welcome Ed S eee SUN Welcome to Java Java provides safe and secure access to the world of amazing Java content From business solutions to helpful utilities and entertainment Java makes your internet experience come to life No personal information is gathered as part of our install process For more information on what we do collect see http java com data View License Agreement Click Install to accept the license agreement and install Java now 4 Review the license agreement if you wish and then click Install to proceed Java Setup will update your PC or laptop 5 Click Close once the installation has comple
268. lect the appropriate date and time formats In the case of an analog or combo type clock you can also add a clock logo see Inserting a Clock Logo below 222 Configuring Clocks Inthe case of an analog or combo clock if the clock is to be displayed against a pink background RGB 255 0 255 or similar or if the current layout belongs to a cascade room see page 65 then make sure to clear the Border antialiasing check box kd Appearance 12 hour display Background color BBR G7 67 Bevel raised Border antialiasing C A Border colar BB Fo o en Clock type combo Date format Medium format Date on Logo Miranda logo Minutesvhours color MMB R153 G 06 0 Scale color F204 G 204 B 255 Seconds color LF 204 G 204 B 204 Transparency O v Mouse click Border antialiasing Select the check box to have the clock border use antialiasing Applies only to circular clack Antialiasing should be turned off when a circular clock is used in a cascade configuration In such cases if border antialiasing remains enabled the clock will have a pink outline on the monitor wall 4 Define actions associated to this layout element see Creating Monitor Wall Actions on page 239 5 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Inserting a Clock Logo To insert a clock logo 1 Click the Layouts tab and open the layout that contains the clock whose background logo you wish to
269. letet amp Subtitling Alarms Y Page 4 ae Page Selection Subtitling holding time H Teletext b Subtitle Page B Page T t Page O E Loudness Dialnorm XDS filtering Y BE Kaleido X16 D VIDEO INPUTS WeVideo D1 l ideo Alarms Video Calibrations P 608 Alarms P Teletext amp Subtitling Alarms Loudness Dialnorm aD Filtering PoNTSC Standard F DTYCC Alarms AFD amp WSS Dolby E Selection Set the delay between 5 and 360 seconds after which subtitles are cleared kd Calibration Subtitling holding time Sec i Set the holding time between 5 and 360 seconds for each XDS metadata element APS ASB CGMS A channel number elapsed time network name program description ID name length and type station ID TSID name time of day time zone V chip rating kdl Calibration APS holding time sec ASB holding time sec COMS 4 holding time sec Channel number holding time sec Flapse time halding time sec Metwork name holding time sec Program description holding time Sec Program id holding time ec Program length holding time sec Program name holding time Sec Program type holding time Sec Station id holding time sec TSD name holding time sec Time of day holding time sec Time zone holding time Sec CHIF holding time sec i e i 114 Router Output Calibrations DTVCC holding time Set the delay between 15 a
270. lication Servers are examples of router controllers They are integrated with the Kaleido X Software and can be launched from the Kaleido X home page Logical router A logical router is a software abstraction that permits the control of multiple physical routers levels as a single entity Logical routers have a unique matrix ID within a router manager Logical level Matrix ID A logical level defines the mapping between logical and physical inputs and the mapping between the logical and physical outputs A unique identifier used by a router controller to identify which router is the target of a switching command 26 Routers amp Kaleido X 268 Term KX Router logical router Description The logical sources defined in XEdit s Channels Sources tab see page 135 are considered sources for the KX Router logical router whose destinations are either monitors on the monitor wall or router outputs for multi viewer models that have them Source IDs to be used for routing purposes are assigned in XEdit s Channels Sources tab These IDs can be used by external router control software or devices The logical destinations for the KX Router logical router are configured in the Destinations tab Router service The Kaleido X router service is the software component responsible for communicating with physical routers and for managing crosspoint change requests coming from router controllers 1 i e the
271. lor Text color attributes are now supported for teletext WST OP 47 See Setting a Video Monitor s Text Mode on page 198 Note Other text formatting attributes specified in the OP 42 WST and OP 47 HD teletext standards e g background colors italic and bold type font case are not supported On the monitor wall closed captions CC DIVCC appear in white against a black background i New Features Support for embedded audio at the HD SDI monitoring output All multi viewer models now support monitoring of one audio pair embedded on Group 1 at the HD SDI output Note In the case of the Kaleido X16 support for audio monitoring at the HD SDI output requires version 5 30 or later of the Kaleido X Software and recent hardware In the XAdmin Status and Options page under SYSTEM the value indicated for the Card revision attribute must be 0x4 or more e KMV 3901 3911 Support for dynamic range calibration See Calibrating Detail Enhancement and Dynamic Range on page 111 e Custom images The maximum size for a custom safe area image clock logo or layout background image has increased to 256 KB See Selecting a Background Image for a Layout on page 182 Inserting a Clock Logo on page 223 and Adding a Custom Safe Area Image on page 189 Features Introduced in Kaleido X Version 5 20 Support for 3D stereoscopic sources Kaleido X Kaleido X16 and KMV 3901 8x2 now support merging two distinct
272. ls is transported as regular AES channels up to 8 in the SDI embedded audio metadata is extracted from VANC packets 123 6 Configuring Alarms 124 Program config Dialnorm for program 1 VU and Peak meters come from the AES in PCM Definitions Term Definition Dolby E Stream A coded compressed 8 channel digital stream that fits inside an AES channel L R Dolby Metadata Metadata of Dolby E type such as dialnorm and program config Dolby E Extracted Metadata VANC Extracted Metadata Dolby metadata extracted from a Dolby E stream Includes audio level data from encoded audio data Dolby metadata extracted from VANC packets Audio level data is probed directly from the PCM AES signal Embedded audio source or channel 1 of the 8 SDI or HD SDI embedded audio AES signals AES Signal or Source Multichannel Audio A bit stream for audio service Audio service or essence composed of more than 2 channels of audio more than Left and Right Audio Format The format of each audio channel PCM Dolby AC 3 Dolby E other or Unavailable is reported as a text attribute that can be assigned to a text level within a logical source Metadata The metadata extracted from the VANC and from the Dolby E is available as text in the XEdit hierarchical system list and therefore can be exposed via any layout element capable of displaying text levels from logical sources currently only UMDs D
273. lso appears System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Display 21 O00 Enan ss cardsiotname Ere Ee ns OUCDUt head name SUS A eS ee system name cluster systems only WI i ram dja A room can only be saved once every display has been assigned an output head One output head cannot be assigned to more than one display at a time When different displays are assigned the same output head if the displays are part of the same room then XEdit will issue an error message and prevent you from saving the room until the head assignment is corrected However to facilitate room management XEdit will let you assign the same head to displays that are located in different rooms but such conflicting assignments will be marked in red in the filtered System list displayed in the Tools pane and should be resolved by removing a conflicting display or by deleting the conflicting room Managing Rooms Tools System Channels Sources Destinations Layouts Rc display a Display Defaut Disoiav 0O OOOO O O T ii Slot OUTPUT A Head Head 1 a aa System Y System Ji Y Kaleido X 4RU F ua OUTPUT 4 KXO DUAL L Head 2 Roon F il OUTPUT B KxO BUAL Head T is Used in more than one room Roomi Foor ai Head 1 Room Slot OUTPUT B Head 2 Room Roomz Head Head 2 PA i pn ri ije M orena ce
274. ltering NTSC Standard P DTVCC Alarms P AFDWSS g olby E Selection Y embedded audio 1 i z Silence Lett H Silence Right Jasi ot cc mp 4 Click the Properties tab 5 Inthe Dolby E Selection list choose the AES pair embedded audio 1 to embedded audio 8 to be decoded in Dolby E kd Calibration Dolby E Selection Embedded Audio 1 is Embedded Audio 2 Embedded Audio 3 Embedded Audio 4 Embedded Audio 5 Embedded Audio 6 Embedded Audio 7 Embedded Audio 5 Calibrating Automatic Aspect Ratio Decoding Aspect ratio information can be encoded following different standards The following table shows the different standards and their availability according to the signal type Signal type Standard HD SD 525 SD 625 WSS Yes AFD VI Yes AFD 2016 Yes Yes 110 Multi Viewer Input Calibrations Note For AFD VI the AFD can be encoded as 4 bits or 3 bits legacy To select the AFD source for an SD signal 1 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears In the list expand the multi viewer whose inputs you wish to calibrate Expand the appropriate input and then click AFD WSS fae Legacy AFD 3 bits SD AFD Source PTD INPUT A KXI 16 a ob FVideo Of P Wideo Alarms Videolndex P video Calibrations SMPTE 2011 6 Auto io B
275. lti viewer inputs and external router outputs that feed them When you want to assign a source from the upstream router to a video monitor on the monitor wall the Kaleido X Software uses this information to allocate a tie line i e one of the multi viewer s physical input connectors that you reserved for this purpose and the upstream router s output it is connected to and initiate the appropriate crosspoint change on the upstream router 303 Routers amp Kaleido X Assign Source Channel 04 Assign Source window on the monitor wall DVI outputs to monitor wall GOCOOSSGSOSGOOGOOCOO INPUTS 1 to 96 entering KXI cards QUTPUTs 1 to N exiting router some of which are physically connected to KXI INPUTs 1 An operator right clicks a monitor and assigns a logical source by using the Assign Source window Note In the case of the Kaleido X and Kaleido X16 multi viewer models it is also possible to select a source from the Assign router input menu However as of version 5 20 of the Kaleido X Software Miranda strongly recommends configuring the KX Router logical router to cover all routing purposes within the multi viewer system 2 The Router Connections tab in XEdit allows you to map physical connections between a number of INPUT connectors on the multi viewer and the upstream router s OUTPUTs that feed them which allows the Kaleido X Software to determine the cros
276. lves defining the timer itself name behavior time reference etc and then creating one or more timer monitors to display the timer on a monitor wall Timers can be created modified deleted added to a layout assigned to logical sources rooms or individual RCP users and controlled from the Kaleido RCP2 Note In addition to timer monitors Gateway commands can be used to interact with timers Refer to the Kaleido Remote Control Protocol Gateway guide for details Adding Timers to the System To define a timer 1 On the Tools menu click Edit timers Edit audio scales Edit resolutions Edittimers f a rido X qn External Router Y I GPGeNLo Enicoda isan T 2 In Timer Editor click New 3 Type a name for your new timer in the Timer name box 207 az Creating Layouts Selected Timer id General Timer name Timer mode Timer end Repeat Preset Duration 00 00 00 Start Time Hold Time Code Reference Internal clack 4 Choose the appropriate mode from the Timer mode list kd General Timer name Timer mode Timer end Repeat Preset Start Time Time Code Reference Internal clack Up The timer counts up starting from zero up to the Preset time Down The timer counts down from the Preset time to zero Remaining The timer counts down from the current time until it reaches the Preset time This mode is a one shot mode the timer will not automati
277. ly Interface Devices Miranda s multi viewer systems support most production switchers and other tally interface devices such as UMD controllers and automation systems via serial or network connection The multi viewer can dynamically update monitor wall elements to reflect text and status updates from the device Configuring Kalypso Andromeda Serial to TCP IP Dispatcher and TSL Serial Devices This instruction set covers the configuration of the Kalypso Andromeda Serial to TCP IP Dispatcher and TSL serial devices that can be added to a multi viewer system to receive and interpret serial tally information from peripheral devices The illustrations options or properties shown below may vary depending on your actual system To configure a Kalypso Andromeda Serial to TCP IP Dispatcher or TSL serial device 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar The main pane displays the System hierarchical list and the Tools pane displays the equipment library when the root of the System list is selected 2 Drag the appropriate peripheral device from the equipment library onto the root of the System hierarchical list Alternatively right click the list root and then click the appropriate peripheral device on the shortcut menu A window appears prompting you for a device identifier 311 Tally Interface Devices 312 Device identifier input window Type the n
278. menu click Open widget library e On the File menu point to Open recent and then select from the list of recently used widget libraries Note It is possible to have multiple custom libraries open at the same time 235 iz Creating Layouts 236 This chapter describes how to configure and trigger monitor wall actions and background actions Overview An action is an operation automatically performed in response to a specific trigger A monitor wall action is directly associated with a monitor belonging to a specific layout and can only be activated when that layout is loaded on the monitor wall whereas a background action can be triggered at any time by any alarm on the Kaleido X Unlike monitor wall actions background actions are always available within a Kaleido X system regardless of what layouts are currently loaded Examples of actions Unlatch Acknowledge all Load layout e Assign logical source channel Set GPI output e Show Hide full screen layout Reset Pause Start a timer e Monitor audio e Switch router crosspoint e Custom JavaScript Background actions are configured using the XEdit application 237 10 Creating Actions Key Concepts Term Floating action Description A background action Layout A group of monitors or composite monitors arranged for display on a monitor wall XAdmin XEdit The application used to perform administrative functions e g
279. menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Changing a Display s Diagonal Size To change the diagonal size of a display in a room 1 Click the display whose properties you wish to configure 2 Click the Diagonal size box in the Properties pane Properties Tips Rooms Rooms Foor 1 view filters T Assignment Stat Bee OUTPUT 4 Head 1 Md Size amp Position Resolution 12602765 50Hz Aspect ratio Diagonal Size 146 1000 Height 703 mm width 605 mm Rotation normal Position x 220 y 291 Diagonal size 3 Select the appropriate unit of measurement from the list that appears inside the Diagonal size box and type the size 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 163 a Setting Up Rooms Changing a Display s Height To change the height of a display in a room 1 Click the display whose properties you wish to configure 2 Click the Height box in the Properties pane Rooms Foams rrr z W Assignment GLAUL Head OUTPUT 4 Head 1 id Size amp Position Resolution MESA 160021200 Ge60Hz Aspect ratio 16 9 Diagonal Size 1069 mm width 932 mm Rotation normal Position x 16 y 13 Height property 3 Select the appropriate unit of measurement from the list that appears inside the Height box and type the height 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the
280. meters determine the delay after which decoded metadata such as closed captions subtitles or XDS metadata will be cleared Requires the CC XDS option see Enabling Options on page 371 Refer to Calibrating Metadata Holding Time on page 113 for details The Zero VU dBu parameters determine the reference level to be applied to the selected analog from ABT input signal Its default value is 4 dBu ona range of 24 dBu to 8 dBu See Calibrating Zero VU Reference Level for an ABT Audio Source on page 107 The Zero VU dBFS parameters determine the reference level to be applied to the selected digital embedded or from ABT audio signal dBFS stands for decibels full scale Zero dBFS corresponds to the maximum possible level By default the reference level for a it is set to 20 dBFS on a range of 24 dBFS to 8 dBFS The extraction of digital audio requires the KXS HD EMB or KXS SD EMB option see Enabling Options on page 371 Refer to Calibrating Zero VU Reference Level for an Embedded Audio Source on page 106 for details Loudness dialnorm The dialnorm value that can be found in the Dolby VANC metadata is an indication of the average level of dialogue in the audio stream The loudness is a measure of the average level of an audio stream It is possible to configure alarms that will be triggered whenever the measured loudness is not within an acceptable range 1 compared to the encoded dialnorm or 2 c
281. mm P e Roomz n New uzer i Delete User RCP users shortcut menu A new user is added to the RCP users list Notes e New users are called UserN where N 1 2 3 etc RCP users can be renamed See Changing an RCP User s Name and Password on page 261 e New users are saved automatically it is not necessary to click the Save button after adding a user to the system Managing Room Access Removing RCP Users From the System To remove an RCP user from the system 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab 2 Inthe Tools pane select the user you wish to remove from the system s RCP users list 3 Right click the selection and then click Delete user on the shortcut menu A confirmation window appears 4 Click Yes 5 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Note The user Admin cannot be removed Managing Room Access Granting Room Access to RCP Users To grant RCP users access to a room 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab 2 Inthe Tools pane select the appropriate users from the RCP users list Note Use Shift click or Ctrl click to select multiple users 3 Drag the selected users onto the appropriate room in the RCP users tab 4 Expand the room if it is not expanded already to verify that the users were added to the hierarchical list 251 Ei Managing Kaleido RCP2 Users 252 Tools System Chann
282. models The procedures below describe how to set up the multi viewer to interface with a Ross Video switcher To set up the Ross Video production switcher Ross Video Production Switcher 1 Enable the contribution serial tally interface on one of the switcher s ports by using the switcher s installation menu from the HOME menu press More gt Setup gt Installation gt Comm Setup and then configure the serial tally device as follows Menu Field Value Sub value Type Com Port any REMOTE or PERIPH port depending on device or the EDITOR port ona Synergy 100 panel Device Serial Tally SelectDevice Device Contrib Comm Setting Baud 38 400 115 200 Parity NONE Comm Type Type RS 422 Extra Option Option Rate 26 Option Data Txfr Complete Option Start None Option At Black All Off Note For more information on installing port devices please refer to your Ross switcher documentation The communication parameters listed above are recommended values Other values may also work but remember that both the switcher and the multi viewer must be configured with the same values 2 Physically connect one end of an RJ 45 straight through cable to the multi viewer s RS 422 port 313 Tally Interface Devices 3 Using the straight DE 9S to RJ 45 adapter part no 1737 3000 102 connect the other end of the cable to the enabled serial tally port on the switcher Note Since the protocol is unidirectional
283. mouse pointer Timert B Assigning a Timer to a Room To assign a default timer for all RCP users in a room 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the room to be assigned a timer from the hierarchical list 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Timer box and then select the appropriate timer to be controlled by default from this room 255 Ei Managing Kaleido RCP2 Users 256 Tips Properties RCP users Foor Preset 1 Layout Preset 2 Layout2 Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout4 Preset 5 Layouts Preset 6 Inputs Preset 7 Inpute Preset 5 Mone Preset 9 Mone Freset 10 Mone Audio monitoring output Mone Use large mouse pointer Setting RCP User Preferences To modify the preferences for an RCP user 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the user whose preferences you wish to set from under the appropriate room in the hierarchical list The selected RCP user s preferences layout presets full screen assignment audio monitoring output external keyboard configuration and timer are listed in the Properties pane Modify the preferences as needed See Assigning Room Layouts to an RCP User s Presets on page 257 Assigning a Full Screen Layout to an RCP User on page 258 Assigning Audio Output to an RCP User on page 259 and Setting the Keyboard Language on page 259 Note User preferences are specific to an RCP user in a specific room
284. n a Web page the data received on the serial port To use a Serial port test agent 1 Select the Serial port test device in the equipment library and drag it onto the root of the System hierarchical list Alternatively right click the list root and then click Insert Serial port test on the shortcut menu Click the Interconnects tab in the main window To connect the test device to the multi viewer click the multi viewer s icon or the device s and drag the pointer towards the other Click the test device s icon and adjust the port settings to match those of the actual peripheral device you wish to test Click the connection line between the device and the multi viewer In the Properties pane select the appropriate output from the RS 422 Com Port list When connected the serial port test agent will log all data received from the serial port to a file that you can read using a Web browser Once the database is exported to the multi viewer the serial port test agent starts The agent opens the serial port and start writing to a log file the data that is received on the port To access the log file point your browser to http card IP address logs comm log Note The part card IP address represents the IP address of the output card where the test agent is connected You can find the IP address of the output card on XAdmin s System Configuration page see Configuring a Multi Viewer s IP Settings on page 358
285. n an expansion frame if this slot Move card to frame B contains cards running software firmware frame A or swap with card older than version 3 00 The upgrade will not be in Frame A Upgrade will permitted on any card in the frame until these cards are proceed after current removed from frame B To upgrade these cards upgrade transfer them to frame A Cannot continue the This message will appear on an expansion frame with x upgrade until card in this expansion enabled and with cards in frame B running slot is moved to frame A software firmware older than version 3 00 To upgrade these cards transfer them to frame A Network Considerations amp Port Usage Network Considerations Kaleido X systems generate a low to moderate amount of client to server data traffic and therefore have a minimal bandwidth impact on a network 353 16 Administration and Servicing TCP UDP Port Usage The various Kaleido X services require access to specific ports In networks where a firewall is present between device A and device B the ports used to communicate from device A to device B must be open on the incoming external side of the firewall Note All necessary ports are open by default on the multi viewer There is no mechanism provided for changing the default settings From Client to Multi Viewer The following ports must be open on the Client e g workstation running XEdit Service Port Transport
286. n channel to monitor k T a Assign EX Router input Aspect ratio L Overscan L 5 T 5 K 5 E E Safe area CC cc 608 Monitor Wall 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 13 14 20 20 21 21 22 22 22 23 24 24 The source signal displayed on the monitor is routed to the selected destination Changing Logical Sources Assignments on a Kaleido X Configured as a Router To change a monitor s source assignment by using a router control device or application e Apply a crosspoint change to route the desired Kaleido X logical source to the video monitor whose source assignment you wish to change on the monitor wall in the same way you would do for any router controlled by the device or application you have The video from the first video level assignment within the selected logical source appears in the video window When the current layout is reloaded either of the following two situations may apply No logical source If there was no logical source associated with the monitor then the Kaleido X will remember the new source assignment Not a monitor wall destination If the monitor was not already configured as a monitor wall destination then the layout will be reloaded in its initial state as it was configured in XEdit 52 Using Timers Using Timers Timers can be assigned to timer monitors in a layout Any user can control such timers by using the timer
287. n click OK The new layout appears on the monitor wall Using Layouts Presets To toggle layouts using the RCP2 s preset buttons Press the appropriate preset button 1 10 on the RCP2 The layout associated with the preset button for the current user will be loaded onto the monitor wall See Assigning Room Layouts to an RCP User s Presets on page 280 for more details Refreshing a Layout To refresh a layout Right click anywhere on the monitor wall point to Monitor Wall if you clicked a layout element and then click Refresh on the shortcut menu Refresh ee Refresh Load layout Unlatch Acknowledge all Hide dashboard Hide all dashboards System configuration Display resolution Locating the Mouse Pointer on the Monitor Wall If you have a cluster system the monitor wall may comprise a large number of display screens where the mouse pointer location is not always obvious 40 Displaying a Source in Full Screen Mode To locate the mouse pointer on the monitor wall e Click the middle mouse button A more recognizable square shape appears around the pointer Displaying a Source in Full Screen Mode To display a source in full screen mode 1 Move the pointer over the video source you wish to display in full screen mode 2 Press FULL SCREEN on the RCP2 The full screen layout assigned to the current user is loaded into the full screen zone To close the full screen view e Move the pointer over th
288. n the monitor so that its upper left corner marks the location where you wish to start populating the grid 3 Click the monitor and then click the Auto layout button z on the toolbar 4 Inthe Auto Layout window type the total number of monitors you wish to spread over the area delimited by the upper left corner of the current monitor and the bottom right corner of the current head and then click OK The first monitor is resized and replicated until the grid area is populated with the specified number of monitors Note To undo this action you will need to press Ctrl Z twice once to remove the copies and then once more to restore the first monitor s initial size Copying layouts To copy a layout 1 Open the layout you wish to duplicate 2 On the File menu click Copy layout to point to the appropriate room and then either select an existing layout from the list or click Empty layout Edit C _DBEXEdit DB_1 File Edt Configure wiew Tools Help Bia m B ls 75 Gar Open Wi eve ec E SHE ES System channels Ro Copy layout to k Roomi P Empty layout C Close Foor Injuts Delete Info ut Y Properties Layout C Mew widget library E Layouts La Open widget library Layout4 E Close wigget library I Layouts i Save widget library Open recent i Exit 5 e
289. n the native sub alarms that triggered the change are logged even if logging is disabled for these native alarms It is possible however to disable alarm logging for a virtual alarm or for a global alarm by editing the corresponding plug in from the iControl application server s GSM alarm browser Refer to the iControl User Guide for more information To choose the alarms that will be logged to the GSM configured for this system 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Expand the multi viewer whose alarms you wish to log navigate to the appropriate alarm and then click the alarm to select it 130 Publishing Alarms to SNMP Devices Description Calibrations Intercannects Router configurations Router connections System Fan DE Kaleido X 7RU 0 0 9 10 10 6 9 10 DTM GPVGENLOCK KX4 GPI GEN DDD OPTION A KXO 24Router OPTION B We DD INPUT 4 KXxI 16 PF e Mideo 0 FeVideo 02 video Alarms a a E Loss H video Black Or Video Freeze a Black amp Freeze Zone aa Bon g Video Luma Too High Video Calibrations P Loudness Dialnorm Teletext amp Subtitling Alarms Inthe Properties tab select the Logging enabled check box to have the multi viewer publish this alarm to the application server s log each time this alarm is triggered Trap enabled
290. n the white column beside Expansion Output and choose a corresponding input option from the list Repeat for FRAME A OPTION B OPTION A and B for FRAME B are completed automatically Router Card Expansion kd SNMP hd FRAME A OPTION A kd FRAME A OPTION B hd FRAME B OPTION A RAME A OPTION A hd FRAME B OPTION B RAME A OPTION E RAME A OPTION E 8 Click the Router Configurations tab Note that the two logical routers have been replaced by one larger logical router 192x96 because now the sources can go anywhere via the router expansion cables a Routers Y Physical Routers CD Kaleido X FR DUAL Internal Rout Hel FRAME A OPTION A video 120 g T FRAME amp OPTION B video 120 in T FRAME B OPTION A video 120 eed FRAME B OPTION B video 120 v Logical Routers 0 Internal router 192x96 pe T 0 video b 0 video Source and destination mapping can be performed as described in Step 3 Adding Logical Routers on page 285 and automapping works for all inputs and outputs 309 Routers amp Kaleido X Note It is not yet possible to use the router expansion cables to connect router cards between standalone Kaleido X frames It is possible however to only interconnect one router card per frame leaving another router card per frame standalone This would have the effect of creating three logical routers 310 Tal
291. nconnected Piesnieeled INPUT 4 Video 05 Unconnected INPUT A video oe Unconnected pee INPUT A Video OF Unconnected Notes Using the incremental copy tool in the Router column only copies the selected router to the next rows Using the incremental copy tool in the Port column inserts the next output ports from the selected router in sequence based on their Destination ID until the last output port has been mapped at which point using the incremental copy tool further will clear the subsequent cells When using the tool in the Port column the Router column is populated accordingly It is possible to select the same output port more than once Router Card Expansion Internal router cards can be connected to each other to create an even larger router Note that even if you connect two Kaleido X systems in an expansion configuration and thereby have access to any source or any input on either frame in your layouts the same is not true of their respective router cards You cannot choose a source from one frame and send it to a router output on the other frame In order to do this you must connect the router card s of one frame to those of the other using special cables plugged into the expansion ports on the router cards themselves Then in XEdit you must specify how the cards are connected Note Currently router card expansion can only be applied to Kaleido X expansion systems To configure internal router
292. nd 360 seconds after which closed System captions 708 are cleared v BE Kaleido X46 D IDEO INPUTS FeVideo Of P wideo Alarms kdl Calibration DTYCC holding time tsec MTT z0 Li Appytoal P video Calibrations P 608 Alarms Teletext amp Subtitling Alarms Loudness Dialnorm HDS Filtering NTSC Standard F DTYCC Alarms as Service Presence Timeout fT CC holding time vs cy Service 1 i TD Service 2 ae W Service 3 gis Service 4 a Service 5 Bove F Service 6 AFD amp WSS You can type the value directly in the boxes or use the slider controls Router Output Calibrations Calibrating Switch Field Selection To calibrate switch field selection for a router module 1 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears In the list expand the multi viewer you wish to calibrate Expand the appropriate router module and then click Switch Field Selection 115 Calibrating the Kaleido X we system F kKaleido x 4RU ID GPVGENLOCK KX4 GPI GEN Y M OPTION A KXO 24Router Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 noth path Lind P Output 46 P Output 47 BESS itch field selection Y OPTION B KXO 24Router io Output 1 Output 2 4 Inthe Properties tab click the Switch Field Selection box and then select the appropriate field value
293. nd 9 Apply toatl Background 6 Ifappropriate you may copy the settings from this head to every output head in the system to apply the selected DVI input keying mode globally throughout your system click Apply to all This has the same effect as configuring every output head one by one and selecting the same keying mode for each Seealso For more information about using content from the DVI input as background refer to Setting up a Layout for Background Keying from the DVI Input on page 184 Calibrating the Audio Monitoring Delay Each of the output heads in the Kaleido X multi viewer is associated with two audio output channels The monitoring output is simultaneously available on one AES and two analog connections For each head output parameters can be adjusted to optimize the relative timing of the audio and video signals on the monitor wall display The Audio monitoring delay calibration control provides this function Note By design the audio signal is approximately 37 ms ahead of the video To calibrate the audio monitoring delay for a head 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Inthe list expand the multi viewer whose output heads you wish to calibrate System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions DescriptionCalibrations Interconnects Ro
294. nd accordingly Configuring the Multi Viewer For your multi viewer to receive tally status input names and output names from a Kayak switcher and to display the switcher s contribution on the monitor wall as visual tally and dynamic text information you need to configure your multi viewer s Kayak serial tally service by performing the following tasks in XEdit set up the communication parameters for the serial connection configure logical sources by assigning input names output names and tally status from the switcher to the logical sources text or alarm levels assign alarm and text levels from logical sources to layout elements such as UMDs or alarm monitors Kayak Production Switcher Establishing Serial Communication on the Multi Viewer To set up the multi viewer s communication parameters 1 Launch XEdit 2 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar The main pane displays the System hierarchical list and the Tools pane displays the equipment library when the root of the System list is selected 3 Drag the Kayak production switcher device from the equipment library onto the root of the System hierarchical list Alternatively right click the list root and then click Insert Kayak on the shortcut menu A window appears prompting you for a device identifier Device identifier input window 4 Type a name for the Kayak production switcher in t
295. ne Kaleido RCP2 can be used by multiple users to access the same room concurrently When multiple RCP users are active in the same room they each control a separate pointer on the monitor wall and can use the monitor wall menu independently as long as they limit their actions to separate displays To log on to a Kaleido X room 1 On an RCP2 with an active connection to the network press and hold the ENTER button until the ESC button lights up The Configuration menu appears with the ROOM SELECTION option displayed Press ENTER again to obtain the list of rooms from the Kaleido X systems that are currently available on the network The rooms are listed in the form multi viewer name room name If a room belongs to a cluster system its name appears once for each of the member multi viewers e g if two multi viewers KX1 and KX2 are configured as a cluster and ROOM1 includes displays fed by both multi viewers then both KX1 ROOM1 and KX2 ROOM1 will be listed You may select either one Note By default in the case of a Kaleido X 7RU the two head DVI VGA outputs from each of the Output A B Cand D cards are assigned to ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 and ROOM4 respectively Likewise in the case of a Kaleido X 4RU the two heads associated with Output A are assigned to ROOM1 and the two heads associated with Output B are assigned to ROOM2 Inthe room list select the room you wish to access by pressing the 2 key to move up in the list
296. ne of them who will receive its source assignments from the monitor under the mouse pointer on the monitor wall by selecting the Full screen layout monitor option in the Properties pane Properties Layouts LayoutFull screen layout Roh BORNE 1 FULL1 2 kd Assignment Full creen layout monitor Monitor wall destination Mone Mame Monitor10_16 9 SOW Ce Make the appropriate assignments for the other elements in the layout see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors on page 182 5 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The Save Layout window appears 6 Provide a name for the full screen layout 7 Click Save 177 iz Creating Layouts 178 Adding Monitors to a Layout Note In the case of a KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer layouts are subject to the following limitations e up to eight video monitors over two displays overlapping is not supported e up to four stereo audio level meters per video monitor e one time code per video monitor e only digital clocks are supported e XDS metadata monitors are not supported To add monitors to a layout 1 Drag components from the widget libraries onto the layout or create custom components using the toolbar buttons Note All open widget libraries appear in the Tools pane 2 Resize move and configure the monitors until the desired layout is achieved Seealso For
297. new name for the file in the File name box if desired 7 Browse to the location where you wish to save the file 8 Click Save 2 88MB of pshot_Jun042008_162146 zip we 0 pshot_Jun042008_162146 zip from 10 0 9 39 Estimated time left Not known Opened so far 2 88MB Download to SW FR7 1_System_Snapshot_Ju Transfer rate Cancel Detailed Directions Note Depending on the file size the download may take a few seconds Once the download has completed the message Download Complete may appear 385 16 Administration and Servicing File Download AE Download Complete _pshot_Jun042008_162146 zip from 10 0 9 39 Downloaded 3 79MB in 31sec Download to SW FR7 1_System_Snapshot_Ju Transfer rate 125KB Sec C Close this dialog box when download completes Open Open Folder 9 Click Open Folder if you wish to access the downloaded file or click Close to dismiss the message Viewing a Multi Viewer s Status Information To view the status information for a multi viewer 1 From a workstation on the same subnet open a Web browser window and type the IP address of the multi viewer in the address bar 2 Inthe Kaleido X home page click the XAdmin button The XAdmin Status and Options page appears displaying a list of all cards and their statuses System configuration Kaleido X 4RU Frame m Status and options GPI GENLOCK KXA GPI GEN s n 0798
298. nfigurations Router Connections Kaleido x FRU P M GPVGENLOCK KXA GPLGEN Pl OPTION A HM OPTION B M INPUT KXI 16 i INPUT E KXI 16 M INPUT C KXIl 16 M INPUT O KXI 16 i INPUT E 1 16 M INPUT F KXI 16 M OUTPUT 4 KXO DUAL M OUTPUT B KXO DUAL M OUTPUT C KXO DUAL d d gt d d d d d 41D OUTPUT D KXO DUAL 3 Expand the appropriate output module The expanded module will show the output heads Depending on the multi viewer model other items may also appear P M INPUT E KXI 16 P M INPUT F KXI 16 v4 OUTPUT 4 KXO DUAL FeHead 1 Room Head 2 Room LTC 1 Loss a LTC 2 Loss A LTC 3 Loss OUTPUT B KxXO DUAL P M OUTPUT KXO DUAL gt 4 OUTPUT D KXO DUAL 4 Select the head you wish to calibrate 5 Inthe Properties tab click Audio Monitoring Color and then click the button that appears at the end of the line v M R74 G74 B 210 Click to open the Audio Monitoring Delay _ me CEa color picker window Color Saturation mml m __ Apply toall_ DYI Input Keying Mode Backaround Apply toall_ 6 In Pick a Color click the tab that corresponds to the color space you wish to use and then choose the color that will be associated with the selected output head 7 Click OK to close the color picker window 105 Calibrating the Kaleido X Multi Viewer Input Calibrations Calibrating Zero VU Reference Level for an Embedded Audio Source To calibra
299. ng Started KXA GPI GEN 3 3V Status KXA GPI GEN 48V Power Supply A Fuse Status KXA GPI GEN 48V Power Supply B Fuse Status KXA GPI GEN Board High Temperature KXA GPI GEN Chassis Door Open Status KXA GPI GEN Power Supply A Status KXA GPI GEN Power Supply B Status KXA GPI GEN Rear Fan 1 Status KXA GPI GEN Rear Fan 2 Status KXA GPI GEN Rear Fan 3 Status KXA GPI GEN Rear Fan 4 Status KXA GPI GEN Rear Fan 5 Status KXA GPI GEN Rear Fan 6 Status If you have a Kaleido X 4RU without a KXA GPI GEN card then you will find the fan and power supply statuses listed with the master output card s information 20 Verifying your System Configuration OUTPUT A master KXO DUAL s n 079201 36048080 Q Firmware 0x65 Safemode 0x19 KXO DUAL Display 90 Deg Rotation Option Enable EDID DVI Out 1 EDID Presence ae EDID DVI Out 1 Frequency 39 649155214028966 EDID DVI Out 1 Se 1920 KAO DUAL FPGAS Version 0x909 KXO DUAL Fan 1 Status e Fan statuses ODA tanas oaoa _KXO DUAL FAN Sofia ne ee ee ee eo a giari ia KXO DUAL Fan amp Status KX0 DUAk tirmware_ Pggkasa Munmber CE O pmm a a KXO DUAL PSU B absent Se a _KXO DUAL Power SupplyAACStatus DO PSU statuses KXO DUAL Power Supply A DC Status Oo KXO DUAL Power Supply A Temperature Status Oe KXO DUAL Power Supply BAC Status gee O es ee _ oak KXO DUAL
300. ng devices or long cables in the signal path See Calibrating SDI Signal Reclocking on page 116 GPI Genlock Calibrations GPI line direction Detailed Directions 96 On Kaleido X systems with a GPl genlock module GPI lines can be configured as inputs or outputs On the Kaleido X16 and KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer models the GPI lines are unidirectional 4 out and 32 in for the Kaleido X16 2 out and 8 in for the KMV 3901 3911 In all cases the state of any GPI output can be set manually for test purposes by using their ON OFF calibration See Calibrating GPI Lines on page 117 Multi Viewer Output Calibrations Calibrating the Brightness and Contrast Note The KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer does not support brightness and contrast calibrations Each of the output heads in the multi viewer can drive a monitor wall display For each head output parameters can be adjusted to optimize the image on the monitor wall display the brightness parameters set the black offsets of the RGB output signals and the contrast parameters set the gain offsets of these signals Multi Viewer Output Calibrations To calibrate the brightness and contrast parameters 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Inthe list expand the multi viewer whose output heads you wish to calibrate System Ch
301. ng your system s network parameters includes the following e Assigning an IP address and specifying the appropriate network mask gateway address and a system name for each multi viewer Refer to Default IP Settings on page 346 and to Configuring a Multi Viewer s IP Settings on page 358 e Configuring the Kaleido RCP2 if available Refer to Configuring the Kaleido RCP2 on page 365 e Configuring the Audio Bridge Terminal ABT if available Refer to Configuring an Audio Bridge Terminal on page 368 Seealso For more information on the Kaleido RCP2 refer to the Kaleido RCP2 Guide to Installation and Operation available on the DVD that shipped with your system e For more information on the ABT refer to the Audio Bridge Terminal Guide to Installation and Operation available on the DVD that shipped with your system Configuring a Multi Viewer s IP Settings To change the Kaleido X s system IP address and adjust your system s configuration 1 Configure your client PC with an IP address in the same range as the IP address of the multi viewer see Changing the Client PC s IP Address on page 363 2 Open a Web browser window and type the multi viewer s IP address in the address bar gt Kaleido X Windows Internet Explorer Go imssm File Edit View Favorites Tools Help The Kaleido X home page appears 1 The multi viewer must have Kaleido X software version 2 10 or later
302. ns 4 Levels 0 Video New logical level Next you must specify the relationship between the logical level destinations 4 in this example and the physical destinations 16 in this example 7 Click the Destination mapping tab The Destination mapping table includes rows for each of the logical destinations 4 in this example with columns for entering a text label e g Main Out Preview etc and the corresponding physical router destination this column s heading corresponds to the logical router level specified earlier 0 Video in this example Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections Configuration Source mapping Destination Destination mapping Size 4 E Auto map Clear mapping Clear mapping Import labels labels _JAuto update labels Label 0 Video Routers Routers v 7 Physical Routers v Kaleido XxX 7RU Internal Router i peL OPTION A Video 120x48 i eL OPTION B Video 120x48 v 7 HewPhysicalRouter ined Video Video 16x16 v Logical Routers Y 0 Internal router 96x48 io T 0 Video v a 1 KX Router 96x80 ao i 0 Video v Ga 21 Small ogicalRouter exar ve i 0 Video ETL Metrix HRS 1801 N dsion N G000 Protocol Pro Bel General Remote Control Protocol SW P 08 Thomson Grass
303. nternal router module but also the KX Router logical router or any other logical router configured within your multi viewer system In the case of the KX Router logical router the device or application must support the NVISION Ethernet protocol Compact router protocol Company Protocol TCP IP port Serial Miranda Kaleido Remote Control Protocol Yes 13000 Yes Miranda NVISION NVISION Ethernet protocol Compact Yes 5194 No router Nevion Network Network Compact N A Yes Electronics Network Modular Yes 4381 No Snell Pro Bel SW P 08 Yes 14000 Yes SW P 02 Yes 2000 Yes Serial Connections The physical cabling required to connect a multi viewer to an external serial device such as a router production switcher or router controller can vary from one device to another It is important to check the manufacturer s documentation to get the proper pinout so it matches up with the multi viewer The RS 422 ports at the back of a Kaleido X16 multi viewer or at the back of a KXO Dual or KXO Dual3 card in the case of the Kaleido X multi viewer models use an RJ 45 connector Miranda provides two adapters which map the RS 422 signals to the more common DE 9 form factor e To connect a serial device whose RS 422 port is wired to the SMPTE slave wiring specifications use the straight adapter Miranda part number 1737 3000 102 275 Routers amp Kaleido X e To connect a serial device whose RS 422 port
304. nto the selected cell in the sources table Tools System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions mx system Video Audio Text Alarm Channels Sources se source ID videot audiol texti alarm input AEhannel 4 1 AGT Emb 1 tnputd wideod black wesystem input AiChannel oz 2 AQ Emb1 inoutd video j input AiChannelo3 3 AD3 Emb1 inoutd videos Anput AiChannel 04 4 AQd Emb1 mputd videod input AiChanneloS 5 ADS Emb1 insutd videos a Y BE Kaleido X 4RU F System Diagnostic _ i Remote status Gateway I M GPVGENLOCK KXA GPI GE Anput AvChannel 06 aog ADB Embi iputd videnb T A INPUT A KXI 16 Diagnostic T video 0 Anput A ChannelO9 9 A09 A09 Embi neutianttoo o Yevideo Alarms AAEE inputtvideotO o video Loss Apetina A11 Ema inpwtdwideot JIT a Mf anout Aichannel iz 12 AI2 Emb 1 inputd wideod2 Anput AiChannel13 13 13 Emb1 mput viden13 Anput AChannel 1414 Add Embi inputd wideotd Anput Aichannel 15 15 ATS AIS Emb1 faeui wictes 7S 0 ideo Black ve Video Freeze ideo Luma Too Lil EAWISA Error 4 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The sources table is saved 141 Creating Logical Sources Monitoring Internal Router Outputs on the Monitor Wall Sample Scenario It is possible for specific monitoring purposes to c
305. o frames as described below The card slots appear in the hierarchical list If you already loaded the factory defaults for the multi viewer type then some slots are already populated with a card 85 az Managing Kaleido X Systems 3 Add or remove cards until the system s card slots are populated with cards that match the hardware configuration of your multi viewer For each populated slot that should be empty right click the slot in the System list and then click Remove on the shortcut menu Alternatively click the populated card slot and then press Delete on your keyboard Description Calibrations Interconnects Router configurations Router connections System me wesystem Y E Kaleido X 7RU k GPVGENLOCK KX4 GPI GEN M OPTION A KMO 24Router m i INPUT amp KXl 16 Remove INPUT B KXI 16 _ TD INPUT KxI 46 INPUT D KxI 16 INPUT E Kx1 16 INPUT F KXI 16 W OUTPUT KXO DUAL W OUTPUT B KXO BUAL D OUTPUT KXO DUAL M OUTPUT O KXO DUAL The slot is now empty and the card type does not appear any more DE Kaleido X TRU P GPRGENLOCK KX4 GPLGEN H OPTION A KXO 24Router Hare ii OPToay E lt Empty slot M INPUT A K l 16 M NFUT B K I 16 M INPUT KXl 16 M INPUT D K l 16 M INPUT E KxI 16 M IWPUT F KXI 16 OUTPUT A KXO DUAL OUTPUT B KXO BUIAL OUTPUT KXO BUIAL OUTPUT D KxO DUAL
306. oenable the latched status indicators select the Display alarm latch check box click the Latch colors box and then select the appropriate color scheme for your purposes either Same as text colors or Same as background colors 6 Choose from two display modes Cycle and Marquee In cycle mode the alarm monitor displays text from each alarm one after the other In marquee mode the alarm text scrolls across the monitor In addition you can control the cycling speed and the scroll rate by setting the cycling period in milliseconds 7 Make the appropriate assignments see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors on page 182 and select the desired alarm and text label levels if necessary kd Assignments Alarm level GlobalAlarm Monitor wall destination Mone Mame texto SOUrce Text label level Global4larm 8 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 217 iz Creating Layouts Configuring Metadata Monitors To monitor XDS Data and digital content advisory descriptors 1 Click the Metadata monitor button mz on the toolbar click the layout and then move or resize the monitor as needed Channel number Program name V chip rating Program length Program ID Time zone Station ID TSID Program type Program descr Elapsed time Time date CGMS A APS ASB US rating Alternatively you may choose to layer this monitor on t
307. of a KMV 3901 3911 the system time is always based on UTC However if you wish to see the time from different time zones on the monitor wall you can configure different clocks accordingly To configure a clock 1 Inthe Layouts tab click the clock you wish to configure Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Properties Layouts LayoutMuttihead layout Roon AdutineadLayout Monitor wall destination Mone Mame clockO Offset 00 00 00 SOUrCE Time code level timecode Time zone Autodetect 12 hour display Eil Background color MR GTB Bevel raised Border antialiasing Border color BB RO GOB 0 Clock type combo Date format Medium format Date on Logo Miranda logo Minuteswhours color MMB F53 6060 Scale color 1 F204 G 204 5 255 Seconds colar FAA R 204 G 204 B 204 Transparency O Sy LLE Mouse click 2 Inthe Properties pane make the appropriate assignments Determine the time source see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors on page 182 and select the desired time code level if necessary Select the appropriate time zone for your purposes 221 az Creating Layouts Monitor wall destination Mone Mame clock Offset 00 00 00 Source INPUT OF Time code level timecode Time zone Autodetect Y China Standard Time CTT 4 12 hour display China Standard Time PRC Background color Choibalsan Time rw traer
308. of the dual head Output cards A and B are assigned to ROOM1 and ROOM2 respectively Ona Kaleido X16 D the HDMI outputs from each of the Output modules are assigned to ROOMX16 Ona Kaleido X16 S the HDMI output is assigned to ROOMX16 Ona KMV 3901 3911 the HDMI outputs are assigned to ROOM1 4 When the appropriate room name is highlighted press ENTER to accept the new selection 5 When prompted log on to the selected room See Logging on to the Kaleido RCP2 on page 368 Connecting the RCP2 to Other Kaleido X Systems The unicast IP feature enables a Kaleido RCP2 to find up to three Kaleido X systems on different subnets and connect to them via network gateways while maintaining connections to Kaleido X systems in its own subnet Notes To navigate the RCP2 menu press the 2 key to move up or the 8 key to move down e There is no need to configure unicast IP addresses for Kaleido X systems on the same subnet as the RCP2 To configure a unicast IP address on the RCP2 Press and hold the ENTER button until the ESC button lights up to display the configuration menu Select ETHERNET OPTIONS on the LCD display and then press ENTER Select Unicast host IP and then press ENTER Select Enable IP 1 and then press ENTER The Enable IP x parameter instructs the RCP2 to query the selected IP address for a list of rooms 5 Select Host IP ADDR and then press ENTER 36 16 Administration and Servicing
309. ol T Horizontal active 1 280 Horizontal tront porch 46 Resolut Horizontal syne 112 The reso Horizontal back porch 246 Ror corte total Vertical active 1 024 Vertical tront porch 1 Vertical sync 3 Vertical back porch 30 vertical total kd Modeline Horizontal blank start 1 250 Horizontal syne start 1 328 Horizontal syne end 1 440 Yereicgactal Bleck end 1 feo 3 Under either the Porch or the Modeline section depending on whether you prefer to specify front porch back porch sync and active values or blank start sync start sync end and blank end set the refresh rate and other timing parameters so that they match those of the physical display you need to configure Configuring Displays gt lt Edit Resolution Settings Friendly name MyResalution 1920x1200 60Hz Refresh rate 59 94 Hz Syne polaris _ FS HSFPol WSPol ms 13 HSPol WSPol 2 HSPol WSPol 3 HSPol vSPol Horizontal active Horizontal tront porch Horizontal syne Horizontal back porch Horzontaltotal Vertical active 1 200 Vertical tront porch a Vertical sync 3 Vertical back porch 5 vertical total kd Modeline Horizontal blank start 1 920 Horizontal syne start 1 984 Horizontal sync end 2 016 Horizontal blank end 2 120 Vertical blank start 1 200 V ertical sync start 1 205 Vertical sync end 1 206 z Sync polarity Syne polarity 1920x1200 60Hz a Aa Save aS Edit Resolution
310. ol Router Manager appeared as a separate application within XEdit This could lead to some issues such as two devices being configured on the same serial port Since Router Manager is now integrated XEdit is more aware of the router configuration information and can prevent such misconfigurations Q Is router management backward compatible A Yes Router configurations made in version 2 20 will be preserved when upgrading to version 3 00 or later However even though this has been tested on a large number of configurations it is recommended that the router settings be reviewed before and after the upgrade in order to ensure that there are no errors Detailed Directions Q What is a Network router A The phrase Network router has the obvious connotation of a router available on a network However in the context of Miranda s Monitoring and Control applications it can also refer to a device now manufactured by Nevion www nevion com formerly Network Electronics Ltd such as a VikinX router Q What are the three different Router Controller items i e Network Compact and the two Pro Bel items in the Equipment library A They are all used for controlling either the multi viewer s internal router or any logical router The only difference is the protocol used to communicate with the multi viewer Q My internal router card shows up in the Routers list in XEdit as OPTION A Video 120 x 48 Does this m
311. ol of a highly integrated system is simplified with the RCP 200 panel which can operate the router and multi viewer as well as signal processing and distribution cards The KMV 3901 3911 provides a subset of the features of the Kaleido X 4RU and 7RU models e Eight auto sensing 3Gbps HD SD video inputs two independent HDMI outputs e Video signals can be repeated in up to eight windows and scaled up to 1920 x 1200 pixels e Audio signal video time code and AFD WSS data can be extracted for on screen display Areference signal from a REF 1801 Densit card can be used to minimize processing delay and reference clocks on the monitor wall e Expansion through combination with upstream router DXF 200 extension module simplifies long runs to monitors from Densit frame and is a single fiber solution for supporting high resolution 1920 x 1200 displays over distances of up to 1000 m 3300 ft e Choice of multi viewer remote control panels simple Kaleido RCP2 and advanced RCP 200 with router control Control by NVISION control panel and NV9000 controller Super silent for installation within studios and control rooms Getting Started Kaleido X16 The Kaleido X16 is a compact ultra quiet multi viewer with 16 inputs and two multi viewer outputs It offers the highest level of image quality and can be used with 3Gbps HD SD and Analog video It is ideal for small control rooms although it can also be paired with routers to create
312. ollow mode change all levels or in breakaway mode When you make a crosspoint change in a logical router you can change all of the logical levels or just specific ones When controlling the monitor wall only the all follow mode is supported If you need to set up breakaway switches you must use other software e g Miranda s Router Control Software or a router controller e g a device that supports the Snell Pro Bel SW P 08 protocol At this point you have completed the definition of an external router Configuring a Router Controller There are two categories of router controllers that can be used to control the routers connected to controlled by a Kaleido X e Simple router controllers such as the Nevion Network Electronics VikinX Compact or devices that support the Snell Pro Bel SW P 02 protocol e Intelligent router controllers that support the Snell Pro Bel SW P 08 protocol Configuring a Router Controller Adding a Simple Router Controller A VikinX Compact router controller on any control panel that supports the Snell Pro Bel SW P 02 protocol can issue switching commands to a specific router connected to controlled by the multi viewer which will act as a protocol translator To add a VikinX Compact or equivalent router controller 1 Click and drag Router Controller Network Compact from the Equipment library to the System hierarchical list System Channels Sources Destinations
313. olution and orientation Kaleido X 7RU OUTPUTS DXF 100 Optical DYI extension High Resolution DYI RGBHV Outputs Drive multi image mosaics into displays Analog Digital Audio Monitoring Outputs CONTROL 1 GA eb 2 ORA KCI PEE r mine e 3 HmE a LTC K RCP2 multi image display Dual Output HD SD SDI t i remote pane RS 422 Multi Image Processor Router Modules USE Modules Future option Ethernet Upto4 Outputs Frame 16 Outputs Module Keyboard and mouse backa A input i yo 1 Universal Input Modules 2 GPII O and 16 Auto sensing Inputs Module Genlock Module Up to 32 Inputs Frame Option XEdit layout editor software H U eco 72 Tes 16 Audio Bridge Terminal Configurable Mu kti fo rmat Video Inputs 128 Channels Terminal GPI Input Reference Input Composite SDI HD SDI up to 256 Channels Frame Outputs Embedded Audio Extraction Reporting of alarms to ji 1 iControl SNMP based signal i tapi Analog Stereo AES and facility monitoring N PUTS Discrete Audio Inputs HD SDI HD SDI KXI DYI Bridge Dual channel DYI inputs with loop out Densit Series IRD 2801 zwy sl compressed video MPEG to HD SDI Compressed Ten aes 7 j DVI t Kaleido X 4RU system overview Kaleido X 7RU The Kaleido X 7RU is a multi room multi image display processor and router in a single expandable chassis Its unique mix of capabilities represents th
314. ome purposes you may wish to display a layout s elements against a specific static image To select a background image for a layout 1 Click the Layouts tab and open the layout whose background you wish to set Managing Layouts 2 Click the display background on the layout 3 4 5 In the Properties pane click the Background image box under Appearance and then click the button that appeared at the end of the box The Select Image window appears If the image you wish to use is not already listed in Select Image then click the Open Ga button to open the Browse Image window Locate the image select it and then click Open z Browse Image x Moditied JPEG Image of 04 7 00 AM JPEG Image of 04 7 00 AN JPEG Image of 04 7 00 AN JPEG Image of 04 2 00 AM File Mame Water lilies jpg Files of Type Allimages png jpg gif The image is imported into the current database Note The maximum size for each image is 256 KB and the maximum overall size for all images is 10 MB The image can be in PNG GIF or JPEG format Images can be used on multiple layouts and only need to be imported to the database once In Select image select the image file from the Image selection list and then click OK 183 az Creating Layouts 184 Select Image Image Selection The image appears in the layout background Setting up a Layout for Background Keying from the DVI Input
315. ompared to the reference dialnorm for your organization or 3 when the encoded dialnorm itself deviates too much from the reference dialnorm for your organization The related parameters determine the loudness measuring standard you wish to apply the channels that are involved in the measurement the reference dialnorm level for your organization and the ranges outside of which alarms will be triggered Requires the KXS Loudness option see Enabling Options on page 371 Refer to Calibrating Dolby VANC Loudness Measurement on page 107 for details 95 Calibrating the Kaleido X Dolby E selection Router Output Calibrations Dolby E audio can be decoded from one of eight AES pairs within a signal s embedded audio stream The Dolby E selection parameter determine which AES pair will be used Requires the KXS DolbyE option see Enabling Options on page 371 Refer to Calibrating Dolby E Audio Metadata on page 109 for details Switch field selection SDI output reclocking The switch field parameter determines whether the router module will perform clean crosspoint changes on the odd field 1 on the even field 2 field or on any field See Calibrating Switch Field Selection on page 115 The SDI output reclocking parameter determine whether digital video signals will have their timing restored at the selected output to eliminate jitter Reclocking is typically used in installations with large routi
316. onfigurations Router Connections General information Router name NevwPhysicalRouter Router protocol Harris Leitch XY Passthrough Protocol B Connection type Serial B Communication parameters Port name Output B B Parity None B Bits per second 19200 B Stop bits 1 B Data bits 3 B Flow control None B Use protocol defaults Ifthe connection type is TCP IP or UDP IP you must specify the router s IP address and port number Descrigtion Calibrations interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections General information Router name NewPhysicalRouter Router protocol N ISION Ethernet protocol Compact router B i Connection type UDP Communication parameters Router hostnamesP address UDPAP port Use protocol defaults 8 Click Use protocol defaults to specify the default parameters for the selected protocol this can be useful to begin if you do not have access to your specific router s documentation At this point you have created a new physical router Step 2 Adding Physical Levels There is not always just one connection per router Sometimes the connection is to one of several routers in a cascade configuration For example in the case of Nevion Network Electronics VikinX routers the multi viewer sends commands to one router in the cascade which passes it on to the other routers via an internal communications mechanism MIDI in t
317. onfigure a video monitor so that it displays the current signal at a physical output from the multi viewer s internal router by assigning this router output to a logical source s video level To configure a monitor to follow an internal router output on the monitor wall Click the Channels Sources tab in the main window N Add a logical source to the table see Adding a Logical Source on page 136 WW In the new logical source row click the cell that corresponds to the first video level a Expand the filtered System list in the Tools pane locate the router output you wish to monitor and drag it onto the selected cell in the sources table Tools System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users System Video Audio ChannelsSources 7 T Source lD C video audiod Physical S INPUT 01 1 11 01 Emb d vd ve System INPUT 02 2 02 Embi INO DJ vB Kaleido x16 5 VIDEO INPUTS INPUT 03 03 Emi 1 Avo INPUT 04 O4 Emb1 inod Oy on E ROUTER OUTPUTS INPLIT 05 D5 05 Emb1 Wos gipu 1 Tani IT OG o6 06 Embd N G8 aalala l th PUT e gt oF OF Emei wo INPUTOS Me O S 08 OB Emb1 sas inpuTogs a o9 O9 Embi Nos 10 Emb1 in ta eo_ i 11 Embi iN a4 euT O OON S aa N2 Emba wa PUTAS O O3 A aa 13 Embi wi inputag O A aa S14 Embi NH INPUTS O O15 OAU oas 15 Embi as eUT 6 16 AB 15 Emb1 16 Te ROUTER OUT 18 mt fens Outpu
318. ons Kalypso Production Switcher Kaleido X 4RU Connection between the multi viewer and the device 7 Click the connection line between the multi viewer and the device and then click the Properties tab System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Properties Tips Description Calibrations Router Configurations Router Connections Production Switcher Kaleido 4RU4 3 RS 427 Com Port Disconnected Kalypso Production Switcher Kaleido X 4RU 8 Inthe Properties pane click the appropriate output in the RS 422 Com Port list Tips Production Switcher Kaleido 4A Output 4 Output E 9 Inthe Interconnects tab click the Kalypso device icon 315 Tally Interface Devices 10 In the Properties pane set the serial communications properties for the remote port on the Ross Video switcher as follows Baud rate 38 400 115 200 Data bits 8 Parity NONE Stop bits 1 Properties Tips Production Switcher BE T s8400 Bj Baud rate Data bits 8 ES _ NONE B Previews Out t _ Program Out te Stop bits ii 11 In the Channels Sources tab create logical sources using text and alarms levels coming from the Kalypso serial tally device System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Channel Video Audio Text audio text alarmi Wideo 01 Embedded audi Wideo02 Embedded audi Wideo03 Embedded aud
319. ontroller icon Under the Properties tab a list of settings appears with default values for the serial communication parameters the bit rate bps the number of data bits parity stop bits and flow control Select a logical router e g SmallLogicalRouter from the Router list Configuring a Router Controller Properties Tips CompactCtrl Be ka Baud rate a20 O O E J Data bits g Party Stop bits SmallLogicalFouter This is the logical router that will be controlled by the router control panel When the multi viewer receives commands over the serial port on the output card selected in step 4 it will know these are destined for the logical router corresponding to SmallLogicalRouter Note The VikinX Compact protocol allows you to specify one logical router only it is a one to one controller protocol To add a control panel that uses the SW P 02 protocol e Refer to procedure above but at step 1 select Router Controller Pro Bel SW P 02 from the Equipment library instead of Router Controller Network Compact Adding an Intelligent Router Controller An intelligent router controller is one that can issue switching commands to any router connected to controlled by the multi viewer In order to be able to do this it must attach a unique identifier to each command that will allow the Kaleido X Software to direct the command to the appropriate device This unique identifier is the Logical ro
320. op of the video window within a composite See Working with Composite Monitors on page 225 for instructions on how to add elements to a composite 2 Inthe Properties pane select the check boxes that correspond to the data elements you wish the monitor to display Display network name Display channel number Display program name Display chip rating Display program length Display program ID Display time Zone Display station ID Display TSID Display program type Display program description Display elapsed time Display time of day Display CGMS 4 Display APS Display 456 kd Digital content advisory descrip Display U S rating Display Canadian rating RRARRARARKARAAARARIA ERI 3 You can also set appearance properties including the font and size of the text labels or choose not to display the labels by clearing the Display legend check box 218 Configuring V Chip Monitors idl Appearance Display legend Background MRO GOB o Text color LR 255 G 255 5 255 Text fort Monospaced bold 1 40 Text format clip Text horizontal alignment Lett Text vertical alignment Inside MDS transparency 100 The selected monitor is updated accordingly on the layout 4 Make the appropriate assignments see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors on page 182 and select the desired video level if necessary kd ASSignments Monitor wall destination Mone Mame metadata display Source
321. or the selected duration 5 seconds then an error event will be recorded note that this event isnot an alarm The actual Silence Left alarm will be triggered when the number of recorded error events reaches the selected number of occurrences 2 within the detection window 1 minute Sharing Alarm Status Information Between Multi Viewers and iControl The integration of iControl s alarm management features into the Kaleido X Software allows the following Display alarm status information from Densit cards on the monitor wall Display alarms detected within a Kaleido X system on an iControl Web page Display alarm status information in XEdit online mode Create virtual alarms that combine a number of alarm statuses not only within a single system but also from different devices within multiple Kaleido X and iControl systems Sharing Alarm Status Information Between Multi Viewers and iControl Adding Alarm Providers To add alarm providers to your Kaleido X system 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Click the multi viewer whose alarm providers you wish to define 3 Inthe Properties tab click the Alarm providers list box Community public Trap targets kd External alarms GSM Alarm providers list CC kd OPTION A hs Expansion Input Expansion Output v Router Ex Router
322. ork Connections and then click Open on the shortcut menu 2 In Network Connections right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties on the shortcut menu 3 In Local Area Connection Properties select Internet Protocol TCP IP from the list on the General tab and then click Properties The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens EEJ Network Connections Bak BB serh Folders H Address 4 Network Connections te he Name Type status Device Na ah Network Tasks LAN or High Speed Internet a Create a new connection Change Windows Firewall oH 1394 Connection LAN or High Speed Inter Connected Firewalled 1394 Net LAN or High Speed Inter Connected Firewalled F x LAN or High Speed Inter Disabled Firewalled AM or High Speed Inte Jot connected Firewallegd L Local Area Connection Broadcom Cisco Sys atellR wi General Advanced Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties wales t Local Area Connection Properties Connect using aaa Eg Broadcom Net treme 5 Ac Gigabit Co Ss You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for This connection uses the following items the appropriate IF settings ml File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks aos Packet Scheduler O Obtain an IF address automatically Y Inteme
323. ormat license 1 input module CC XDS KXS CSX CC subtitling and XDS 1 input module data license Dolby E Embedded Audio KXS Dolby KXS HD EMB KXS SD EMB Dolby metadata 1 input module extraction license HD SD SDI embedded 1 input module audio license SD SDI embedded 1 input module audio license Loudness OUTPUT Display 90 Degree Rotation KXS Loudness KXS Rotator Loudness level 1 input module measurement license Display rotation license 1 output module 3D KXS 3DLA Stereoscopic display 1 output module license line alternate After enabling the 3D support mode for Kaleido X option in XAdmin refresh the current layout or load another one for the change to be reflected on the monitor wall 347 16 Administration and Servicing Kaleido X16 Module Option Part No Feature INPUT 3G KXS X16 3Gbps 3Gbps format license 1 frame CC XDS KXS X16 CSX CC subtitling and XDS data license 1 frame Dolby E KXS X16 Dolby Dolby metadata extraction license 1 frame Embedded Audio KXS X16 HD EMB HD SD SDI embedded audio license 1 frame KXS X16 SD EMB SD SDI embedded audio license 1 frame Loudness KXS X16 Loudness Loudness level measurement license 1 frame OUTPUT Display 90 Degree KXS X16 Rotator S Rotation license for Kaleido X16 S Rotation SDI Monitoring Output KXS X16 Rotator D KXS X16 HDM S KXS X16 HDM D Rotation
324. orting behavior Configuring Alarm Monitors kd Alarms Tallies Text color LI R 255 G 255 6255 Text Disabled color C R 255 G 255 B 255 T 100 Text Mormal kK color C R 255 6 255 6 255 T 100 Text Minora Vvarning color LJ F 255 G 255 B 255 Text Major color R255 G 255 B 255 100 video transparency to keep the status ny a a T indicator hidden when there is no alarm Background Disabled color lt B F 20 6 30 6 30 T 100 Background Mormalok color EE F0 G 170 6 0 T100 Background MinorivWwearning E R 170 6 170 5 0 Background Major color GS F220 6 120 6 0 Background CriticalError co MB F i70 coen Display alarm latch Display alarm latch check box Latch colors Same as background colors Latch colors selection Blink mode No blink Blink mode selection Cycling type cycle Cycling period 2 000 4 Click the Blink mode box and then select the appropriate blinking behavior for your purposes Blink mode Description Off The status indicator will never blink Follow latch The status indicator s blinking will follow the latch status The indicator will blink until someone unlatches the alarm Critical The status indicator will blink when the current status is critical Critical and major The status indicator will blink when the current status is critical or major Critical major and minor The status indicator will blink when the current status is critical major or minor 5 T
325. ou can click the Save button Configuring an Audio Scale From a Specific Audio Monitor To configure an audio scale from a specific audio monitor 1 Inthe Layouts tab click the audio monitor you wish to configure 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Audio scale box under Appearance and then click the button that appeared at the end of the box The Edit Audio Scale window appears Edit Audio Scale Preview Middle color Lower limit Bottom color VU Meter IECBO268 1 77 H Save Delete Close 3 Click one of the Top Middle or Bottom Color buttons to set the top middle and bottom color The Choose Background Color window appears 203 iz Creating Layouts Choose Background Color Swatches HSB RGB C A A N N E E r N De m El Sample Text Sample Text a E CI Sample Text Sample Text 4 Click the appropriate color square Swatches in the selected color appear under Preview 5 Click OK to close the Choose Background Color window In Edit Audio Scale the corresponding button and the corresponding part of the audio monitor preview show the selected color 6 Repeat the procedure until all three colors are set as desired 7 Enter the audio thresholds in Upper limit and Lower limit 8 Type a name for the new audio scale in the box at the bottom and then click the Save as button Note When you modify one of the default audio scales you can only save your changes as a new audio s
326. ow 2 Under the Properties pane modify the action item s parameters 3 Click Save in the application toolbar if you modified the action under the Actions tab or click OK if you modified the action in the Action Editor window 4 Export the database to the Kaleido X Removing an action item from an action 1 Select an action under the Actions tab or in the middle pane of the Action Editor window N Select one or more action items associated with the action WW Press the Delete key Ja Click Save in the application toolbar if you modified the action under the Actions tab or click OK if you modified the action in the Action Editor window 5 Export the database to the Kaleido X 246 Detailed Directions Deleting an action k Select an action under the Actions tab 2 Select one or more action items associated with the action 3 4 Click Save in the application toolbar if you modified the action under the Actions tab or click OK if you Click the Delete button in the application toolbar modified the action in the Action Editor window Export the database to the Kaleido X 247 i Creating Actions 248 Managing Kal This chapter explains the configuration of the Kaleido X for use with a Kaleido RCP2 Remote Control Panel Summary XEdit Quick Start Task USE 2 cscnnace caumanaeisipreeveeseiieneracedanerietwsianecaieedess 249 Managing KEP USCIS 0 0 0 ccc cece cece cnet e ene n ene EAE
327. password for the user 4 Click the button that appeared at the end of the box 262 Setting RCP User Preferences The Password Modification window appears ag Password Modification Ceca 5 In Password Modification type the new password only numbers up to 8 digits and then type it again to confirm 6 Click OK 263 Ei Managing Kaleido RCP2 Users 264 Routers amp Kaleido X This chapter describes how Kaleido X can be configured to control external routers to act as a router itself and to be controlled from an upstream router control panel or software Overview The Kaleido X Kaleido X16 and Kaleido Modular multi viewers are designed for flexible integration with a variety of routing devices A multi viewer can be configured to control or to be controlled by a variety of routing devices The Kaleido X 7RU and Kaleido X16 have an internal router option which offers switching of up to 192 unprocessed inputs to 96 HD SD outputs 16 inputs to 2 outputs in the case of the Kaleido X16 for feeding monitors test equipment and master control or production switchers A multi viewer can also be configured as a router and provide switching of its logical sources to router card outputs if available or monitor wall destinations The Kaleido X Software interfaces with most routing devices via Ethernet or serial connection for router control and dynamic text label tracking The interface allows dynamic sou
328. pplies to the six standard services The default value is 30 seconds on a range of 1 to 360 Note The video and metadata calibrations do not apply to the current version of the KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer 127 6 Configuring Alarms 128 Configuring Alarm Debouncing To configure alarm debouncing 1 Connect to the multi viewer you wish to configure if you wish to apply the changes in real time see Connecting to a Multi Viewer on page 70 Note If this step is omitted then you will need to export the database to apply the new calibrations to the multi viewer In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar Navigate to the alarm whose debouncing you wish to calibrate by expanding the appropriate multi viewer input one of its Video elements and then the alarm related elements or the ABT element and then one of the ABT s audio elements In the Properties pane under Debouncing set appropriate values for every attribute q Detection window min tI a 4 Apply toll Duration sec tI ms Occurences tren spy to al Example For a Silence Left alarm configured with a threshold of 47dBFS alarm debouncing could be set as follows e Detection window 1 minute e Duration 5 seconds e Occurrences 2 This means that if the audio left peak falls below the silence threshold 47 dBFS and stays below this threshold f
329. propriate multi viewer input one of its Video elements and then the alarm related elements or the ABT element and then one of the ABT s audio elements 125 6 Configuring Alarms Y 24 Kaleido X16 0 VIDEO INPUTS Video 01 Video alarms as Video loss ll video black a Wideo freeze sri Black amp freeze zone Bon amp Video luma too high b Video calibrations AFD amp VSS om VSS loss AFD video index loss s AFD 2016 loss w BOG alarms i Line 21 loss cH CC loss i CC loss Teletext amp subtitling alarms PoP LeWED amp WSS F Page A io bDolby E selection ee CCa loss Page selection ob oF Embedded audio 1 TI loss Subtitling holding time i i i Silence lett TE loss Teletext 3 n silence right chip loss i ill Subtitle m overload lett Hi TSID loss Page E T a r E Overload right o sE holding time b Page T i w Out of phase i aneale Page D Ts 2 ee iinan PDTC alarms Loudness dialnortm gia Dolby E loss service presence timeout a Loudness Expected a Dolby AC 3 cht loss a DTCC holding time oe Dialnorm Loudness ss S Dolby AC 3 ch loss 3 B Service 1 ae Dialnorm Expected a ae i service 2 re XDS filtering Embedded audio 2 w Example of alarms related to video and embedded audio input signals 4 Inthe Properties tab set the relevant values under Calibration Video Calibrations Black detect
330. ptions SDI output calibrations and other settings can be configured in XEdit In the case of the Kaleido X multi viewer models the presence and status normal mode safe mode of the KXO HDM mezzanine are available via SNMP Traps are also available for both alarms Note Like other card presence alarms the KXO HDM traps are not configurable and are always sent Getting Started Welcome to the Kaleido X This chapter provides an overview of the different multi viewer models and their initial configuration process Summary HIN OVOIVICW 543 4405 Errr enous ae caer ts E EEEE ERE AEE 6 Detaled DINCGHONS c1c ni coves aaneeh eins EEE ENEAN EEEIEE EERIE 14 COD NOG IOINS sirenrere ittre re eE EEEE EE E 24 RS 422 Connection Diagram sesesesesseseressserersssereesesereesssseesssseee 28 XEdit Application Shortcuts 00 c ccc ccc cece cece cnet nee e teen ee eeeseeteeeeteeeeees 29 About this Document The Kaleido X User s Manual is intended to help you leverage the full working potential of the Kaleido X Software and XEdit application for controlling and monitoring audio and video broadcast signal paths for interfacing routing distribution and other peripheral devices The Kaleido X series hardware including the Kaleido Modular Kaleido X16 and Kaleido X multi viewer models and the associated software products are designed and produced by Miranda Technologies Inc For installation instructions refer to the Quick Start Guid
331. put Wehannel 05 5 AOS Embi fhauid widteoS eerie ADS Wid TC Anput AtChannelOB 4 ADE AOR Emb 1 feeyi4 vidteos AOB Wid TC Fea eee EE ales T Ant OV Erik 4 Mae ities ANT wind TE 2 Right click the appropriate level category and then click Add level on the shortcut menu System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Video Audio Alarm Time code ChannelsSources Add level Source ID video audiot texti alarm ij inout 4ichannel 1 1 AO AD Embi tnewtd wideod AQT Vid TC Input A Channelo2 2 802 402 Embi fneat4 video JAD wid TE Imet Ahane oa 3 ADS vid TC Add level A03 AOS Emb 1 inewid uieteo3 Note To change the level name click the Properties tab and then type the new name in the Level name box On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The sources table is saved Sorting the Sources Table To sort the sources table Right click the heading of the column you wish to sort by i e either Source ID or any of the level headings and then click Sort on the shortcut menu System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Video Audio Text Alarm Time code Channels Sources Source ID fideo aucion texti alarmi timecode input AiChannel 0i 1 Sart Havideo Aor vid TC input a Channel 033 Saa videos aoa via To inpu
332. r Kwi 3901 3911 SL seriall SL network xternal Router ncoda alypso ndromeda erial to TCRAP Dispatcher outer Controller Pro Bel SVy P 03 erial port test outer Controller Network Compact outer Controller Pro Bel Sy P 02 ony Serial tally Kaleido X TRU 71 az Managing Kaleido X Systems 3 Inthe equipment library select the appropriate multi viewer type Kaleido X 7RU Kaleido X 4RU Kaleido X 7RU x 2 with expansion Kaleido X16 D Kaleido X16 S or Kaleido Modular KMV 3901 3911 and drag it onto the root of the System hierarchical list Alternatively right click the list root and then click the appropriate multi viewer type on the shortcut menu System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections System replace with Kaleido 4AL replace with Kaleido 7RU x 2 with expansian replace with Kaleido 416 0 replace with Kaleido 16 3 replace with Kaleido Modular Kii 390143911 insert TSL seriall insert TSL network insert External Router insert Encoda insert Kalypso inzet Andromeda insert Serial to TCPAP Dispatcher insert Router Controller Pro Bel SVV P 05 insert Serial port test insert Router Controller Network Compact insert Router Controller Pro Bel SV P 02 insert Sony serial tally insert Kahuna in
333. r press AUDIO MONITORING on the RCP2 This will route the monitors audio source to the monitoring output assigned to the current RCP user Move the pointer over a video monitor and then click the monitor or press AUDIO MONITORING on the RCP2 This will route the specific audio level associated with the video monitor based on the assigned logical source Move the pointer over any other monitor and then click the monitor or press AUDIO MONITORING on the RCP2 This will route the first audio level of the associated logical source to the monitoring output Audio monitors that have an audio monitoring indicator see Configuring Audio Monitors on page 199 and that are currently assigned the same audio level will turn the color associated with the Setting a Display Monitor s Output Resolution current display see Calibrating the Audio Monitoring Color on page 104 showing that someone is listening at this specific display Audio monitoring indicator If multiple users are listening to the same audio source at the same time then the indicator will show one color only 1 the color associated with a display in the same room 2 the color associated with the display at the monitoring output that was enabled last in the room Controlling the Audio Monitoring Volume from the RCP2 e Adjust the audio volume for your assigned monitoring output by using the up and down volume buttons on the RCP2 e Mute the audio by p
334. r the remaining heads by clicking the corresponding areas in the layout 6 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Zooming and Panning a View To adjust the portion of a layout or room that is shown in the main window e Press and hold the Ctrl key then press the plus key to zoom in or the minus key to zoom out e Press and hold the Ctrl key then rotate the mouse wheel to zoom in or out e Type the zoom factor you wish to apply in the range of 2 to 1600 directly in the zoom box e Press and hold the spacebar then click and drag to pan e Use the scroll bars at the right side and bottom of the Layouts or Rooms tab e Inthe case of a layout view click and drag the layout navigator s red rectangle in the Tools pane Showing and Hiding the Layout Navigator To show or hide the layout navigator e On the View menu click Navigator Alternatively press Ctrl Shift N The layout navigator will appear in the Tools pane if it was hidden and vice versa System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms RCP users Actions Monitors 4x3 Monitors 16x9 Audiometers Channels Sources Monitor wall destinations Anput A Channel 09 imt amp hannel 1n Y Layout Multihead layout Room21nput 186 Configuring Video Monitors Configuring Video Monitors Resizing a Video Monitor To resize a video mon
335. rage area select the backup database you wish to restore and then click Open A message appears prompting you to confirm your intention 3 Click Yes Once the operation completes your XEdit workspace area will contain the retrieved database You can now work on this database in offline mode or export it back to the multi viewer Calibrating the Kaleido X A Kaleido X system includes a number of cards or modules that process a variety of signal types This section explains how to calibrate features related with the different signal types Key Concepts IMPORTANT Calibration changes are applied immediately Unlike other elements in a multi viewer configuration system calibrations do not need to be saved e When using XEdit in online mode calibration changes become immediately effective e When using XEdit in offline mode calibration changes are applied to the system representation in your local workspace Multi Viewer Output Calibrations Brightness The green red and blue brightness parameters determine the black level of the RGB output signals shown on the corresponding display See Calibrating the Brightness and Contrast on page 96 Contrast The green red and blue contrast parameters determine the white level of the RGB output signals shown on the corresponding display See Calibrating the Brightness and Contrast on page 96 93 Calibrating the Kaleido X 94 Color saturation DVI key
336. rce updates from the router and quick access to any router sources using the On screen Mouse control Kaleido X can also save source assignments on the layout presets and reconfigure the router from a recall of a layout preset For quality control applications the monitor wall pointer controlled by a mouse connected via a Kaleido RCP2 control panel can be used to assign a selected source to a monitoring output bus This creates a highly intuitive and rapid quality control capability Miranda has been working closely with Snell Pro Bel and NVISION now part of Miranda to provide a cost reduced multi image routing solution with compelling integration and a direct download of sources text databases from routers and production Switchers to the multi viewer system 265 Routers amp Kaleido X 266 See Tally Interface Devices on page 311 for more information on configuring supported production switchers to interact with the Kaleido X Software Internal Router The Kaleido X 7RU and Kaleido X16 multi viewers feature built in routing which eliminates the need for separate routing in control rooms and provides a significant cost saving Up to 48 unprocessed baseband outputs can be provided from any of the 96 HD SD SDI inputs to each Kaleido X 7RU processor In the case of a Kaleido X16 up to 2 baseband outputs can be provided from any of the 16 inputs These outputs can be used to feed high quality CRT monitors test equipment
337. ressing the Mute button on the RCP2 Attenuate the volume by 20 dB by pressing the 20 dB button on the RCP2 Triggering Audio Monitoring by Using an Action Note All audio and video monitors are configured by default with a Monitor audio action triggered by a single click To trigger audio monitoring by using an action e Create a Monitor audio action for the audio source you wish to monitor This action can be assigned to a monitor on the monitor wall or it can be a background action See Creating Actions on page 237 for details Setting a Display Monitor s Output Resolution It is possible to configure a display s output resolution from the monitor wall This is useful if you don t have access to another computer If there is no output on a display you can reset the output resolution to 1280 x 1024 60 Hz by using a keyboard shortcut hold down the Ctrl and Alt keys and then press R e Inthe case of a Kaleido X connect the keyboard to a USB port on the output card associated with the display If two displays are connected to this output card then the resolution is applied to both Alternatively use a keyboard connected to the Kaleido RCP2 59 Operation of the Monitor Wall e Inthe case of a Kaleido X16 connect the keyboard to one of the USB ports on the multi viewer If two displays are connected to the multi viewer then the resolution is applied to both Alternatively use a keyboard connected to the K
338. rface Devices System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Tips Channel Video Audio Text Alarm Time code Slee input 4iChannel 02 Video 02 Embedded audi Delete channel nies input A Channel 03 Video 03 Embedded audi l M _____TTime cone a Input label Assign item t Kaleido X FRU Input 2 Clear assignment Production Switcher mouta inpat video a Mame videol audiot texti alarmi timecode T aput AvChannel 01 Video 01 Embedded audi Time code Input AvChannell4 Video 04 Embedded audi gl Input AChannel 05 Embedded audi Input AAhannel 0G Viec BUS la a wild Time Eure Input 4 as ea at Note Refer to the table below for a list of valid source IDs and their meaning in the context of the Kahuna serial tally protocol Source IDs Kahuna 1 80 Inputs 1 80 81 Store 9 82 Store 10 83 Store 11 84 Store 12 85 Store 13 86 Store 14 87 Store 15 88 Store 16 89 DVE 1 Output 1 90 DVE 1 Output 2 91 DVE 1 Output 3 92 DVE 1 Output 4 93 M E 1 Output 1 94 M E 1 Output 2 95 M E 1 Output 3 96 M E 1 Output 4 328 Kahuna Production Switcher Source IDs Kahuna 97 Unused 98 Unused 99 M E 2 Output 1 100 M E 2 Output 2 101 M E 2 Output 3 102 M E 2 Output 4 103 Unused 104 Unused 105 M E 3 Output 1 106 M E 3 Output 2 107 M E 3 Output 3 108 M E 3 Output 4 109 Unused 110 Unused 111 Pgm
339. rface with these Thomson Grass Valley switchers for which the generic name Kayak switcher will be used 330 Kayak Production Switcher Note The on air tally feature was introduced in version 6 9 3 of the ACOS protocol which is only available with the Kayak series of Thomson Grass Valley production switchers Other features such as retrieving dynamic source or destination names and changing crosspoints are available on all ACOS enabled production switchers Configuring the Kayak Switcher Once you have established a serial connection between the switcher and your multi viewer you will need to enable the ACOS protocol on the switcher s serial port by using the Sidepanel software To set up the Kayak switcher 1 Physically connect one end of an RJ 45 crossover cable to the multi viewer s RS 422 port 2 Using an DE 9S to RJ 45 converter connect the other end of the crossover cable to one of the RS 422 control ports on the Kayak switcher The illustration below shows the location of the RS 422 ports on an 4RU Kayak HD switcher The RS 422 ports highlighted are numbered 1 8 from top to bottom Refer to your switcher s Installation and Service Manual for more details GPI In 1 8 Video In Video Out 1 M E 1 24 1 M E 1 12 GPI Out 1 32 LAN 2 M E 1 48 2 M E 1 24 Internal Switch with 4 Ports KKK OOO SD Reference Pi INPUTS 5 m y 5 3 7 i Tri Level Sync RS422 485 Serial Ports 8
340. ripheral device on the shortcut menu All peripheral devices added to the system appear in the System list If you are going to control the multi viewer from a device using one of the supported TCP IP router protocols SW P 02 SW P 08 Network Modular or NVISION then configure the router level to be controlled Click the multi viewer in the System list and then in the Properties tab specify the logical router and level you wish to control by selecting the appropriate values in the Router and Router level lists under TCP IP Router control Note As of version 5 00 of the Kaleido X Software the router selected by default for TCP IP control is the KX Router logical router 7 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Changes to the system are saved Creating a Cluster Clusters can only be created and configured in online mode Creating a cluster involves the following steps connect to a first multi viewer add more multi viewers configure new rooms that include displays fed by the different multi viewers create layouts for the new rooms replicate RCP users from one multi viewer to all other systems that are part of the cluster replicate custom display resolutions from one multi viewer to all others 19 az Managing Kaleido X Systems Adding Multi Viewers to a Cluster Notes e Any multi viewer you wish to add to a cluster must have Kaleido X Software version 4 00 or la
341. ription Preset 1 Layout Preset 2 Li Preset 3 Layouts Preset 4 Layout4 Preset 6 Preset 7 Preset 5 Preset 9 Preset 10 Full screen settings Audio monitoring output Keyboard timer Preset 5 RCP layout preset 5 for user in current roo Note If no layout is specified for this user preset the layout that has been selected for this preset in the room s preferences will apply It will appear in gray in the Preset n box See Setting Room Preferences on page 252 257 Ei Managing Kaleido RCP2 Users Assigning a Full Screen Layout to an RCP User To assign a full screen layout to an RCP user 1 In the main window click the RCP users tab and then select the user for whom you wish to configure the RCP2 s FULL SCREEN button from under the appropriate room in the rooms hierarchical list 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Full screen settings box and then click the button that appeared at the end of the box Tips Properties RCP users Foor User User name Pass yword Description Preset 1 Preset 2 Preset 3 Preset 4 Preset 5 Preset 6 Preset 7 Preset 6 Preset 9 Preset 10 Full screen settings Audio monitoring output Keyboard timer Full screen settings User2 RAREREREE Layout Layout Layouts Layout4 Layouts Inputs Input Mone Mone Mone i Full screen settings button Mone United States International Mone Full screen layout and zone used by the
342. rkers 43 Operation of the Monitor Wall 44 Displaying Subtitles and Closed Caption Text Note The KMV 3901 3911 multi viewers do not support displaying of subtitles and closed captions Setting the Text Mode To change the text mode for a video monitor 1 Right click the appropriate video source on the monitor wall 2 Onthe shortcut menu point to the current text mode indicator either CC 608 CC 708 Text CC Subtitling or Teletext amp Subtitling then point to Text mode and click the text mode you wish to apply mee Assign source to manitor My a 1a he j Send to KX Router output On e a Service 1 Aspect ratio Service 2 Service 3 L Qwerscan L 5 T 5 R 5 B 5 service 4 Service 5 a Auto sense ml safe area Service 6 Aarne ile I Is lik d Extended services P O CC FOB lcc Co r08 b i i Text made b Monitor Wall To prevent the shortcut menu from being too crowded by CC 608 CC 708 and Teletext Subtitling options its content label icon and available choice changes depending on the current video format Signal type Text Mode Icon Label Available choices SD SDI CVBS 525 Auto CC 608 CC 608 Off CC1 Text mode sub menu Any CC 608 SD SDI CVBS 625 Auto Teletext amp Subtitling Off Page A Edit Subtitling pages Text mode sub menu Any Teletext amp Subtitling HD SDI Auto CC 708 CC 708 Off Service 1
343. rly when you first set up a system in XEdit it has a number of pre populated cards and logical sources as well as one predefined RCP2 user Admin However the default XEdit database does not include rooms or layouts If you wish to use default rooms and layouts as a starting point for building your system you can either import the default database from the multi viewer or use the Retrieve backup function to load the default database from the DVD shipped with the system In some situations you may wish to repurpose an existing XEdit database that was designed for a specific multi viewer and use it with a different multi viewer model After the database is converted it may still 87 az Managing Kaleido X Systems include calibrations that were only relevant to the original multi viewer model This is not desirable if the new system has limited memory compared to the original one In such a case restoring the factory default calibrations and then calibrating your new system as required is faster than recreating rooms and layouts It is also possible to reset resolutions audio scales or widget libraries to their factory default definitions Note If you already have custom resolutions or audio scales that you may wish to reuse make sure you have a back up before proceeding See Backing Up Resolutions on page 75 and Backing Up Audio Scales on page 75 for details Custom monitors are not affected by this operation since
344. rm safe area image to the video monitor The image can be in PNG GIF or JPEG format Note The maximum size for each image is 256 KB and the maximum overall size for all images is 10 MB The image can be in PNG GIF or JPEG format To ensure that the aspect ratio of the imported image is preserved you should position the graphic on a fully transparent background with the same aspect ratio as the video monitor on which it is to appear To add a free form safe area image to a video monitor 1 Open an existing layout or create a new one 2 Click an existing video monitor in the layout or create a new one 3 Inthe Properties pane select the Show markers check box under Safe area markers Tools System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Monitors 4x3 Monitors 16x9 Audiometers Clocks a Timecodes a Timers gd UMDs Channels Frame Adnput amp 4 Channel 01 Frame Adnput 4 Channel 03 Frame Adnput 4 Channel 04 Frame Adnput amp Channel 05 Frame Adnput 4 Channel 06 Frame Adnput 4 Channel 07 Frame Adnput amp Channel 08 Frame Adnput 4 Channel 09 Frame Adnput amp Channel 02 l Frame Alnput 4 Channel 10 B00 w one oo d h Mb woe 4 Click the Custom safe zone image box Layout Multihead layout Room1 MultiHeadL ayout0 Properties Tips Layouts Layout Muttihead layout
345. ro Bel SvV P 08 Serial port test Router Controller Network Compact Router Controller Pro Bel SyV P 02 Sony serial tally Kahuna Enter device identitier 4 A new physical router appears in the System list System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Equipment Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections System Kaleido 7RU Kaleido 4RU Kaleido FRU x 2 with expansion Kaleido 16 D Kaleido 16 S Kaleido Modular KM 3901 8x2 TSL gt Kaleido X 7RU NewPhysicalRouter Click the Interconnects tab draw a line between the multi viewer and the External Router icons to establish a connection i e add a connection properties entry to the database and then click the line Configuring an External Router System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCF users Actions Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections KALEIDO Kaleido X 7RU Click the line to configure the connection properties 5 Inthe Properties tab choose a connection type from the Connect to list This can be a serial port connection to one of the multi viewer s outputs on a Kaleido X each KXO Dual or KXO Dual3 card has one RS 422 port which can be used for this purpose or a network TCP IP or UDP IP connection T
346. rror or Critical Disabled Error detected Covers multiple conditions No alarm assigned to the status indicator Alarm exists but is disabled at the source by the user The Kaleido X has the ability to deactivate some alarms on the hardware itself Alarm exists but was not reported yet The software is waiting for the hardware or driver to update the alarm Alarm that has been removed or was never added It can happen if the alarm reference in XEdit does not exist on the multi viewer for example if a KXI card is removed from a Kaleido X multi viewer All associated alarms will disappear and become disabled on the multi viewer Could not get status Failed to communicate with device to get status It could happen for example if the network connection is lost Another example is a loss of signal that would trigger a critical alarm for signal presence while the alarm state for all other parameters would become unknown The freeze or black status is disabled if the signal is not present Alarm Suppression Alarms that are not relevant momentarily or on a recurrent basis can be squelched either manually or by defining schedules so that only meaningful alarm information remains to be monitored 120 Global Alarms Global Alarms A logical source comprises different level categories including alarms Each logical source can include multiple alarm levels one for each alarm state that can be reported to the Kaleido X system
347. rs on page 53 Assigning a Timer to a Room on page 255 and Assigning a Timer to an RCP User on page 260 for more information 213 az Creating Layouts 214 Configuring UMDs Setting the text font To set the text font for a UMD 1 Inthe Layouts tab click the UMD whose text font you wish to set 2 Inthe Properties pane click the Text font box under Appearance then click the button that appeared at the end of the box The Select a Font window appears Select a Font 3 Select the appropriate values from the Font Font Style and Size lists 4 Click OK Setting a static UMD Text To configure static text for a UMD 1 In the Layouts tab double click the UMD whose static text you with to set 2 Make sure the appropriate input language and method are set in your operating system 3 Type the desired static text To configure static UMD text from the sources table 1 In the Channels Sources tab click the cell that corresponds to the appropriate text level of the logical source that is assigned to the UMD whose static text you with to set 2 Type the new static text Configuring a UMD s Alarm Reporting Behavior To prevent users from missing temporary alarms on the monitor wall monitors that are capable of displaying an alarm status e g video monitors UMDs alarm monitors can be configured with a latching Configuring UMDs mechanism An alarm latch will keep the error state visible unti
348. rsion information for troubleshooting or servicing purposes Key Concepts Term Description Kaleido RCP2 The Kaleido RCP2 is a multi function remote control panel designed for use with Miranda s Kaleido X series multi viewer models Ethernet connectivity allows multiple RCP2 users to access multiple Kaleido X systems allowing convenient access to real time operating features Audio Bridge Terminal The Audio Bridge Terminal ABT is an external audio multiplexer serializer for the Kaleido X series multi viewer models XEdit XEdit is a Java Web Start client used to create layouts for the monitor wall and to configure the multi viewer from your PC or laptop XAdmin XAdmin is a Web client that your system administrator uses to manage the multi viewer system System snapshot The Kaleido X system generates data to keep track of certain events This data is stored as log files that can be extracted from the system as a compressed ZIP archive created when requested by the user for specific purposes e g troubleshooting This ZIP archive is called a system snapshot 345 16 Administration and Servicing 346 Term Description System status A system status refers to a live summary from within XAdmin This summary is based on the health status of each module in your multi viewer system see Viewing a Multi Viewer s Status Information on page 386 Version Each software firmware and har
349. ry select any multi viewer type and then drag it onto the root of the System hierarchical list Tools Sy stem Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCF users Action Description Calibrations Interconnects Router configurations Router connection Equipment E aleido x 7RU aleido 4RU aleido FRU x 2 wih expansion aleido x1 6 0 H ANDROMEDA aleido x16 5 l ve ENCODA aleido Modular Kii 390113911 pe Kaleido X16 D X16_218 10 5 5 218 SL seriall 3 EE Kalypso SL network Kayak xternal Router H SERIAL PORT ncoda TSL aly peo ndromeda q Date 74410 4 25 PM Connection to 10 5 5 215 established successfully I f I m T o om m4 Phat i gt The Add Multi Viewer to Cluster window appears 80 Adding Multi Viewers to a Cluster 5E Add Multi Viewer to Cluster gt lt Remote IF address 10 55 218 3 IP addresses for all the multi viewer systems that are on the same subnet as your PC are included in the list lf your PC and the multi viewer you wish to add are on the same subnet then you can select the multi viewer s IP address from the list Otherwise type the appropriate IP address in the box 5E Add Multi Viewer to Cluster gt Remote IP address m r 10 5 5 215 10 0 9 104 S0 9 104 MEERE 10 6650 SW FR4 10 0 9 952 0 0 9 92 10 014 143 JimEcho 10 6 0 90 30 39 1039 Th
350. s if they are undocked by clicking their X button 2 Onthe View menu point to Panes and tabs and then click Restore default window settings To close XEdit e On the File menu click Exit Alternatively click the x button in the upper right corner of the main application window Using XEdit Online When using XEdit in online mode any changes made are applied and stored directly on the multi viewer When using XEdit in offline mode all changes are stored locally on the user s PC and the database must be exported to the multi viewer for the changes to take effect When connected to a multi viewer any change you make to your system s configuration takes effect immediately on the multi viewer itself your local database is not involved The online mode is not limited to basic system configuration changes can also be made to existing logical sources rooms layouts RCP users etc 69 az Managing Kaleido X Systems Note Cluster systems can only be configured in online mode Connecting to a Multi Viewer To connect to a multi viewer 1 On the Configure menu click Connect The Connect to Multi Viewer window appears 4 Connect to Multi Viewer Remote IP address 7 10 0 9 39 B IP addresses for all the multi viewers that are on the same subnet as your PC are included in the list 2 Ifyour PC and the multi viewer are on the same subnet then you can select the IP address of the multi viewer you wish to connect
351. s Kaleido X layout elements and their purposes and provides detailed configuration instructions Key Concepts Term Description Layout A layout is a visual grouping of monitors that appear on displays within a room A layout includes different types of monitors in a variety of placements and sizes There are two types of layouts room layouts and full screen layouts Monitor A monitor also called widget is a graphical element that is part of a layout XEdit supports several types of primitive layout elements e g clocks video monitors audio monitors UMDs time code monitors etc as well as composite monitors Video monitor A video monitor is a layout element used to define an area for displaying a video signal It is represented in XEdit by the boundary box made visible by clicking the element 171 iz Creating Layouts 172 Term Video window Description A video window is represented in XEdit by the blue rectangle inside a video monitor The video window does not necessarily cover the complete video monitor s area Video raster AFD VI Video signal that is displayed inside the video monitor on a monitor wall Active Format Description encoded in the Video Index AFD 2016 Active Format Description encoded in the ancillary data according to the SMPTE 2016 standard WSS Automatic Aspect Ratio Composite monitor Wide Screen Signaling The aspect ratio of video displayed
352. s TOANE dada EEA A GATE 252 Setting REP User RIEL ERCNCOS ere siener riian iE EAE sewing ale data nan AAE ETAN 256 12 Routers amp Kaleido X 265 OVINE sete ona te Rasa bees eae sede al E O or aglaw ope Stacey concatenated noon arenas ete 265 internal ROU e520 backs ee PaceciieKsas sates eeuhen sasen esa ead dere ons meade pewes co uaw seek es 266 Kaleido X asa ROWE iwitcicct etneo tuck eer OEE E eE e 266 K CONCED a E A T eee E ne news 267 Router Control Configurations ouesuesnesuesuesuesuesursrrrresersrererrerserrerrersrerrssesee 268 ROUTER PTOTOCOIS mesi tor eirin AEE OEE Ge E A E EE A A 272 Senar CONNEC HONS eiennenn a AE a a a A a O enoei 275 DT EE EEE E E EEA ATE EEIN EEEE EEE ET retry EAE E ET 277 Detaled DIrecUOnS est anes envepda a soit E need Sc ee mv EEA E TA EE OE E E 279 Configuring an External ROWEN scs ca cutter ri oea NEEE A AENEA EEE E A NA aa 279 Configuring a Router Controllets si iacinavwneendtePiendbaceguasenes moh mrss nant bedioswededewmeaeweiers 292 Configuring Internal Router Cards cc ccc cece cece cece eee e teeta ee tense eee eeen stan etanetanetene 298 ROUTERCONNECUO S as aaron russ Saree ETAETA E he aoa sane or anal ale tg aes 303 ROUTER Ccara EXPANSION eoi s ENTE nenie T ne indian ie EE EE A EET 306 13 Tally Interface Devices 311 Configuring Kalypso Andromeda Serial to TCP IP Dispatcher and TSL Serial Devices cccceeceeeeceanees 311 Ross Video Production Switcher ssuesu
353. s a workaround you can use XEdit open the layout that contains the text you wish to modify e g static UMD text and then use the appropriate input method from your client PC or laptop To select an input method 1 Click the appropriate video source on the monitor wall 2 Press left Alt Shift 1 on the external keyboard The Select Input Method menu appears 3 On the Select Input Method menu click the appropriate input method 47 Operation of the Monitor Wall 48 Select Input Method a System Input Methods Thai Input Method Vietnamese Input Method EMapiIME express kMaplME Simredo express Mifon Il Chinese Pinyin Method Chinese Pinyin wf Tones Simp Chinese Pinyin Method Simp Chinese Pinyin wf Tones Trad Chinese Pinyin Method Trad Chinese Pinyin wf Tones You can now type text in your language of choice using an external keyboard connected to the Kaleido RCP2 Assigning Sources to Monitors Any monitor in a layout can be assigned a logical source in XEdit It is possible to change the logical source assignment directly on the monitor wall Note Logical source assignments can also be changed by configuring actions in XEdit See Creating Actions on page 237 for more information Assigning a Logical Source to a Monitor by Using the RCP2 To assign a logical source to a monitor by using the RCP2 CHANNEL button 1 Move the pointer over the monitor that is to be assigned a logical source and
354. s also called studio RGB See Calibrating Detail Enhancement and Dynamic Range on page 111 Aspect ratio Unlike HD signals where aspect ratio information when available always follows the SMPTE 2016 standard there are different standards for encoding aspect ratio information in SD signals The AFD amp WSS calibrations determine which standard will be applied by default to SD signals feeding the selected multi viewer input The aspect ratio of video windows on the monitor wall can then be automatically adjusted based on the current source assignment See Calibrating Automatic Aspect Ratio Decoding on page 110 NTSC standard The NTSC and NTSC J standards are different with regard to their black level This parameter determines which standard is to be applied to the selected analog input signal Subtitling closed captioning Key Concepts Presence alarms can be configured against up to four preset Teletext WST pages for each input signal The Teletext page selection parameters determine which pages will be monitored The Teletext page set as Page A will also be decoded and its content can be displayed in a video window Requires the CC XDS option see Enabling Options on page 371 There are also subtitling calibrations for the EIA 608 CC and the DTVCC alarms See Calibrating Subtitling Closed Captioning on page 112 Metadata holding time Zero VU dBu Zero VU dBFS The holding time para
355. s and production fly cases as well as community television The Kaleido X16 s super silent design is highly appreciated for use within studios and control rooms Kaleido X16 provides a subset of the features of the Kaleido X 4RU and 7RU models e 1RU non modular frame e 16 auto sensing 3Gbps HD SD Analog video inputs two independent HDMI outputs e Two 3Gbps HD SD router outputs 3Gbps with 3D support SMPTE 425M Level A amp B Getting Started Expansion through combination with upstream router 4 analog channel 2 digital channel audio monitoring 2 HD SDI monitoring outputs DXF 100 optical DVI extension module simplifies long runs to monitors from frame and is a single fiber solution for supporting high resolution 1920 x 1200 displays over distances of up to 1000 m 3300 ft Choice of multi viewer remote control panels simple Kaleido RCP2 and advanced RCP 200 with router control Internal router control by NVISION control panel and NV9000 Controller Super silent for installation within studios and control rooms Kaleido X 4RU The Kaleido X 4RU is a multi room multi image display processor and router in a single expandable chassis Its unique mix of capabilities represents the most integrated monitoring and routing solution As a multi image processor it offers the highest level of signal flexibility Each chassis can display 32 HD SD or Analog inputs any number of times in any size across 4 displays of any res
356. saueses 148 CUSTER Sa tmncextaas dean auarreutnaridieea anaes 151 CHEATING erein a wees 146 CASINO e E E E eacie 166 display aspect ratio 0c eee 162 display diagonal size 000 163 display height e eee eeeees 164 display position c eee eeeees 165 display properties 0ee eee 152 display resolution 154 157 160 display rotation cc cence eens 165 display width cece cence eens 164 CIS PIGYS ssaracaacesn AEAEE 148 full screen layouts cee ee eee 176 full screen ZONE cece eee eee ee 151 VOU 5 aesaet a aa 175 ODCNING ccceecidre reiret 147 A EE EEEE 186 ZOOM VEW ercsi carotone 186 Ross Video production switchers 5 313 BOUON arerin E dettaredtondeh Gute doesn 165 Router cards 395 CXOGIISION EE EEE ESE 306 SDI signal reclocking eeeeee 116 Router controllers cece cece eee ees 265 ROULEIS varese entene edenin a Ea 265 ChOSSDONNS 253 ocietda died ieii 50 51 field selection switching 0085 115 IOVEIS EE E 267 298 299 MaX ID eerren iana 267 298 S gale dled esnia a aE 43 Kee aao N 189 MAKES aeranta AA 189 SAN MOUC aaan 161 SDI output format 0 ccc eee ee eee 161 Serial devices 0 0 cc cece cece cence ceeeeeeees 311 Serial port test third party device 339 Serial to TCP IP Dispatcher 000 0 311 SONIDO n
357. se you wish to import IP Address Remote IP address we l 10 0 9 39 IP addresses for all the multi viewers that are on the same subnet as your PC are included in the list 2 Ifyour PC and the multi viewer are on the same subnet then you can select the IP address of the multi viewer from the list Otherwise type the appropriate IP address in the box 89 az Managing Kaleido X Systems A window appears prompting you to confirm that you really want to import data from the multi viewer Click Yes A progress window appears followed by a message stating whether the import succeeded or not Click OK Restoring Factory Defaults From the Kaleido X DVD Note See Retrieving a Backup on page 75 for details To restore factory defaults from the Kaleido X DVD 1 3 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Retrieve backup The Retrieve backup window appears In Retrieve backup navigate to the Kaleido X DVD locate the appropriate default database for your multi viewer type for instance FR7 factory default DB zip ifyou have a Kaleido X 7RU select it and then click Open A message appears prompting you to confirm your intention Click Yes Factory Defaults by Multi Viewer Model Model Rooms Layouts RCP2 Users KMV 3901 3911 Bo 1 30 1 Admin KMV 3901 3911 8x1 8 1 22 1 Admin Kaleido X16 S 16 1 20 1 Admin Kaleido X16 D 16 1 20 1 Admin Kaleido X 4RU 32 2 4 1 Adm
358. serializer for the Kaleido X The Kaleido X supports up to 128 inputs and all of the video input connectors are located on the rear panels associated with the KXI series of cards There is not enough space on the rear panels to also include the audio connectors The ABT provides connector space for the audio signal inputs and multiplexes all the audio signals into combined serial feeds on coaxial cables that connect to the KXI cards Detailed Directions Note The ABT is powered through the RJ 45 Ethernet connector There is no power ON OFF button so the device is ON whenever a powered Ethernet cable is connected To configure the IP address and other network settings of the ABT 1 Connect a PC to a switch 2 Referring to Changing the Client PC s IP Address on page 363 configure the PC with the following network settings DHCP Off Static IP address 10 0 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway 10 0 0 1 3 Apply power to the Audio Bridge Terminal and make sure it is connected to the same switch as the PC If the switch is Power over Ethernet PoE enabled simply connect it to the unit using an Ethernet cable If not PoE mid span inserter equipment must be placed between the switch and the Audio Bridge Terminal 4 Press the RESET button located on the right hand side of the ABT rear panel beside the ETHERNET POWER RJ 45 connector for at least 1 second The Audio Bridge Terminal will reboot wit
359. sert Kayak Note If you deleted the initial multi viewer entry from the System list then the menu shows Insert options for each multi viewer type otherwise it shows Replace with options for the remaining multi viewer types A message may appear prompting you to confirm your intention a oo Do you want to restore the database factory defaults based on the selected muti viewer model i J The current database content will be lost 4 Click Yes to have the system populated with factory defaults for the selected multi viewer type See Restoring Factory Defaults on page 87 for details 78 Creating a Cluster Alternatively click No if this system is based on an existing multi viewer system whose room and layout configurations you wish to reuse For instance you could be converting two 7RU multi viewers to an expansion system Refer to the Kaleido X 7RU Expansion chapter in the Kaleido X 7RU Hardware Description amp Installation Manual for more information Note Databases created for a KMV 3901 3911 Kaleido X16 a Kaleido X 4RU or a Kaleido X 7RU system are not fully compatible with each other It is important to select the proper multi viewer type at this stage Select the relevant peripheral devices in the equipment library and drag them onto the root of the System hierarchical list in the main window Alternatively right click the list root and then click the appropriate pe
360. set 2 Click the clock 3 Inthe Properties pane click the Logo box under Appearance 4 Click the button that appeared at the end of the box The Select Image window appears 5 Ifthe image you wish to use is not already listed in Select Image then click the Open button to open the Browse Image window Locate the image select it and then click Open 223 az Creating Layouts Gi Logo _I_Documentation_color jpg Miranda iControl colorFooter jpg Miranda _logo_transparent png All images png pay git we 6 Select the Logo you wish to use Note The maximum size for each image is 256 KB and the maximum overall size for all images is 10 MB The image can be in PNG GIF or JPEG format Images can be used on multiple layouts and only need to be imported to the database once 7 Click Open The image is imported into the database 8 In Select image select the image file from the Image selection list and then click OK Miranda_logo_transparent f le F geal a The Logo appears under Preview 9 Click OK 224 Working with Composite Monitors The logo appears on the clock background Working with Composite Monitors Creating a Composite Composite monitors encapsulate a number of primary elements e g a video monitor one or two audio monitors a UMD and a time code that can then be managed as a single object The following example outlines the basic rules to follow in order to create
361. set the appropriate value between 0 and 15 in the Properties tab kd Calibration Detail Enhancer treo Apply to all Click Dynamic Range and then set the appropriate value either Full Range or Video Range in the Properties tab kd Calibration Dynamic Range Full Ranae 0 255 ee Calibrating Subtitling Closed Captioning To configure Teletext Subtitling page selection 1 In the main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears In the list expand the multi viewer whose inputs you wish to calibrate Expand the appropriate input then one of its Video elements Under Teletext amp Subtitling Alarms expand the Page A element and then click Page selection Y BE Kaleido x 4RU b M GPVGENLOCK KXA GPILGEN M OPTION A H OPTION B Y INPUT A Kxl 16 o Fevideo D1 P Wideo Alarms fe Video Calibrations P608 Alarms Y Teletext amp Subtitling Alarms o Pages 2 Subtitling holding time i Teletext gt Loudness Bialnorm Multi Viewer Input Calibrations In the Properties pane type the page number you wish to be the default selection for Page A in the Teletext Page A Selection box Alternatively use the slider to set the page number kd Calibration Teletext Page A Selection 2 101 C Appytoal Click Apply to all if you wish this setting to be the default Page
362. signed to exactly one timer Multiple timer monitors can be assigned to the same timer Start stop reset or mode changes applied to one monitor affect all other monitors assigned to the same timer 7 Click Save 8 Modify the timer s Appearance properties as needed 212 Configuring Timers kd ADDearance Background MB aie Bevel raised Digits color 1 R 255 G 255 5 255 Expired background color BBR O G 0 6 0 Expired digits color BB R255 G 06 0 On screen control T Transparency 50 9 To attach an action to the timer click the button beside Mouse click The Action Editor window appears 10 Drag an action from the left pane to the middle pane then specify the action s behavior in the right pane Action Editor Mouse click Action list Double Click Single Click Start a timer SEA Unlatch Acknowledge all Feset a timer Pause a timer Start a timer Monitor audio Switch router crosspoint Set GFI output Show full screen layout Hide full screen layout Assign channel Custom Select the timer to start Note For more information on creating actions refer to Creating Actions on page 237 11 Click OK to save the action assignment and close the Action Editor window 12 Click Save to save the layout with the new timer monitor 13 Export the database to a Kaleido X and load the layout The interactive timer monitor appears on the Monitor Wall Note See Using Time
363. signment option on the monitor wall menu e g switch output 23 of external router A Level 2 to QC monitor 2 The Kaleido X Software interprets the command and sends it to the designated router over a serial or TCP IP connection using the appropriate router protocol 3 The physical router receives the command and then relays it to the other physical routers in the cascade using an internal communications mechanism e g MIDI 4 When the targeted Level receives the command it executes a crosspoint switch either changing the signal on one of its connections to a multi viewer input or Mn Sending the signal to another device e g vector scope QC monitor ISO recorder 270 Router Control Configurations Translating Commands from External Router Controllers 4 OOOOOOCOOOCOCOOOOO asa s ares id 000000000000000 aam i Level 1 SOA AAAA AAAA AAAA OLO SSe Ke fed feb Le fe fed Lo Ko fod fe fed fo e Co e Ke wy WS 9 GSOGO DASOASGOGOOSOS86 ie dh ol 6 L i Level 2 Level 3 A system controller e g Miranda NVISION NV9000 Snell Pro Bel Aurora Nevion Network Electronics VikinX sends a router command to an external router connected to the multi viewer The Kaleido X Software detects the command translates it to the appropriate router protocol and then sends it to the designated router over a serial or TCP IP connection The rou
364. spoint switch needed 3 The multi viewer sends this command to the external router over a serial or TCP IP connection using the appropriate protocol 304 Router Connections 4 The external router redirects the specified source signal 5 The new signal follows the physical connection to one of the multi viewer inputs reserved for this purpose is processed and appears on the monitor wall To configure router connections 1 Click the Router Connections tab which lists all multi viewer inputs and for each the associated output connector from a router For each multi viewer input you wish to connect to an external router e g INPUT A Video 01 click the first menu under Router and choose a physical router level e g MyRouter Video System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCF users Actions Description calibrations Interconnects Router asl Router connections Router outputs Inputs Router Port NPLUT 4 Video 01 __MyRouter Video 4 INPUT A video 02 Unconnected INPUT A video 03 e OPTION A l INPUT 4 Video 04 emulsz Levelt m INPUT A video 05 MAn INPUT amp Wideo OF Unconnected INPUT 4 video O8 Unconnected ae Maps to BNC connectors The name of the Maps to OUTPUT BNC connectors on the multi viewer physical router on the physical router Note Unconnected means that this multi viewer input is not connected to a router For ex
365. ss to Each Device in Your System 0 cece ee cence cence eee eee sees eeeeeeneeaues 358 ENADO ODIOS e dia svasees aca etnien E hava EE boners AEE AE ETRA 371 Configuring Power Supply Redundancy on a Kaleido X16 nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnsnesnerenesrese sn 373 SEULDA Eo i EE E A A E I EA E E EE E E E E N E 375 Obtaining EDID Data From Display Screens When Using the DXF 100 Interface cc cece ee ceeeceeeees 382 S Ta e AE POTEET E E A E EE E S EOE nel E TEE 383 Upgrading your Multi Viewer System c cece cece eens ceecceecceseceeseteeeeueeeeteeeeteeenes 390 Index 391 Contact Us 399 vii toc viii New Features This chapter describes new features in Kaleido X version 5 30 Overview Kaleido X version 5 30 is a major release adding support for the new Kaleido Modular KMV 3911 multi viewer model Version 5 30 also introduces a few enhancements New Feature in Kaleido X Version 5 30 Support for the new Kaleido Modular KMV 3911 multi viewer The KMV 3911 multi viewer replaces the KMV 3901 In addition to the earlier model s existing features the KMV 3911 supports up to two HD SDI monitoring outputs with embedded audio one associated with Head 1 and one with Head 2 See KMV 3901 3911 on page 348 for the list of optional features and Configuring the HD SDI Monitoring Output Format on page 161 for more information Enhancements in Kaleido X Version 5 30 Teletext subtitling co
366. ssnesnessureseesessresersecsersersesorsserorssessesersseserses 313 yi SONY PROCUCHOMOWILCNER ocak aa ENERE ANET EAN OT TENTO 318 Kanuna Producton SWIN Eies te zerera nr aa ATT A ATAS 323 Kayak Production SWARE aeren eE EAE E AERE ORT 330 Configuring the Kayak Switcher encase hela authtader qratenisantadtdynevernes bimeleh tase aneee cide 331 Configuring ANE MUTE VICW Ol ac caratusereeaii tears ahaenns E A ET AE N T EETA seu 332 Sal PORT ESCAGCI Sb oncheeccurecunsncruser nesses inlecekonereseearnetcubeatoumoeeei ents aotaateucnesrss 339 14 Using the Kaleido Remote Control Protocol 341 OVCIVIEW aaae in senteeeuataat tert aay enwod an ounese unm on Ase manume anne owen eens ae 341 15 Using the Serial to TCP IP Dispatcher 343 OVENI OW aaae beta iuataa te he ance ieodan ounces Mun mom Nee eam aaa Use owen ea ane aie 343 16 Administration and Servicing 345 Key CONCCD Sanday ettnnesh eon ta test atte eas wig lat ate Maat tane ai alia hs a 345 Default IP SENO lt tte lt e Osa ddataec eiaivew a nee aa aa a aa e a a aa ei 346 Hardware and Software Options a dca sirens adaseesansece ese eides susandaheutenncseeeeteee neu Madam auks 347 Dashboard MCSSAUES 05 distinc dcbiclocmmichaalsidsctupieenomminetisebastaliwnnnep betioenetiedgumsncnss 349 Network Considerations amp Port Usage cee ccc cee cece cnet e ence eee e eens tne e ene tneteeenneeeeeas 353 Detanca Directions orarin e EE E E T naan oa ena tne een A 358 Assigning an IP Addre
367. t Java RMI 32768 65535 Notes Remote Method Invocation client server communication Dynamic Allocation of ports Required for communication between client and Application Server This range can be restricted to match specific security requirements A minimum of 4000 ports should be allocated 355 16 Administration and Servicing From Multi Viewer to from RCP2 The following ports used for communications to from RCP2 control panels are open by default on all Kaleido X systems Port Transport Notes Service RCP2 Used to listen for Kaleido X discovery packets RCP2 protocol RCP2 protocol On multicast 230 8 8 9 for RCP2 For RCP2 From Multi Viewer to Peripheral Devices Port Transport Notes Service SMTP 25 TCP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol for e mail alerts From Peripheral Devices to Multi Viewer The following ports must be open on peripheral devices e g router controllers Port Transport Notes 2000 TCP Used to control the Kaleido X internal router via the Snell Pro Bel SW P 02 protocol 4381 TCP Used to control the Kaleido X internal router via the Nevion Network protocol 5194 TCP Used to control the Kaleido X internal router via the NVISION Ethernet protocol Compact router protocol 14000 TCP Used to control the Kaleido X internal router via the Snell Pro Bel SW P 08 protocol Router drivers also use default ports Driver ETL GVG 7000 N
368. t Otherwise type the appropriate IP address in the box Click OK A window appears prompting you to confirm that you really want to import data from the multi viewer Click Yes A progress window appears followed by a message stating whether the import succeeded or not The imported data has replaced the former content in your local workspace The originating system s multi viewer type and IP address now appear in the System list Exporting a Database I 3 Kaleido X16 D 10 5 5 248 Multi viewer type IP address Exporting a Database To export a database 1 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Export XEdit C _DBXE File Edt Configure wiew Tools Help Connect Disconnect Tools Database pg Export as Use XAdmin Eg Import Contigure Audio Bridge Terminal Create backup d Retrieve backup Merge backup O Do not prompt for the database path Restore The Export to Multi Viewer window appears prompting you for the IP address of the multi viewer to which you wish to transfer the database Export to Multi Viewer Remote IP address 219 10 0 9 92 0 0 9 92 10 0 14 159 0 14 7159 10 0 9 94 0 0 9 94 10 0 9 104 50 9 104 0 14 1535 0 0 3 70 50 9 1404 50 85 2168 IP addresses for all the multi viewers that are on the same subnet as your PC are included in the list 2 Ifyour PCand t
369. t 2 z Internal router 16x2 b KX Router 20x34 al at al a an ad mi 5 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The sources table is saved 6 Click the Layouts tab and open the appropriate layout 7 From the Channel Sources list in the Tools pane drag the new logical source onto the monitor you wish to configure and then save the layout 142 Monitoring Internal Router Outputs on the Monitor Wall Sample Scenario Channels Sources tonitor wall destinations Channels OUTER OUT2 T Once such a logical source is available you can also assign it to other composite or video monitors directly on the monitor wall and their video window will dynamically follow the video signal sent to that router output Note The current version of the Kaleido X Software does not support monitoring of the associated audio signal 143 Creating Logical Sources 144 Setting Uj This section describes Kaleido X rooms and their configuration Key Concepts Term Room Display versus monitor Description A room is a visual grouping of displays that represent the physical displays positioned and sized as they are installed in an actual room Multiple operators can share the same room The grouping of display creates a large virtual monitor wall that operators see as a single large display The room definition specifies display resolutions an
370. t Aichannelo4 4 satio O ADA Vid TC Anput amp Channel 02 2 A02 Emb1 inputAvideo AO Vid TC input Aichannel O55 AOS Emb1 inputl videos AOS Vid TC input Achannel D6 amp BUG S406 Emp frewi4 viceot ADG Vid To The sources table is sorted based on the elements in the selected level Resizing the Sources Table s Columns Resizing the Sources Table s Columns To resize a column manually e Inthe category or level heading row point the column boundary you wish to move until the pointer becomes a resize pointer and then drag the boundary until the column is the desired width To resize a column to the width of its content e Inthe category or level heading row point either boundary for the column you wish to resize to fit until the pointer becomes a resize pointer and then double click The column width is adjusted to fit the content To resize all columns to the width of their content e Inthe category or level heading row point any column boundary until the pointer becomes a resize pointer and then triple click All columns are resized to fit their content Configuring Alarm Levels To assign an alarm to a logical source s alarm level 1 Click the Channels Sources tab in the main window 2 Inthe sources table click the cell that corresponds to the logical source and alarm level you wish to configure 3 Expand the filtered System list in the Tools pane locate the alarm and drag it o
371. t Protocol TCP IP Use the following IP address IP address We Gees nstall Eor A Subnet mask 755 255 255 0 Description Default gateway EEN Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication Obtain DNS server address automatically across diverse interconnected networks Use the folowing DNS server addresses ss C Show icon in notification area when connected Prefered DNS server Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity Atemate DNS server Advanced 4 On the General tab click Use the following IP address 364 6 l 8 Detailed Directions Type an IP address in the same range as the default IP address of the Kaleido X multi viewer For example if the IP address of the Kaleido X multi viewer is 10 0 3 707 then the IP address of your client PC could be 10 0 3 123 If you are unsure contact your network administrator Type a subnet mask in the same range as that of the Kaleido X Click OK In Local Area Connection Properties click OK Changing an IP Address on Windows 7 To change the IP address of a client PC that has Windows 7 1 6 i 8 Click the Start button and then click Control Panel In the search box type adapter and then under Network and Sharing Center click View network connections In Network Connections right click Local Are
372. t database from local iip multi viewer workspace to multi viewer Working Online If you are connected to a multi viewer and working online in XEdit you are actually editing the database that is located inside the multi viewer s file system There is one database per multi viewer An expansion system comprising two Kaleido X 7RU frames is also managed through a single database A cluster system includes one database for each multi viewer in the cluster When you have completed your changes create a backup of the current database and store it in a secure location on your PC In the case of a cluster or cascade system make a separate backup from each member To back up the current Kaleido X system 1 On the Configure menu point to Database to Create backup and then click All File Edit wiew Configure Toole Help Connect Disconnect Tools __Database Te x ayouts RCP users Actio p Use xAdmin py Import Configure Audio Bridge Terminal Greate backup z A ectic system Retrieve backup Resoun Jenat TRO An Merge backup E a o x 2 with expansion v M pae pni for ia ee p a D Restore d Sr Se a a a he 91 az Managing Kaleido X Systems 92 2 Browse to the secure location on your PC where you store all your database backups e g MirandaDatabaseBackups and type a name for the new backup preferably
373. tab click the monitor whose size you wish to copy to another monitor of the same type The monitor s boundary box appears The Copy size button becomes available on the toolbar Click the Copy size button to switch into size painting mode Point to another monitor of the same kind in the layout The pointer changes to a pointing finger i indicating that the size of the first monitor whose boundary box is still shown can be copied onto the monitor beneath the pointer Click the monitor beneath the pointer to copy the size onto that monitor Its size will change to match that of the first monitor Repeat this for each monitor whose size you wish to change Click the Select button on the toolbar to exit size painting mode when you have finished 233 az Creating Layouts Managing Widget Libraries Creating a Widget Library To create a widget library 1 Click the Layouts tab 2 Right click inside one of the predefined widget libraries in the Tools pane and then click New widget library on the shortcut menu Alternatively click New widget library on the File menu a New widget library Ga Open widget library ki Close widget library j save widget library Delete Entry Widget library shortcut menu The new widget library appears below the default widget library area in the Tools pane et Monitors 4x3 et Monitors 16x9 ll Audiometers Clocks et Timecodes g Ums fll avy Clack
374. tch Acknowledge all show dashboard Hide all dashboards System configuration The System Configuration window appears Click the Ethernet tab Type the required Frame IP address network mask and gateway address in the appropriate boxes Type the required addresses for all outputs Click OK When prompted to restart the system to apply your changes click Yes The new configuration will become effective once the system restart has completed Managing Kaleido X Systems This section explains what constitutes a Kaleido X system and the related workflow Key Concepts Term System Kaleido X Description A Kaleido X system represents a grouping of equipment including one or more multi viewers that have the Kaleido X Software and a number of peripheral devices such as routers production switchers UMD controllers or automation systems In XEdit you work against one system at a time Each system is stored as a separate database The Kaleido X multi viewer is a multi room multi image processor and router in a single expandable frame The compact Kaleido X 4RU multi viewer supports 32 inputs and 4 multi image outputs The Kaleido X 7RU multi viewer can display 96 inputs over up to 8 displays of any resolution and orientation By using a mid plane expansion module two Kaleido X 7RU frames can be connected to display up to 192 video inputs over up to 12 displays The Kaleido X 7RU built in routing capability o
375. te an audio source 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Inthe list expand the multi viewer whose inputs you wish to calibrate 3 Expand the appropriate input then one of its embedded audio elements and select Zero VU we System Kaleido X 4RU P M GPVGENLOCK KXA GPI GEN PAD OPTION A KXO 24Router ffl OPTION B Y M INPUT KxI 16 FeVideo Of Video Alarms F Wideo Calibrations P 608 Alarms b WST Teletext Alarms DS Filtering eoNTSC Standard b DTYCC Alarms P AFDAWSS Dolby E Selection embedded audio 1 aes cs Silence Lett i Silence Right Overload Lett iil Overload Right A Out of Phase il Mono Error My Dolby E Loss dase Tero VL P embedded audio 2 Zero VU audio selection 4 Inthe Properties pane set the reference level to the appropriate value in dBFS using the Zero VU slider under Calibration Alternatively type the value directly in the Zero VU box Kaleido 4RU H5 tal Calibration Zero WU CdBFS Zero VU reference level selection 5 Click Apply to all to apply the chosen Zero VU reference value throughout the system 106 Multi Viewer Input Calibrations Calibrating Zero VU Reference Level for an ABT Audio Source Note The KMV 3901 3911 only supports embedded audio not discrete audio sources from an ABT To
376. te eee eee eee ee eee eee teeeteeetenetenes 218 Configuring VIM ONAL OVS cctv ton cosas tes ea uta ars tenean n EEE are oat aaa nea aaa wp eaedeine A 219 CONMOUNING CIOGKS co cc nc Gehan track EENET EEE wan een teds A EKOE ments 220 Working with Composite Monitors 0 isccideiwdsnentansralies a bhaaehwnsaehanind peewee naweod i eaehsesewslen ona 225 toc SiG Te REGION EJON aurana ito a aA tents alton OAE ONAE TA E take anew oath 231 Format Pani eee A ATAT A A AN TANS 232 Managing WidGeULIDIANCS maossrerrna ariaren a E vast EAT AEEA I AEA 234 10 Creating Actions 237 OVEM EW oae a a e T E EET T an E E 237 ey CONCED EEE E E E EA E E E E A T EE E 238 Detaled Dre ie erer niria Ee EEDA EEE EAEE AEEA AE ERRAR EA 239 Creating Monitor Wall Actions 35 3 eccviassceweonasoaed suds sabhoteiwawassasshabieseiengs eiavhevests 239 Creatmo BACK GOUNG AMON serere eini eT E E E T EE T e 241 11 Managing Kaleido RCP2 Users 249 AE ST SP E PE E A EE E E EE E ES A AEN N A EE E S 249 AEAII QUICK Start TASKU errien oa EEEE EEE EE AEE E OEN 249 KEV ONCE aen eaa a EE EAEE E E AEE E EAO 250 ROP anete A E cere enter Te ren rere Terr er 250 Derailed IIRC CCIOM Se csrsie aie te acarasatsatienvea Nig cre threat a bestia A AET acaucaaaaionng E A 250 Manading CE USCIS 4c geass urs asa aerate EE ican ees Soa ud ois Mose aes eGo Gia O A aeN Re aes 250 Managing OOM COS S 1s red orig ase Send a E E EEEE E eA cte EAEE 251 Setting Room PrerereniceS sss siscshevounsods eee wsadiawdevensbod
377. ted 381 16 Administration and Servicing 382 ig Java Setup Complete You have successfully installed Java Java updates will automatically be downloaded to provide you with the latest features and security improvements To change this see http java com autoupdate Obtaining EDID Data From Display Screens When Using the DXF 100 Interface The DXF 100 is a transmitter receiver combination that allows a digital flat panel display to be located up to 1 000 meters 3 300 feet away from the signal source The transmitter and receiver are interconnected by a single multimode optical fiber and connect to the source and display using DVI connectors The DXF 100 must be configured for its target display before it is connected to the multi viewer otherwise the Extended display identification data EDID information listed in XAdmin s Status and Options page for the corresponding output card will not reflect the actual values for the target display XAdmin would not be reporting the actual timing data from the display but default values corresponding to the maximum resolution supported by the DXF 100 i e 1920 x 1200 The DXF 100 interface is unidirectional from the transmitter multi viewer to the receiver display For XAdmin to show timing data from the display the EDID information needs to be transmitted in the reverse direction from the display to the multi viewer To obtain a display s timing information in XAdmin
378. tems do not have these sources 12 In the Layouts tab create layouts and assign logical sources created in step 11 to monitors that can display text e g UMD and alarms e g UMD video text alarm LTools System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Monitors 4x3 p f2 1_SOURCE_LABEL r Monitors 16x9 Audiometers Clocks GlobalAlarm_ChannelO 13 On the File menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 14 On the Configure menu point to Database and then click Export to export the database to your multi viewer 15 On the multi viewer load the layout containing the monitors assigned to dynamic text and tallies coming from the Ross Video switcher You should see source names and tallies from the Ross Video switcher on the monitor wall Sony Production Switcher A multi viewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from a Sony switcher The procedure below describes how to set up a multi viewer to interface with a Sony production switcher DVS 9000 series MVS 8000 series or MFS 2000 series Setting Up a Sony Switcher To set up a Sony switcher 1 Enable serial tally on one of the switcher s ports refer to the Sony Production Switcher System User s Guide for details 318 Sony Production Switcher Note There are no serial tally connections on the Sony switcher model DVS 9000 See DVS 9000 Switchers on page 319
379. ter and all members of a cluster must have the same Kaleido X Software version e Each multi viewer you wish to add to a cluster must have a unique name e Ifyou change the system name or IP address of a cluster member while another cluster member is offline or otherwise unavailable the cluster s integrity will be broken If you attempt to make such a change XEdit will alert you of the situation prompting you to cancel the operation and try again later when all cluster members are available If you choose to force the change then you will need to repair the cluster see Repairing a Cluster System on page 83 e Changing the system name or IP address of a KMV 3901 3911 multi viewer associated with a cluster by using the card s control panel on the Densit housing frame or by using the KMV 3901 3911 control panel in iControl is not supported If this happens then you will need to repair the cluster see Repairing a Cluster System on page 83 e A multi viewer can only be part of one cluster system at any time XEdit will not let you add a multi viewer that is already included in a different cluster system To create a system with multiple multi viewers 1 Open XEdit and then click Connect on the Configure menu to access one of the multi viewers you wish to be part of a cluster system See Connecting to a Multi Viewer on page 70 You are now ready to add more multi viewers to the system 2 Inthe equipment libra
380. ter or Level in a cascade receives the command and executes a crosspoint switch either changing the signal on one of its connections to a multi viewer input or Sending the signal to another device e g vector scope QC monitor ISO recorder 271 Routers amp Kaleido X Controlling the Internal Router by Using a Router Control Device or Application KALEIDOX 1 An external router control device or application e g Snell Pro Bel Aurora Nevion Network Electronics VikinX or an automation system e g Sundance Digital Titan sends a command over a serial or TCP IP connection to the multi viewer 2 The Kaleido X Software detects the command and executes a crosspoint switch on its internal router 3 Sending the selected signal from the corresponding multi viewer input to another device e g vector scope QC monitor ISO recorder Router Protocols Optional Drivers for Controlling Routing Devices from the Multi Viewer Optional drivers are available to extend your Kaleido X system with the ability to control routing devices that comply with the protocols listed in the following table Contact your sales representative for details Routers Company Protocol Routers Controllers Text database download Datatek D 2815 Control Module Protocol No ETL ETL Matrix ETL Matrix Yes Evertz Quartz Type 1 EQX Yes 272 Router Protocols Routers Company Protocol Routers
381. the lack of a ground XEdit Application Shortcuts The following is a list of shortcut keys available in XEdit to execute specific actions Action Shortcut Key Restore the factory resolutions Ctrl Shift E Restore the factory audio scales Ctrl Shift A Restore the factory calibrations Ctrl Shift C Restore the factory widget libraries Ctrl Shift L Toggle the grid Ctrl Shift G Toggle the Tips pane Ctrl Shift H Toggle the Properties pane Ctrl Shift P Toggle the layout navigator Ctrl Shift N Toggle the status bar Ctrl Shift S Toggle the Tools pane Ctrl Shift T Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Duplicate Ctrl D Create grid type layout based on selection Auto layout Ctrl M Select all Ctrl A Send to back Ctrl B Send to front Ctrl R Delete selection Delete 29 Getting Started 30 Action Redo last operation Shortcut Key Ctrl Y Undo last operation Unlock composite Ctrl Z F2 Zoom in Ctrl plus sign Zoom out Ctrl minus sign Operation of the Monitor Wall This section introduces the Kaleido X monitor wall features Key Concepts Monitor wall The monitor wall refers to the group of display screens that are connected to the output modules of a specific Kaleido X system Room A room is a visual grouping of display screens A room represents the physical displays positioned and sized as viewed by the user in an actual room Rooms can include full s
382. the layout browser The video sources should appear on the room displays 00 00 00 0080 16 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 InputA video3 InputA video4 00 00 00 00 InputA videol InputA video2 InputA video5 InputA video9 InputA videol 3 InputA video6 Qo InputA video10 InputA video14 Example of a default layout showing 16 video streams InputA video7 00 00 00 00 InputA video11 InputA video15 InputA video8 00 00 00 00 InputA video12 00 00 00 00 InputA video16 23 Getting Started Note You can also use the 10 LAYOUT PRESETS buttons on the RCP2 to load the associated default layout to the monitor wall Cabling Diagrams KMV 3901 3911 Video input connections a aes Bet Ped aN Va Kaleido RCP2 Client PC XEdit amp XAdmin Ethernet Switch 24 Loading a Layout Kaleido X16 Q0000000000000020000 7 ST y GS Kaleido RCP2 Ethernet Switch Client PC for XEdit Software 25 Getting Started Kaleido X 4RU DVI Outputs to Displays KaleidoX Kaleido RCP2 Remote Control Panel Switching i Power Supply Client PC power over Ethernet XEdit amp XAdmin Video Input Connections Dedicated Ethernet Switch PENS 100Base T Audio Bridge Terminal PSU PoE 26 Loading a Layout Kaleido X 7RU DVI Outputs to Displays KaleidoX Kaleido RCP2 Remote Control Panel
383. the very largest combined multi viewer and routing systems arora OOO On iran dat N esesese esesesesetese RR aetetetste tese Oas ASSAS SS S SSS SAS S S S SA SA RIR R SL LLL LL S LS LD eee gate tee g fe a2 at 7 a7 9999s 9s 9s 998099999990 9 0 e e e WRR EREA tesotetetees 9 9 9 coc acetetetsts There are two types of Kaleido X16 Kaleido X16 S single head and Kaleido X16 D dual head OUTPUTS CONTROL Kaleido X16 IGbps HD SD Router Outputs REP200aeranced High Resolution High Resolution drive full resolution Grpq HD SD raui coreval panal HOMI Outputs 2Gbps HD SD Outputs signals Into vdeo mongors oF with audio monitoring test equipment iT RS 422 2 l i Multi viewer Outputs 3Gbps HD SO use Router Outputs Ethernet Option 2 DVI Bkg Input gt 16 Auto sensing Inputs per frame a ru D i Es age ees Video Inputs 32 GPlinput Multi format Suparvisa alarm Gbps HOSO Com 4 Outputs Reference ma negemant system Embedded Audio Extraction scree ese Input A HOS amp Audio Bridge Terminal rN ADEE 128 ch per Terminal as stacey m W Serios IRD 3602 KXl Dvl 5ridga hiep Mior anaid Serta ot KN Dvi ri r PE e wes Dual channel DVI Discrete Audio Inputs MPEG t HD SDI inputs with Poop oul INPUTS EEE ao Bt TE Kaleido X16 system overview The 1RU Kaleido X16 is ideal for smaller monitoring facilities such as call letter television station master control rooms mobile truck
384. then Ctrl drag the modified display to the display library You can then remove the obsolete display from the library Removing Displays From Custom Libraries To remove a display from a custom library Click the display you wish to remove and then press Delete Alternatively right click its icon and then click Delete entry on the shortcut menu Tools Display a MyDisplayLibrary amp Mew display library Ga Open display library Bi Close display library Save display library x Delete entry 168 Managing Display Libraries Closing Display Libraries To close a display library e Once the custom library is saved you can right click in the library area and then click Close display library on the shortcut menu Alternatively click Close display library on the File menu File Edt Mieyy Configure Tools L Mew Ga Open el Save Save as Bi Close Delete Y Properties amp Mew display library oa Open display library k Close display library Ei Save display library Exit Opening Display Libraries To open a custom display library e Inthe Tools pane right click anywhere in the display library area and then click Open display library on the shortcut menu Alternatively click Open display library on the File menu Note It is possible to have multiple custom libraries open at the same time 169 8 Setting Up Rooms 170 Creating Layouts This section describe
385. then press CHANNEL on the RCP2 The Assign Source window appears Assign Source x _ _ The label of each category index button in Assign Source is based on recurring strings found in the logical source names available for your system The Src box shows the current assignment 2 Click through the categories until the Pst box shows the logical source you wish to assign to the selected monitor For example if you wish to assign the logical source named Input B Channel 16 to the monitor click Input B 1 and then 6 Assigning Sources to Monitors Assign Source Channel 04 Channel Assign Source Channel 04 Channel 1 Assign Source Channel 04 Channel 16 Input A Input E My Channel 8 e Router Source jo Input A Input E Input A Router Source o Input E My Channel Router Source o 3 Click Take The selected logical source is now assigned to the monitor 4 Click the X button to close the Assign Source window Assigning a Logical Source to a Monitor by Using the Mouse To assign a logical source to a monitor by using the mouse 1 Right click the monitor that is to be assigned a logical source 2 Onthe shortcut menu point to Assign source to component where component will be monitor video UMD tally audio meter status alarm time code metadata display or clock depending on the monitor you clicked me Assign source to monitor E he wh LY i e
386. ther video monitors to your layout if you span two video monitors you can add only four other video monitors 179 az Creating Layouts 180 Do not span a layout element beyond a maximum of 3000 x 1800 pixels When spanning or scaling video monitors in a layout avoid heavy cropping settings generally avoid exceeding 15 in any direction Maximum horizontal Maximum vertical Maximum size of spanned video cropping 15 cropping 15 element 3000 x 1800 pixels e There is no special configuration to be done in XEdit Duplicating Monitors To duplicate a monitor within a layout 1 2 Click the monitor you wish to duplicate On the Edit menu click Duplicate Alternatively press Ctrl D A copy of the monitor is added to the layout Move the new monitor to the appropriate position on the layout Press Ctrl D again and repeat until the desired number of copies of the monitor are added to the layout The new copies are automatically positioned at intervals matching the relative positions of the original monitor and its first duplicate Automatically Populating a Grid Type Layout Use the Auto layout tool to quickly create a layout containing several rows of up to 256 identical composites Managing Layouts To automatically populate a grid type layout 1 Add a first monitor to the layout see Adding Monitors to a Layout on page 178 and Working with Composite Monitors on page 225 2 Positio
387. they can only be added to custom widget libraries and these are stored independently from the XEdit workspace To restore the factory default audio scales calibrations resolutions or widget libraries e On the Configure menu point to Database then to Restore and then click Calibrations Resolutions Audio scales Widget libraries or All of the above File Edt Views Configure Toole Help Connect Disconnect Tools Database gy Export een Uze Admin Contigure Audio Bridge Terminal ayouts ROP users Actions B29 Import x jurations Router Connections Create backup system Retrieve backup aleido r RU m Merge backup aleido x 4RU EE E el aleido X TRU x 2 with expansion v o J Do not prompt for the database path aleido X16 O gt estore s aleido x16 5 i Calibrations aleido Modular KW 3901 3911 Resolutions CtrleShift E Widget libraries Ctrl Shitt l All of the above Ctri Shitt 4 Audio scales xternal Router The selected elements are reset to their factory default definitions Restoring the XEdit Factory Defaults for a Selected Multi Viewer Type Note If you already have rooms or layouts that you wish to keep make sure to back up the XEdit database before restoring the factory defaults The XEdit factory defaults do not include any rooms or layouts To restore the XEdit factory defaults for a multi viewer 1 In th
388. ti viewer system Key Concepts Term Logical source Level Description A logical source called a channel in earlier versions of the documentation refers to a group of physical audio video or metadata sources and text attributes A logical source can be used as a whole and assigned to a virtual monitor Within a logical source attributes are organized by evels belonging to one five categories Video Audio Text Alarm and Time code For example the video level category may comprise multiple levels each representing a specific physical part of a video signal 135 Creating Logical Sources Term Description Incremental copy Once a logical source channel is configured it is possible to use incremental copy to automatically propagate appropriate physical assignments to other adjacent logical sources For instance if the current logical source s levels are assigned from Video 1 then the incremental copy tool will automatically assign corresponding physical elements from Video 2 to the next logical source s levels and so on Alternatively if only one or a few specific levels are to be similarly configured it is possible to use incremental copy on the corresponding level column only Incremental copy zone In the sources table the incremental copy zone is indicated by a small square Em at the bottom right of the selected cell Detailed Directions 136 Creating and Configuring Logical Sources W
389. tions Edit timers The Edit Audio Scale window appears 201 iz Creating Layouts Edit Audio Scale Previews Middle color Lower limit oo ABU Bottom color 0o o Analog Peak Meter DIN PPM EC60266 10 E Close 2 Select the audio scale you wish to customize or the one on which you wish to base a new audio scale from the list at the bottom of the window Note When you modify one of the default audio scales you can only save your changes as a new audio scale On the other hand custom audio scales can be tweaked and saved repeatedly until the desired configuration is achieved 3 Click one of the Top Middle or Bottom Color buttons to set the top middle and bottom color The Choose Background Color window appears Choose Background Color m El w Sample Tet Sample Text m E CI Sample Text Sample Text 4 Click the appropriate color square Swatches in the selected color appear under Preview 202 Configuring Audio Scales 5 Click OK to close the Choose Background Color window In Edit Audio Scale the corresponding button and the corresponding part of the audio monitor preview show the selected color 6 Repeat the procedure until all three colors are set as desired 7 Enter the audio thresholds in Upper limit and Lower limit 8 Type a name for the new audio scale in the box at the bottom and then click the Save as button Alternatively if you are modifying an existing custom audio scale y
390. to Service 63 Text mode sub Any CC 708 iein Displaying Subtitles and Closed Caption Text Signal type Text Mode Icon Label Available choices Other Unknown Auto l Text CC Enable text check box Text Subtitling mode sub menu Switching Closed Captioning On Off Note The KMV 3901 3911 multi viewers do not support extraction of closed captions To switch CC 608 closed captioning on off 1 Right click the appropriate video source on the monitor wall 2 On the shortcut menu point to CC 608 and then click either CC1 or Off ee Assign channel to monitor w Ta a j ASPect ratio L Overscan L 5 T 5 R B 556 LJ safe area TEI a CL Os d l i Text mode F Monitor Wall To switch CC 708 closed captioning on off 1 Right click the appropriate video source on the monitor wall 2 Onthe shortcut menu point to CC 708 and then click either the appropriate service number or Off 45 Operation of the Monitor Wall a Assign channel to monitor 5 g Off n Service 1 Aspect ratio Service 2 Service L Qverscan L 5 T 5 R S B 5 Service 4 Service 5 E Safe area service 6 Extended services F a Ce Poss d l l Text moge b Monitor Wall Note The shortcut menu displays Service 1 to Service 6 Use the Extended services sub menu to select from the Service 7 to Service 63 range When an extended service is enabl
391. to from the list Otherwise type the appropriate IP address in the box 3 Click OK The selected system s hierarchical list appears in XEdit s main pane showing the multi viewer type system name and IP address and the status bar shows the connection status Equipment Description Calibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Coni system ma 3 gt 2 amp Kaleido x 7RU S0 8 222 10 0 8 247 S a kim o z 7 Ss ee aii lll F M E en ag tll EE Ses Connected to 10 0 8 217 Date 124808 4 17 PM Connection to 10 0 8 217 established successfully Connection status Multi viewer type System name System IP address Itis also possible to verify which version of the Kaleido X Software is installed on this multi viewer by moving to pointer to the system name in the System list A tip appears showing this information 70 Disconnecting from a Multi Viewer 24 Kaleido X TRU S0 8 222 10 0 8 247 Software version 4 244 build r 4 Notes e When using XEdit in online mode some database functions such as Export Import and Retrieve backup are not available Any changes made by the user are not kept locally on the user s PC but applied directly on the multi viewer To retrieve the data set from the multi viewer either disconnect from the multi viewer and then use the Import function or use the Create backup function to save a copy of the database A database c
392. trolling a multi viewer by using one of the TCP IP router protocols the router level to be controlled must be configured in XEdit see step 5 under Creating a Single Multi Viewer System on page 77 No other communication configuration is required in XEdit 299 Routers amp Kaleido X 3 Click OPTION A or B under Physical Routers in the Routers list Note that the physical levels are automatically created OPTION A Video 120 x 48 and OPTION B Video 120 x 48 and configured to the right size Routers Description Calibrations enal Router configurations Router Connections Routers i Level OPTION B Y Physical Routers evel name ro Kaleido TRU Internal Router i 3 a Level Video 120x46 Exit MCCOMB OPTION B video 120x48 a eee e ef OPTION A Video 120x48 EE Y NewPhysicalRouter evel or trame Booo eet Wideo video 16x16 __ i oooO 2 sed Audio Audio 32x32 Free source None S _Addaliases memeye aliase import abel _ v Logical Routers i Ga Router 96x60 SOUrCeS Destinations 0 video T O 2 SmallLogicalRouter 16x4 Sonne lS SLL bef 0 Video iat r 1 Audio v 0 Internal router 96x48 cel j0 video Note 120 x 48 refers to the physical router size including internal connections used for router expansion The actual size of each router card is 96 x 24 4 A Logical router is also automatically defined Click the 0 Internal router
393. ture cannot be verified by a trusted source Onhy run if you trust the origin of the application More Information The XEdit startup screen appears 377 16 Administration and Servicing Creating main application window 5 30 Build 4301 5 Depending on your Java settings the Java Web Start installer may prompt you to confirm whether you wish to have XEdit shortcuts created Click Yes This will add a shortcut icon aX on your desktop Edit 5 30 Note If the installer cannot find all of the fonts needed by XEdit it will download them to your PC automatically A message will appear to confirm the font update and advise you to restart the application MEdit fonts have been updated Please restart the application e Click OK to continue then restart XEdit from the desktop shortcut 6 When prompted to specify a database choose one from the Path list or click Browse to specify another location and then click OK to continue 378 Detailed Directions Database Location Select the database location MEdit stores your data in a local database Select the path For the database you wish to use in this session Path _ DBXEdit pad Dont ask next time 7 Once the installation process has completed XEdit s main application window appears Sg XEdit C _dbXEdit DB_1 Joo File Edit View Configure Tools Help System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users A
394. tween the multi viewer and the device appears System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions DescriptiontCalibrations Interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections Penner Kahuna Production Switcher Kaleido X 4RU Connection between the multi viewer and the device 7 Click the connection line between multi viewer and device and then click the Properties tab 326 Kahuna Production Switcher ay stem Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Properties Tips Description alinrations Router Configurations Router Connections Production Switcher Kaleido x 4RU E RS 422 Com Port Disconnected T ES rie Har Vea 3 Kahuna Production Switcher Kaleido X 4RU 8 Inthe Properties pane click the appropriate output in the RS 422 Com Port list Production Switcher lt gt Kaleido x 4RU Z kd Connection s ee ee ae Disconnected Output 4 Output E 9 Inthe Interconnects tab click the Kahuna production switcher icon 10 In the Properties pane set the serial communications 7 properties for the Kahuna device as follows so M Baud Rate 115200 Production Switcher 7 Data Bits 8 Parity NONE Data bits Parity Stop bits 1 Preview Cut Frogram Out Stop bits 11 In the Channels Sources tab create logical sources using Text and Alarm elements coming from the Kahuna s serial tally information 327 Tally Inte
395. u click Edit resolutions Edit audio scales Edit timers The Edit Resolution Settings window appears 154 Configuring Displays Edit Resolution Settings kd General Friendly name 1280x720 meSOHz HDT Refresh rate 50 Hz Syne polarity HSPol WSPol Horizontal active 1 280 Horizontal tront porch 440 Horizontal syne 40 Horizontal back porch 220 Horizontal total Vertical active 20 Vertical tront porch 5 Vertical sync Vertical back porch vertical tatal v Horizontal blank start Horizontal sync start Horizontal syne end Horizontal blank end Vertical blank start Vertical syne start Vertical sync end 1260x720 m soHz ADT Y 2 Select the resolution you wish to customize or the one on which you wish to base a new resolution from the list at the bottom of the window Note When you modify one of the default resolutions you can only save your changes as a new resolution On the other hand custom resolutions can be tweaked and saved repeatedly until the desired configuration is achieved However make sure that the active width and active height values you specify match those of one of the default resolutions otherwise your custom resolution will be ignored 3 Under either the Porch or the Modeline section depending on whether you prefer to specify front porch back porch sync and active values or blank start sync start sync end and blank end set the refresh rate and other timing parameters so t
396. u can check internal system statuses via the Web based XAdmin application There are two ways to access XAdmin Method 1 Use XEdit on a client PC to start the XAdmin application see Installing XEdit on page 375 On the Configure menu click Use XAdmin This will open your default Web browser Method 2 From a workstation on the same subnet open a Web browser window and type the multi viewer s IP address in the address bar Kaleido X Windows Internet Explorer cy Y e 10 0 3 70 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help The Kaleido X home page appears _ ROUTER CONTROL Kaleido version 5 20 bulld 26 XEdit version 5 20 build 11 2 Click the XAdmin button The XAdmin Status and Options page appears displaying a list of all modules and their statuses 1 The multi viewer must have Kaleido X software version 2 10 or later 15 Getting Started 16 System configuration Kaleido X 4RU Frame S 4 i GPI GENLOCK KXA GPI GEN s n 079899 17912014 o Firmware 0x35 Safemode 0x36 Status and options Technical support OPTION A Empty oll OPTION B Empty Olit i INPUT A KXI 16HSV3 s n 088901 41670001 Ot Firmware 0x24 Safemode 0xF Inputs DA DO TO DO DO TO E O e e O OP e e e INPUT B KXI 16H5V s n 079401 19988038 Dtv Firmware 0xB8 Safemode 0x6F Inputs GO VVVVVOIBOVIVSS OUTPUT A master KXO DUAL s n 079228 38790003 Firmware 0x208E Safemode 0x58
397. urce lD video audio texti alarmi timecode input Fichannel oS it Prt Cm eeercuneui UU YI TK Fie Anput FiChannel12 92 FIZ F12 Emb 1 _ inputF videot2 F42 Vid TC b BE Kaleido x 7RU Anput FiChannel13 44 1 acto ESN eel ne PATA ali Nie TT Em1 ipotee ria vale 6 E Anput F Channel 15 95 O S F15 Emb1 inputviteots 9 A5 Vid Te Anput Fichannel i6 96 Fg F16 Emb 1 input videol FB vid M TimerChannelt a ee e eee 13 Click Save 210 Configuring Timers Adding a Timer Monitor to a Layout To create a timer monitor 1 In XEdit open a layout and click the Timer button 2 Click and drag to draw a timer monitor on the layout system ChannelesSources Destinations Rooms ROP users Actions Tps Layouts Layout Muttihnead layoutRoon test I HE ka Monitor wall destination hone Mame timeri Source Time code level timecode Timer Source kd Appearance Background B Fo G0 6 30 Bevel raised Digits color F255 G 255 B 255 Expired background color MBO 2 0 6 0 Expired digits color MB F255 G 0 6 0 On screen control Transparency si kal I Mouse click Alternatively you can drag a timer monitor from the Timers library to the layout The timer s attributes appear in the Properties pane 3 Replace the default name by typing a new name in the Name box kd Assignments Monitor wall destination Mame SOUrce Time code level timecode Timer Source id Appearance Ba
398. utatenosacsaesncsdeeetasseund ceive 383 SIOUVINUGL csccdec wee ddseddgceceesecuwecnokess 65 SMAPSNOU 2 85 deadaced aided a wneuved 345 Snell amp Wilcox production switcher See Kahuna SNMP WANS oeira aa 131 Sony production switchers ece eens 318 SOURCES caned anA veaets 65 135 136 141 assigning to monitors 0 eee 182 OVENS raia EE 139 Sources table resizing COIUMINS cece eee e ees 141 SOWING E E 140 Status ALE EET E E T 120 information cc eee e eee e eee ees 346 SVSIEM iaaa 15 Subtitles cc cece ecw ecees 112 113 122 198 Switchers E E E 313 ROSS VIGEO ccaweuctnecaricecactcccces 313 SONY 4sxidaw niin E 318 396 SYSICMN 5 a eeu suse E eae eens 63 PAKUD sic cierc werac eran a eTEN 74 ASAE nerean aE 65 GUSTO eniaint 13 65 79 configuration soseen 85 EIUN sirus re TETEE EEVEE 71 dual teen erie veers 12 EXPANSION eretara S 12 64 KMV 3901 3911 oenen 6 ODUONS scarcer neren ARERIOA 371 retrieving backup eeee cee eees 15 snapshot si c aindc02 ab teh dndataaiaddnidcnds 383 Status information cc eee eee 386 verification 00 cece eee c cece cence eens 15 version information ece cease 387 T Tally contribution devices 0e e eens 311 Tally interface devices cccee ee eeees 311 JEIEN sc enakane a A 122 TE MO ern A 198 Third party devices cccceeceeceeees 265 Serial port test
399. uter Contiqurations Router Connections System me Y Kaleido X FRU P M GFGENLOCK KXA GPLGEN HD OPTION A i MD OPTION B D INPUT A KXI 16 D INPUT E KXxI 16 M INPUT KxI 16 D INPUT D KXI 16 M INPUT E KXI 16 M INPUT F KXI 16 D OUTPUT 4 KXO DUAL I OUTPUT E KXO DUAL I OUTPUT KXO DUAL D OUTPUT D KXO DUAL Ea es 3 Expand the appropriate output module Multi Viewer Output Calibrations The expanded module will show the output heads Depending on the multi viewer model other items may also appear MD INPUT E KXxI 16 P M INPUT F KXI 16 v4 OUTPUT 4 KXO DUAL FeHead 1 Room Head 2 Room fi LTC 1 Loss ff LTC 2 Loss Ld LTC 3 Loss OUTPUT B KxXO DUAL P M OUTPUT KXO DUAL gt 4 OUTPUT D KXO DUAL 4 Select the head you wish to calibrate 5 Click the Properties tab The audio monitoring delay adjustment control appears Expand the Calibration heading to show the control if it is not visible 103 Calibrating the Kaleido X 104 System ig re Rea a a Green master i o Cama System Blue r TR z oi Red ear so Apply to all P M GPVGENLOCK KXA GPI GEN LM OPTION A Green master lt so Apply to all fl option 60 Apply toll fe aI INPUT A KX1 16 calibration Audio Monitoring Delay _ms sy ees ID INPUT B exL 416 Color Saturation ADD INPUT E KXI 16 DD INPUT D KXI 16 dM INPUT E KXI 1
400. uter matrix ID which is similar to the Level or frame ID for a physical router but identifies a logical router So for example if you press a button on the external panel that is set up to make a crosspoint change on logical router matrix ID 0 the Kaleido X Software will receive this command look up matrix ID 0 to find the physical router it is mapped to and then forward the crosspoint change to the physical router using the appropriate protocol In such cases the Kaleido X Software acts as a protocol translator for the control panel To add a Snell Pro Bel SW P 08 or equivalent router controller 1 Click and drag Router Controller Pro Bel SW P 08 from the Equipment library to the System hierarchical list 295 Routers amp Kaleido X Equipment Description Calibrations interconnects Router Configurations Router Connections FS em a T Kaleido X 4RU se v Seen Kaleido X16 D P gt Kaleido X 7RU Kaleido x16 5 B o o O i MewPhysicalRouter Kaleido Modular KM 3981 5x2 TSL External Router fo Encoda Andromeda Router Controller Pro Bel SVV P 08 Serial port test Router Controller Network Compact Router Controller Pro Bel SvV P 02 Sony serial tally Kahuna System Channels Sources Destinations Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions 2 When prompted type a name for the router controller and then click OK oe a T
401. utton to select one of three modes Overrun Stop or Loop Click the End behavior button to select one of three modes Down Up or Remaining The timer monitor is updated accordingly GAHE Ug 43 54 Using Timers 3 Use the Preset controls to set a new preset time Controlling a Timer by Using an External Numeric Keypad If a timer is assigned to the current RCP user or else if a timer is assigned by default for the room then the external keyboard s numeric keypad controls this specific timer Note The reserved keys are always enabled whether Num Lock is set or not To configure your assigned timer by using a numeric keypad e Press the slash key to set the timer mode and end behavior Keep pressing the key to cycle through all the available options until the buttons show the appropriate settings e Press the plus key to reset the timer This will also stop the timer if it was running 55 Operation of the Monitor Wall 56 Press the Enter key to start pause the timer Use the number keys to set or modify the preset time Triggering Actions To trigger an action 1 Move the pointer over a monitor associated with the action you wish to trigger The pointer changes to a hand icon 2 Ifthe action is not triggered automatically click or double click the monitor Note An Action s trigger is determined when the Action is created in XEdit See Creating Actions on page
402. value The measured levels and the encoded dialnorm can be compared against each other and against your organization s expected dialnorm and alarms triggered in case of too much deviation Max upper deviation The Max upper deviation parameter determines the tolerated excursion range above the reference value The measured levels and the encoded dialnorm can be compared against each other and against your organization s expected dialnorm and alarms triggered in case of too much deviation Calibrating Dolby E Audio Metadata Notes Dolby E decoding can be enabled by purchasing the Dolby E option KXS DolbyE One license is needed per input card See Enabling Options on page 371 e Dolby E decoding is not yet supported on the Audio Bridge Terminal ABT To calibrate audio metadata 1 Inthe main window click the System tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Inthe list expand the multi viewer whose inputs you wish to calibrate 3 Expand the appropriate input and then click Dolby E Selection 109 Calibrating the Kaleido X 5 tfi syste Dolby E Selection Embedded Audio 1 Bi App wesystem z Y Kaleido x 7RU P GFIGENLOCK KX4 GFI GEM P OPTION A KXO 24Router E OPTION B Y M INPUT Kx1 16 FeVideo 01 i ideo Alarms F video Calibrations P 608 Alarms P ST Teletext Alarms HDS Fi
403. w 6 Ifthe image you wish to use is not already listed in Select Image then click the Open button to open the Browse Image window locate the image select it and then click Open Browse Image Look In O treeFormSafesrea E Hal Dual reeFormSafte rea png TonightFreeFormsate Area pny Ld UpMextFreeFormate4rea png File Mame UphextFreeFormnsate Ares png Files of Type All images png jpoa git H Cancel The image is imported into the current database Note Images can be used on multiple layouts and only need to be imported to the database once 7 In Select image select the image file from the Image selection list and then click OK 190 Configuring Video Monitors Select Image Image Selection Mone Miranda logo UphextFreeFormSateArea pna 8 The image appears on the video monitor System Channels Rooms Layouts RCP users Actions Properties Tips Layouts Layout Muttinead layout Room 41FFSA BE View filters Defaut AEDIVWSS value 7 Monitors 4x3 Mode Underscan Monitors 16x9 Custom overscan Overscan L 5 0 T 5 0 R 5 0 7 S Audiometers Custom safe zone image UpNextFreeFormSafeArea png Marker Iaf Clocks z He ffad a j Timecodes Sate zone aspectratio l Show markers M a Timers Unsafe zone color UMDs Unsafe zone transparency 50 M4 Alarms Tallies Channels Frame Adnput 4 Channel 01
404. while the feed was not monitored e Latching only occurs when an alarm severity is above normal i e minor major or critical All other alarm states unavailable unassigned pending unknown etc are not latched e Unlatching a global alarm unlatches all its contributing alarms Unlatching the last alarm contributing to a global alarm unlatches the global alarm itself e The color of the latch indicator reflects the highest level of alarm received since the corresponding alarm was last unlatched Crosspoint A multi viewer can control upstream routers and it can also be controlled as a router itself In addition some multi viewer models Kaleido X16 Kaleido X 7RU and Kaleido X ZRU x 2 can have optional router outputs A crosspoint is the link inside a router between a source input and a destination output See Changing Crosspoints on page 50 Note As of Kaleido X version 5 20 the preferred method of controlling sources regardless of whether they are sources from an upstream router or physical multi viewer inputs is to configure logical sources 34 Detailed Directions Detailed Directions This section describes the actions you can perform on the Kaleido X monitor wall Logging on to the Monitor Wall Using the Kaleido RCP2 As a network device the Kaleido RCP2 provides access to any room from any Kaleido X system on the network As a security measure access is controlled by a login procedure More than o
405. xAE ME3_UTIL_D wo Paw rm 0xB1 ME1 PVW ME1 PVW ME1 PVW M1p1 M1p1 0xB2 ME2 PVW ME2 PVW ME2 PVW M2p1 M2p1 0xB3 ME3 PVW ME3 PVW ME3 PVW M3p1 M3p1 0xB4 Mhp1 OxBA VideoStore3 VideoStore3 OxBB VideoStore4 VideoStore4 OxBC VideoStore5 VideoStore5 OxBD VideoStore6 VideoStore6 336 Kayak Production Switcher Input DD35 KayakDD Kayak SD HD Number 0x0 PPC OxC1 Layer ME1 PP D 0xC2 Layer ME2 M1C OxC3 Layer ME3 M1D OxC4 M2C OxC5 M2 D 0xC6 M3 C 0xC7 M3 D 0xC8 0xC9 OxCA OxCB 0xD0 PP Clean PP Clean PP Clean PP B PP Clean PPB OxD1 ME1 Clean ME1 Clean ME1 Clean M1B ME1 Clean M1B OxD2 ME2 Clean ME2 Clean ME2 Clean M2B 0xD3 ME3 Clean ME3 Clean ME3 Clean M3 B 0xD4 PP UtilA PP UtilA PPp2 PP Clean MEh B Preview 0xD5 PP UtilB PP UtilB 0xD6 PP UtilC PP UtilC 0xD7 ME1 UtilA ME2 UtilA M1p2 ME1 Clean Preview 0xD8 ME1 UtilB ME1 UtilB PPp2 0xD9 ME1 UtilC ME1 UtilC M1p2 0xDC ME2 UtilC ME2 UtilC Mhp2 337 Tally Interface Devices Input DD35 XtenDD HD XtenDD SD KayakDD Kayak SD HD Number 0xDD ME3 UtilA ME3 UtilA OxDE ME3 UtilB ME3 UtilB OxDF ME3 UtilC ME3 UtilC OxE0 OxEF Virtuallnput00 1 Virtuallnput00 1 Virtuallnput00 1 Virtuallnput00 1 Virtuallnputoo 1 5 5 5 5 5 OxF0 WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE Configuring Layout Elements To configure layout elements 1 Inthe Layouts tab create layouts and assign the logical sources you configured s
406. y 30 4 Under Assignments click the Audio format box and then select the appropriate format from the list hd Assignments Audio format Audio level Channels Dalby progra Monitor wall destination Mame ZOUFCE Dolby E Dolby VANE Note See Configuring Audio Metadata on page 205 for more information 5 Make the appropriate assignments see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors on page 182 and set the other attributes as needed Configuring Audio Scales kd Assignments Audio format PCM Audio level audio Channels _ Stereo iJ Doli progra Monitor wall destination Mone Mame audio meterO Source Input AfChannel 01 Audio scale WU Meter IECB0266 1 7 Label color F255 G 255 5 255 Labels Monitoring indicator v Orientation 90 0 Ticks Transparency 30 ki Meter Normal color GS FR 200 6 40 6 200 Out of phase color MBB F255 G0 6 0 Threshold 0 125 T i Mouse click templateName Vcom mirandane Note See Creating Actions on page 237 for more information Configuring Audio Scales You can configure audio scales in two ways either globally from the Tools menu or by clicking a specific audio monitor in a layout Configuring Audio Scales From the Tools Menu To configure an audio scale from the Tools menu 1 On the Tools menu click Edit audio scales File Edt Configure View Tools Help Edit audio scales Edit resolu
407. y to the multi viewer s inputs see Assigning Sources to Monitors on page 48 The KMV 3901 3911 multi viewers do not support the procedure described below To change an external router crosspoint 1 Right click a composite or video monitor on the monitor wall 50 Changing Crosspoints 2 Onthe shortcut menu point to Assign router input where router will be the name of a logical router whose outputs are connected to the multi viewer inputs navigate to the input you wish to assign to the monitor and then select it ee Assign channel to monitor t J i I j eL N ma z4 Assign EX Router input ASpect ratio El Overscan L 5 T 5 R 5 E 5 E Safe area 10 10 CC cc 608 11 11 12 le Monitor Wall ie 3 14 14 15 15 16 16 The multi viewer requests the specified source signal from the router Changing an Internal Router Crosspoint Note This feature is only available on Kaleido X 7RU Kaleido X 7RU x 2 and Kaleido X16 multi viewers with the SDI Router Output option To change a crosspoint in the internal router 1 Right click the appropriate composite or video monitor on the monitor wall 2 On the shortcut menu point to Send to router output where router will be the name of the first logical router mapped to your multi viewer s router outputs navigate to the appropriate logical output number and then select it 51 Operation of the Monitor Wall es Assig
408. yout Hide tull screen layout Assign channel Select the router to control Custom ee ee SOUrce i i Se i i er Level 9 When finished click OK The next time the layout is loaded on the monitor wall the actions will be available Note When you click a monitor on the monitor wall all the actions associated with the single click event are triggered When you double click a monitor all the actions associated with the single click AND the double click events are triggered Detailed Directions Creating Background Actions To create a background action 1 Launch XEdit and open the database associated with the Kaleido X for which you wish to create a background action Alternatively click Connect on the Configure menu to work online see Using XEdit Online on page 69 2 Click the Actions tab What to do in the Actions tab The Actions tab provides tools for defining actions with their access Y Kaleido X 7RU features and functionality gt System Diagnostic i Remote status gateway gt IID GPUGENLOCK KX4 GPI GE YD INPUT A KXI 16 P Diagnostic Pause a timer Start a timer Load a new layout Monitor audio Switch router crosspoint Set GPI output Show full screen layout Hide full screen layout Assign channel Custom mre A i f System Y Kaleido X 7RUY F System Diagnostic p Remote status gateway W 4 Inthe Tools pane click and drag
409. ystem tab and then click Description Calibrations on the second level tab bar A hierarchical list representing the current system appears 2 Inthe list expand the multi viewer whose output heads you wish to calibrate System Channels Room Layouts RCF users Actions DescriptionCalibrations Interconnects Router Contiqurations Router Connections System e F Y Kaleido X TRU P AD GFGENLOCK KXA GPLGEN HD OPTION A i OPTION B D INPUT A KXI 16 D INPUT E KXxI 16 M INPUT KxI 16 D INPUT D KXI 16 M INPUT E KXI 16 M INPUT F KXI 16 MM OUTPUT amp KXO DUAL 4M OUTPUT B KXO DUAL M OUTPUT KXO DUAL I OUTPUT D KXO DUAL es 3 Expand the appropriate output module The expanded module will show the output heads Depending on the multi viewer model other items may also appear 101 Calibrating the Kaleido X 102 aD INPUT E KXI 16 DDD INPUT F Kx1 16 Y OUTPUT A KXO BUAL beHead 1 Room Head 2 Room iil LTC 1 Loss be LTC 2 Loss ba LTC 3 Loss MM OUTPUT E KxO DUAL Pb 9M OUTPUT E KxXO DUIAL b M OUTPUT O KXO DUAL 4 Select the head you wish to calibrate 5 Click the Properties tab and then select the appropriate value from the DVI Input Keying Mode list kd Calibration Audio Monitoring Color M R 74 c74 B210 Audio Monitoring Delay cms i o Apply to all Color Saturation i T 500 ply teu nut Keying _ Backarou

Kaleido-X User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents